The Google Pixel 10a, starting at Rs 49,999, makes Google’s strongest mid-range case in years. Even though it carries a polycarbonate back into a segment where glass has become expected, a Tensor G4 chip that predates it by a generation, charging speeds that look modest by 2026 standards and bezels thick enough to attract comment, the Pixel 10a is not competing on specifications. It is built on a different premise, one that the software experience, the camera intelligence, the display accuracy and a seven-year update commitment add up to something more durable than any individual benchmark figure. There are real trade-offs here and this review will not sidestep them. But the Pixel 10a makes a case for itself that grows stronger the longer you consider what you actually do with a phone from one day to the next.

Pixel 10a review: Build and design

The Pixel 10a's design is defined in large part by what it does not have. No protruding camera island. No glass back reaching for a premium feel. No safe, predictable colour palette defaulting to black and silver. Google's decision to run the camera module nearly flush with the rear panel is a differentiator in a segment where raised camera housings have become universal. It gives the phone a flat, minimal profile and, in the hand and in a pocket, the phone sits more naturally than its 9 mm depth implies, because there is no camera hump shifting the balance or snagging on fabric.

At 183 g, the weight falls comfortably in the middle of the range for this screen size and category. The polycarbonate back is the one area where the build falls noticeably short of glass-backed alternatives at comparable prices. It scratches and smudges more easily and is a clear step down. That said, the build quality is solid throughout, with no flex or creak under pressure and the phone handles itself well in everyday use.

The colour range includes Obsidian, Fog, Berry and Lavender which carries significantly more personality than the segment's typical safe palette. The Berry and Lavender in particular are choices people make for aesthetic reasons rather than out of indifference and they give the Pixel 10a a visual identity that is recognisable from a distance.

Durability is covered by an IP68 rating, providing meaningful protection against water exposure in everyday scenarios, be it rain, spills or accidental submersion.

Pixel 10a review: Display

The Pixel 10a carries a 6.3-inch FHD+ P-OLED display running at up to 120 Hz, with a peak brightness of 2,850 nits and a standard SDR brightness of 1,360 nits in everyday use. In direct sunlight the display stays comfortably readable without requiring shade or manual adjustments. HDR content in supported streaming titles looks appropriately vivid and well-separated. The 120 Hz adaptive refresh rate makes the interface feel fluid and responsive.

The bezels are noticeably thicker than what buyers at this price have come to expect in 2026. First impressions will register them and in a side-by-side comparison with competitors, the difference is obvious. But after extended use they recede from notice, partly because Google has tuned the software interface to work with the display's geometry rather than against it, but they remain a visible compromise that is difficult to fully overlook at this price.

We put the Pixel 10a through rigorous Calman display testing and the data validate the calibration. In the Natural colour mode, the Pixel 10a returned an average deltaE of 1.9 with 98.2% DCI-P3 colour gamut coverage. For context, a deltaE below 1 is considered indistinguishable to the human eye; anything under 3 is considered excellent. The Pixel 10a sits firmly in accurate territory. The white point skews slightly cool but not to a degree that draws attention during regular use.

Pixel 10a review: Performance and software

The Pixel 10a is powered by Google's in-house Tensor G4, the same chip as last year's Pixel 9a. Google made no hardware update here and in a segment where rivals have moved to Snapdragon 8s Gen 4, the benchmarks reflect a growing gap in raw performance.

The CPU throttling result of 58% is the figure worth pausing on. Under sustained load like extended gaming sessions, intensive multitasking or video processing, the performance drops considerably more than Snapdragon-based alternatives at similar prices. For dedicated mobile gamers or users who regularly run demanding workloads, this is a genuine consideration.

In everyday use, however, the distance between the benchmark scores and lived experience is significant. Pixel UI on Android 16 is one of the most tightly optimised software-hardware pairings in Android and day-to-day tasks like social media, streaming, navigation, photography and communication run with a smoothness that does not reflect the throttling numbers. App launches are quick, multitasking handles reasonable loads without complaint and casual gaming at medium to high settings runs acceptably.

Where the Tensor G4 makes its argument most effectively is in AI processing. Features such as Magic Editor and Best Take for computational photography refinement, Audio Magic Eraser for video clean-up and real-time transcription and translation are not surface-level options, they are embedded into the way the phone works and mature enough to have become part of routine use rather than things to be demonstrated.

Software

The Pixel 10a runs Pixel UI on Android 16 and it is the cleanest stock Android experience available. There are no pre-installed third-party applications, no aggressive notifications demanding attention and no customisation skin adding visual complexity to the interface. The design is focused and consistent, with AI capabilities built in at a system level rather than layered on top as a separate application. The overall experience is bloat-free and notably more cohesive than what most of the segment offers.

The defining commitment is seven years of Android OS updates and seven years of security patches. At Rs 49,999, that is a long-term value argument that few rivals can match at any price. A phone purchased today will remain fully supported and on current Android versions well into 2033. In a segment where four to five-year commitments have become the benchmark, seven years materially changes the maths on long-term ownership and it sets a standard that the rest of the segment has yet to match.

Pixel 10a review: Battery life

The Pixel 10a carries a 5,100 mAh battery, and in our PCMark Work 3.0 battery test it recorded 20 hours and 54 minutes which is a solid result that translates into a full day of heavy use or a day and a half for moderate users. Lighter users can reasonably stretch past two days between charges. Across real-world testing: streaming, navigation, photography and social media through a full day, the phone consistently reached evening with charge remaining, with no cause for mid-day anxiety.

Charging is rated at 30 W wired and 10 W wireless, with bypass charging supported: a feature that routes power directly to the chipset during gaming to keep thermals low and protect long-term battery health. The inclusion of wireless charging at this price is noteworthy as it remains rare in the category. A full charge via wired charging takes approximately one hour and 43 minutes.

The 30 W wired charging speed is the battery section's clear weakness. In a segment that now regularly offers 80 W and above, 30 W requires a shift in charging habits like planning overnight top-ups rather than relying on quick boosts.

Pixel 10a review: Cameras

The Pixel 10a's camera system includes a 48 MP primary sensor, a 13 MP ultrawide with a 120° field of view and a front camera. There is no dedicated telephoto. Google offers a 2x lossless crop from the primary that performs better than most digital zoom operations. It’s clean and usable at 2x, though quality falls away at 3x and beyond, at which point the phone moves into standard digital territory.

Google's computational photography pipeline produces results that consistently exceed what the specification sheet implies, particularly in dynamic range, highlight control and portrait accuracy.

In good light, the Pixel 10a's processing signature is one of high contrast, deep shadows and strong edge sharpening. Architectural subjects such as stone carvings, building facades and fine surface textures come through with a tactile quality that suggests the processing is drawing detail out of the scene rather than smoothing over it. In shots of traditional carved architecture and multi-level buildings, the shadows fall realistically and with depth rather than being aggressively lifted. Dynamic range in mixed lighting is handled well, with highlights preserved and shadow detail recovered without the artificially flat look that over-aggressive HDR processing can introduce.

The Pixel 10a's colour tuning leans cooler and punchier than the segment average. In flower macro shots, reds are saturated and vibrant, greens rendered deeply with clear differentiation between adjacent hues. The processing notably avoids clipping highlights on brightly lit saturated subjects, even red flowers in direct sunlight, an area where many camera systems struggle, handling delicate colour gradients more gracefully than rivals. The cooler white balance is consistent across conditions; it suits architectural and landscape subjects particularly well, though users accustomed to warmer, more immediately flattering results will notice the stylistic difference.

In portrait mode and selfies, rather than brightening faces or lifting shadow detail for an instantly pleasing result, the camera retains natural contrast and micro-contrast, producing portraits that represent the actual lighting conditions of the scene rather than applying a flattering retouch. Skin texture is preserved, lighting reads accurately and portrait edge detection is among the most precise at this price. For photographers who prefer the immediate warmth and brightness some other camera systems apply to faces may need time to adjust to the Pixel's more neutral treatment, but the accuracy it delivers is not something easily replicated by processing.

Selfies are detailed in daylight and softer in low light, following the same pattern as the primary camera.

Low light is where the Pixel 10a's processing advantage over rivals in this segment becomes most evident. In shots of neon-lit scenes, illuminated architecture and busy night markets, such as the shots taken at the Jama Masjid and the a restaurant, the camera does a particularly good job of suppressing bright point light sources. Signs, architectural uplighting and streetlamps stay contained rather than bleeding into surrounding areas. The night sky reads as appropriately dark in scenes where many phones tend to lift ambient light, preserving atmosphere and depth. In very dark conditions with moving subjects, some softness is visible, but static subjects in low light render with strong detail and well-managed noise.

The 13 MP ultrawide with a 120° field of view performs capably in good light, with natural rendering and lens distortion that is present but well-managed at the edges. In low light, noise and detail loss are more apparent, consistent with the sensor size. 

Video from the primary sensor is stable, with effective handheld stabilisation for everyday scenarios. Some noise is visible in daylight footage, which becomes apparent when viewed on larger screens. It is not a weakness that limits everyday recording, but it is a limitation for users who prioritise video quality as a primary use case.

Verdict

The Google Pixel 10a is a phone that rewards the patient buyer. It does not have the fastest chip in its class and it will not win benchmark comparisons against rivals running more recent Snapdragon silicon. The 30 W charging is restrained by 2026 standards. The bezels are thicker than what competitors offer. The polycarbonate back is a material compromise at that price.

However, the display is accurately calibrated and bright enough for strong outdoor performance. The camera system is one of the most consistent and natural in its segment, with a low-light processing advantage that rivals at this price consistently fail to replicate. Pixel UI on Android 16 is the cleanest, most uncluttered Android experience available, with AI features that are practically useful rather than decorative. And the seven-year update commitment is a meaningful difference in what buying this phone actually means over the course of ownership.

For buyers who need faster hardware or optical zoom reach, better-suited alternatives exist at or near this price. But for buyers who want a camera that holds up across every condition, a software experience that stays out of their way and a phone that remains relevant and fully supported well into the next decade, the Pixel 10a makes its case plainly. It is not the most dramatic choice in its class. It is, by most everyday measures, one of the best.

Smartwatches have reached a point where even affordable options are trying to offer premium features. So much so that the challenge is no longer adding more features but delivering an experience that feels complete in daily use. After spending time with the Realme Watch S5, I came away feeling that Realme understands this well. It packs a bright AMOLED display, built-in GPS, Bluetooth calling, extensive fitness tracking, and impressive battery life into a package that costs under Rs 8,000. Although the device does have some drawbacks, it manages to find that middle ground. 

I've been using the Realme Watch S5 as my primary smartwatch for the past few days, paired with a OnePlus 15. Though the company claims big things about the wearable, let's just deep dive and check how much of that is actually true. Here’s my full review.

Realme Watch S5: Design

When I first unboxed and assembled the Realme Watch S5, it did not look like a budget smartwatch. The circular dial, combined with the aluminium alloy frame, gives it a premium appearance that easily blends into both casual and formal settings. It also feels sturdy in hand and does not give the impression of being cheaply built. I could be sitting at my desk, walking outdoors, or wearing it overnight for sleep tracking, and the weight never felt bothersome to me. Of course, the main reason for this is that it only weighs 49.63 grams, including the strap.

The Watch S5 also boasts three physical side buttons, making the navigation easier and adding to the overall experience as you no longer need to juggle through the apps to open certain things. Moreover, while most interactions happen through the touchscreen, having dedicated buttons is always useful during workouts or when your hands are wet.

However, I do have mixed feelings about the bundled silica gel, aka silicone straps, which I already mentioned in my first impression. While this is more of a personal preference than a direct criticism, I have never been a fan of silica gel straps on smartwatches. In case of exercise or even everyday activities, when it is humid, it becomes difficult for me to keep the sweat away from beneath the strap of the watch, considering that I wear it tightly for better health results.

Another thing about the Realme Watch S5 is that sweat usually takes its time to evaporate, making the watch slightly uncomfortable to wear for longer durations. This was due to the sensors on the back getting dirty easily. In order for the sensors to read accurately, I had to clean them regularly. I experienced this multiple times with SpO₂ measurements, as when the sensors were covered in sweat, the watch often refused to record a reading.

In terms of durability, the Realme Watch S5 uses Panda Glass protection, which should provide some resistance against everyday wear. Still, much like almost every smartwatch I have tested, the Watch S5 picked up a few minor scratches during normal usage and daily travel. They are not immediately visible unless viewed under direct light, but it shows that you still need to be extra careful in that compartment. I'd suggest you go ahead and put up an external screen guard to keep it safe.

Realme Watch S5: Display

The display is arguably one of the strongest aspects of the Realme Watch S5. The company has equipped the smartwatch with a 1.43-inch AMOLED display. Furthermore, it is equipped with a 466 x 466 resolution and a display pixel density of 302 PPI, which makes the display appear sharp, colourful, and enjoyable to view all day long.

While the on-paper specs give you high hopes, the real-life testing tells you the correct story. When put to the test, everything from watch faces to notifications appears crisp. The colours felt punchy without looking unnatural, and the overall viewing experience feels premium for a smartwatch in this price segment.

The company claims a peak brightness of 1,000 nits, and during my testing as well, the outdoor visibility was generally excellent. Under direct sunlight, I could comfortably read notifications, fitness statistics, and other information without having to search for shade.

That said, if you have ever used a high-end smartwatch like an Apple Watch before, you may notice that the Watch S5 does not appear quite as bright. However, this sort of comparison also needs context. Basically, the price difference is quite significant between these two watches. While the Apple Watch has been the gold standard when it comes to smartwatches and brightness, it also costs upwards of Rs 40,000 to Rs 45,000. In Realme’s case, it gives you a damn good experience and legibility, for a smartwatch that costs under Rs 8,000.

That said, one minor issue that I will point out with my watch is its automatic brightness feature. On more than one occasion, I have stepped out of the house and had to wait for the watch to get used to the change in environment and light levels. When manually set to maximum brightness, the display remains perfectly usable outdoors. However, the trade-off is that the battery consumption is increased.

Realme Watch S5: Software experience

In all honesty, the one aspect that made me unable to appreciate the Watch S5 fully was its software. The watch works well enough on its own. However, the user experience is entirely dependent on the companion app, which is where I had most of my issues.

During my testing, I faced random disconnections between the watch and the Realme Link app. Reconnecting it was not as simple as pairing again. I often had to reset the watch completely before it could be paired back successfully. This also deletes all your previous health data from both the device and the unsynced app.

These problems significantly affected my overall experience because even excellent hardware can feel frustrating when the software ecosystem is unreliable.

Realme Watch S5: Watch faces and customisation

Customisation is another area where the Watch S5 feels somewhat limited. The watch does provide a healthy selection of watch faces, including cloud-based options, custom photo watch faces, and always-on display support. For many users, this may be sufficient.

Personally, I enjoy personalising my smartwatch to reflect my own style and preferences. Unfortunately, the customisation options here are more limited than they initially appear. Many watch faces only allow colour adjustments rather than meaningful layout changes. You cannot significantly alter the arrangement of complications or customise information displays to the extent offered by some competing platforms.

Storage limitations add another inconvenience. The watch can only store around 12 watch faces locally at a time. Downloading and syncing new faces also takes longer than expected. As a result, customisation feels functional rather than exciting.

Realme Watch S5: Notifications and smart features

Notifications are one of the most important smartwatch features, and unfortunately, this is another area where the Watch S5 leaves room for improvement. Basic notifications arrive reliably most of the time, but the overall experience feels limited.

Images within notifications cannot be viewed properly. Emoji support is inconsistent, meaning messages occasionally lose context when displayed on the watch. Notification customisation options are also quite limited compared to more mature smartwatch platforms.

Voice replies exist, but in my experience, they were not reliable enough to become part of my daily workflow. There were too many situations where using my phone directly felt faster and easier.

That said, Bluetooth calling performs much better. Call quality was generally good, voices sounded clear, and the built-in microphone handled conversations reasonably well. For quick calls while walking or working, the feature proved genuinely useful.

Realme Watch S5: Fitness tracking and health monitoring

The Realme Watch S5 packs in a solid set of health features. You get heart rate tracking, blood oxygen monitoring, sleep analysis, stress tracking, breathing exercises, and support for over 110 sports modes. On the surface, it sounds like everything you could ask for. But having a long feature list and actually delivering on it are two different things.

Take heart rate monitoring. For everyday use, it does the job fine. But during workouts, the readings jumped around more than I would have liked. Nothing wildly off, but not the kind of steady, reliable data you want when you are actually pushing yourself.

Step counting had its moments, too. Some days it felt spot on, while other days it was clearly counting things that were not steps. The most telling moment? I got a notification saying I had hit my daily walking goal while I was sitting at my desk typing. That was hard to ignore.

Workout tracking tells a similar story. The data it gives you is useful enough, but I would call it decent rather than impressive. What really got to me was the auto-detection. It kept missing workouts that should have triggered automatically, so I ended up having to start sessions manually more often than not.

If you are someone who just wants a rough idea of how active you are being, these things probably will not bother you much. But if you take your training seriously and need numbers you can actually trust, this watch may leave you wanting more.

Realme Watch S5: GPS performance

One feature I was particularly interested in testing was the built-in GPS. The good news is that independent GPS functionality works reasonably well. Being able to leave your phone behind during a walk or run is convenient, and the watch generally maintains a stable connection to satellite systems.

Route-tracking accuracy was sufficient for daily exercise. Distance tracking appeared accurate, and recorded routes matched my movements most of the time.

That said, route and distance tracking do not quite match the performance offered by dedicated sports watches from companies such as Samsung or Garmin. Occasional discrepancies appeared in the recorded maps. Even so, the GPS performs reliably and remains one of the watch's strongest features.

Realme Watch S5: Battery life and charging

Battery life is another spot where the marketing numbers and real life do not quite match up. Realme claims up to 20 days of battery life, and sure, you can get there technically. But to do that, you have to switch on Light Smart Mode and turn off most of the health tracking features running in the background. At that point, what is even the point of buying a smartwatch loaded with features?

In actual use, I got around six to seven days with the always-on display turned on, which I thought was fair. Switching that off may push it to somewhere between 10 and 12 days, which honestly feels like the more realistic number most people will land on day to day.

However, charging was where things slowed down a bit. It took close to three hours to go from empty to full, and the watch did get a little warm while plugged in. It has been brutally hot lately, so I am willing to give the wearable the benefit of the doubt in this department.

The Watch S5 relies on a proprietary magnetic charging puck connected via USB Type-C. The magnetic attachment is weaker than I would prefer, making alignment somewhat frustrating. More than once, I found myself readjusting the watch to ensure charging had started properly.

Realme Watch S5: Final verdict

The Realme Watch S5 is a smartwatch that constantly reminds you of its potential. It has an excellent AMOLED display, dependable battery life, built-in GPS, good Bluetooth calling, and an attractive design that looks more premium than its price suggests.

Unfortunately, the software issues prevent it from providing the experience matching the quality of its hardware. Frequent connectivity problems, sync failures, limited customisation, average fitness accuracy, weak notification handling, and a frustrating companion app make the watch harder to recommend than it should be.

If your priorities are display quality, battery life, and basic smartwatch functionality, the Watch S5, priced at Rs 7,999, delivers enough value to remain a reasonable option. However, if you expect a polished software experience and highly accurate fitness tracking, you may find yourself wishing Realme had invested as much effort into the software as it did into the hardware.

A few months back, I visited the Beyond Appliances factory near Delhi and saw the assembly lines and processes involved in manufacturing chimneys. Later, the brand sent us a review unit of one of its key products: the Beyond Appliances Eris chimney, which is called India's first Android chimney. It has a phablet-sized touchscreen above the suction area that runs on Android and comes with quick controls, cooking guides, and even a full-fledged app library, including YouTube, Spotify, and popular OTT apps. My family has been using the chimney for a month or so now, and I have a bunch of thoughts about this thing.

If you are thinking of installing a chimney in your kitchen and have a budget of under Rs 20,000, I think you should read about my experience with the Beyond Appliances Eris chimney. Here’s everything you need to know regarding the installation, using the chimney in the hot Delhi summer, whether that screen makes sense, and what it was like to have a phone-like screen hovering over our cooktop.

Eris chimney: Installation and ducting

The Eris chimney came in first, and upon intimation, the brand sent a technician for installation. If your kitchen doesn't have a duct opening, you'll need to have one installed before calling in the Beyond Appliances technician. If you don't want to or can't create a ventilation opening, you can consider Cube, a ductless chimney from the brand.

The technician unboxed and mounted the chimney on the wall without our help. If needed, you can offer a hand to lift the chimney. It will be convenient for you and the technician if you vacate the area beneath or cover the cooktop and other items present there. This would allow for easy cleaning of the dust from the drilling in the installation process. This part of the experience could differ based on the technician and the ducting layout.

For our setup, we repurposed the exhaust opening, so no hammer and chisel were required. The required ducting length was also short. A proper ducting with fewer bends is advisable to maintain airflow efficiency and keep noise levels in the house under control. Also, if the duct is just above the chimney, the duct hole and pipe can be hidden behind a bundled black metallic enclosure.

Eris chimney: Design and screen

Eris is a slant-style chimney with a black glossy finish. I can't lie, it is a looker, and even in our modest kitchen setup, it adds a modern charm. It should easily blend in with modular kitchens, especially darker countertop setups. Since it isn't too heavy, you should be able to easily unmount and reinstall it.

As a chimney placed above the cooktop or hobtop, over a period of usage, it collects grime and oil residue. The good thing, however, is that this dirt isn't visible easily. Only if you get very close to the chimney and rub with your finger will you see this.

The materials in use on the chimney and duct pipe are good. We tested the 60 cm variant, which is suitable for cook/hobtops with 3 or fewer burners. It doesn't take up too much space. The slant design offers ample headroom for the person standing in front of the cooktop.

And for people standing next to the cooktop, the Eris chimney offers light through a built-in lamp on it. This is present above the suction inlet. Thanks to this, you don't have to always put on a different tube light or bulb in the kitchen. One minor gripe I have with the lamp is that it stays on by default, and the only option to toggle it off was in the homescreen of the Android screen. That means you have to switch on the screen first to turn off the lamp.

Well, that 7-inch touchscreen is a big reason the Eris stands out from conventional options in the market. It is present above the suction inlet and the lamp, and shorter folks would struggle a bit to reach it. But if you can access it, its usage is somewhat similar to a phone/tablet. The touch response is serviceable, and the UI is user-friendly with touch-based buttons, knobs, sliders and easily graspable gesture controls. For controlling volume, jumping to the homescreen and opening the recents menu, there is a permanent floating translucent button on the screen. Tap it and access these controls. Nice. And the UI colours, contrast and font offer decent legibility.

In essence, you don't have to keep a phone in the kitchen for entertainment and information. Earlier, my mom used to place her phone on a stand or lean it against any utensil. Well, that can be unstable and insecure. The phone could drop, or something could drop on the phone, and either way, the phone could get damaged. So the Beyond Appliances Eris acts as a relieving alternative for using smartphones in the kitchen.

Under the hood, this phone-like screen on the Eris chimney has Android 11 operating system and supports apps like YouTube, Spotify and recipe platforms. The older Android version is fine for a kitchen appliance. The chimney also has fairly loud speakers. So with that display and speaker setup, you can watch recipe videos while cooking, listen to songs, the news, or watch a movie, for all you care. You do not have to touch your phone with oily hands.

The Chef Connect section has some pre-built recipes with text and image-based guides. Navigating this wasn't the smoothest experience, and you can see some typos, which suggests the brand can work more on polishing this feature. And every time you boot this Android OS, a pop-up window asking for access appears, which is a little annoying.

But, overall, the large touchscreen UI becomes the focal point of this appliance. Guests notice it instantly. And it is a handy thing to have while cooking in the kitchen.

Also Read: Hisense Intelli Cool Pro 1.5 ton AC review: Reliable cooling with reasonable smarts

Eris chimney: Suction performance and cooking experience

Eris performs well. My parents weren't very big believers in a chimney. But lately, I have seen them putting it on frequently. At 1500 CMH, the suction is genuinely powerful. It quickly sucks smoke and steam from frying pans, kadai, and cookers. Using it led to less smell, also. Mind you, we were using the Eris during the hot Delhi summer in a kitchen involving basic boiling, steaming and frying things multiple times a day to deep-frying snacks and cooking heavy masala dishes for lunch or dinner.

The Eris chimney offers multiple speed levels, and for most daily cooking, the middle setting was enough. You can use the highest mode for intense cooking sessions, but this one can be noticeably louder. Premium chimneys with BLDC motor may produce even less noise.

For a better experience, I figure you may switch on the chimney as soon as cooking begins, so that the smoke doesn't accumulate.

You can tap the fan hotkey (touch-based) on the right side of the touch screen to control the speed. You can also control the fan speed on the homescreen of the touchscreen interface. There are three speed levels.

By the way, the touchscreen Android interface is off by default. When you turn on the chimney, it isn't on. You have to manually activate it by tapping the power button on the left side of the touchscreen.

Unlike a baffle filter-based chimney here, grease gets collected internally and flows into an oil collector tray through the auto-clean mechanism. Still, you are advised to maintain the chimney regularly to avoid oil buildup. Cleaning the tray is easy. So, maintenance isn't a problem.

That said, I do think Beyond Appliances could simplify the software experience further. Most people buying chimneys primarily care about suction, reliability and maintenance. OTT apps on a chimney feel more like a bonus than a necessity.

There is also the long-term durability question. Kitchens are hot, greasy and humid environments. The screen survived our testing period without issues, but durability over several years will matter more than first impressions. Beyond Appliances does include physical touch controls as backup, which is reassuring.

Should you buy Beyond Appliances Eris chimney?

After using the Beyond Appliances Eris for over a month, I can say it is not just another chimney with an Android screen attached to it. This screen does add value, as you can use it to follow recipes, listen to music or watch videos while cooking or otherwise. My family, particularly my mother, who is not tech-savvy, ended up using the screen more than I initially expected.

At the core, the chimney does its primary job well. The suction power is effective in quickly clearing smoke and steam. The fan noise from its operation is manageable. The slant design also offers good headroom and doesn't feel intrusive while cooking.

The Android experience is passable for a kitchen appliance, but it needs a bit more polish. Coming from fast phones and other devices, this UI feels a tad slow. Some of its features, like Chef Connect, could use further refinement. Since Beyond Appliance is approaching kitchen appliances from a technology perspective, my task is not just to judge the chimney's performance, but also to point out these quirks. And after a long-term use, only I will be able to tell you how well that touchscreen UI ages in the hot, humid and greasy kitchen environment.

You see, if your priority is simply getting a chimney, there are several other options in the market with different tiers of features, performance, brand recall and service support. But, at Rs 18,999, the Eris makes sense if you are already looking for a premium chimney and like the idea of having entertainment and recipe guidance built directly into the appliance. The screen is not something I would buy the chimney for on its own, but after living with it, I can see its appeal. Now in time, I will see if the novelty wears off and whether I actually keep using it regularly.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar stories.

Also Read: Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 review: Do traditional air coolers make sense in the age of ACs?

Reviewing a large-screen TV is always fun, and if it is a high-end model, then you’re always in for a treat, thanks to the grand visual experience. When the Xiaomi TV S Mini LED 75 arrived at our doorstep, moving it to the Digit Test Labs was a bit of work, but even in its packed state, it was already turning heads. For obvious reasons, I had to take the help of some of my colleagues to unbox and set it up on a table. They all gawked at the visuals for some time, and that was their reward, I guess. But, as someone who reviews a lot of TVs, my task was beyond just enjoying what's in front of me. 

I have consumed a lot of content on the Xiaomi S Mini LED 75-inch TV, for a few weeks now, and here's my full review that should tell you if it's worth shelling out Rs 99,999 on a panel this big, how much of an impact the Mini LED tech makes, whether the sound has a big presence, and everything else that matters in your everyday TV use.

Xiaomi TV S Mini LED 75: Display and audiovisual quality

The main selling point of the Xiaomi S Mini LED TV is, of course, the screen: a 75-inch VA LCD panel with QD-Mini LED backlighting. The company claims 512 dimming zones, 1,200 nits of peak brightness, and 94 per cent DCI-P3 colour coverage. The result is finely bright visuals, punchy colours, deep blacks, and agreeable viewing angles. Due to the bright and vibrant visuals, I didn't mind watching even ads sometimes. Personally, I love watching travel shows or city walkthrough videos on such big screens for the scale and immersion.

In regular everyday SDR content, the screen was easy on the eyes. I watched a few sitcom episodes and the Malayalam film Sambhavam Adhyayam Onnu on JioHotstar, and the forest-heavy scenes especially looked rich and captivating on the large panel. Upscaling performance is decent overall, as I had a pleasant rewatch of some scenes from Meet Joe Black.

HDR performance, however, is a little more inconsistent. While watching the final episode of The Boys in HDR10+ on Amazon Prime Video, one of my colleagues immediately pointed out visible graininess in some scenes. At the same time, close-up shots of characters carried realness with strong facial detail and depth. Another thing was that the colours looked very saturated, and skin tones, in particular, appeared pinker or redder than natural. Switching the colour temperature from Warm to Neutral improved things noticeably for me.

Watching Top Gun: Maverick on Amazon Prime Video also exposed a few more limitations. The dogfight sequences were not always the easiest to follow, especially during fast aerial movements. In the darker command room scenes, close-up shots of actors looked sharp and detailed, but the background showed visible choppy artefacts. Around the 1 hour 34 minute mark, I also noticed temporary image retention where the pocket watch impression lingered briefly on screen.

Other than this, motion handling is fine for watching IPL and tracking the movement of the ball, for instance. But I saw there is visible stuttering during other fast-moving scenes and panning shots. For example, the opening drone sequence in the Wild Isle documentary on Prime Video showed noticeable judder.

The Xiaomi S Mini LED display's plus and minus were apparent on Dolby Vision content, too. Say, in Stranger Things on Netflix, the villain, Vecna's veiny body, looked creepily lifelike. So, the Xiaomi TV screen has its appeal whenever subjects are well-lit and in focus; you can see more life in them. But, here too, some pixelation artefacts were visible in darker scenes.

I didn't encounter any jarring blooming issues, but there was noticeable banding in the gradient-heavy desert scenes of the Dune 3 teaser trailer.

As for games, we played Hogwarts Legacy on a connected Sony PS5 Pro, and the experience was alright. Playing on the big screen was fun, but the Mini LED magic couldn't be felt. We switched between different picture profiles and stuck with the HDR game preset.

Finally, the audio output is befitting the large visuals on screen. Be it gaming or the Top Gun Maverick dogfight, everything was loud and enjoyable on the Xiaomi S Mini LED 75.

Also Read: Vu Vibe DV review: A balanced QLED TV under Rs 35,000

Xiaomi TV S Mini LED 75: Design and connectivity

The Xiaomi S Mini LED 75 is massive but minimal. You see, the bezels are slim enough that they almost disappear once the content starts playing. This is largely because you are sitting in front of a 75-inch expanse that dominates your field of view.

The screen is held firmly by a chassis of reassuring quality, and the tabletop stands. These stands can be positioned either near the edges or closer to the centre. While setting it up, one of my friends was confused about what the optional cavities were for. We chose the extreme edge ones, and there is no worrying creak or flex. The option is appreciated.

Wherever you mount it, or even for unboxing it, an extra pair of hands would be required, as it is a massive TV.

And if you choose to wall-mount, no kit is included in the box, and it will have to be bought from the brand. But if you do place it on the wall, the left-side-facing port array is easily reachable. The IO array includes 3 HDMI ports (one is HDMI 2.1 with eARC and ALLM support), 2 USB 2.0 ports, Ethernet, Optical audio, and wireless connectivity happens through Bluetooth 5.0 and Dual-band Wi-Fi.

Note that the panel supports a 60Hz refresh rate only, and so you get 4K 60Hz natively, along with 120Hz DLG (Dual Line Gate) mode. This is a software-based upscaling that simulates a 120Hz refresh rate when you enable the Game Boost feature. Also, USB 3.0 would have been preferable as competing TVs have these specifications.

Rest, on the rear, towards the right, there is a power cable, but no routing channels are present. Well, a built-in cable routing solution would have been sweet for a seemingly showpiece of a TV like this.

Xiaomi appears to have chosen to go large on not just the screen: The bundled remote is also longer than usual remotes. It has the table stake buttons, includes the hotkeys for all popular OTT platforms and Google Assistant voice control. Nice.

But the problem is that because of the length of the remote, you'll have to do some finger gymnastics to reach certain buttons, especially the ones on the corners, like the Google Assistant button. Another personal gripe is with the location of the Patchwall UI button. I was accidentally triggering it several times, as many TVs have the back button there. But it is a matter of learning and habit. That's all.

Xiaomi TV S Mini LED 75: Software and performance

The Xiaomi S Mini LED 75 runs Google TV based on Android 14 out of the box. And if you want a different UI, you can jump to Xiaomi’s PatchWall+ interface with a simple button click. PatchWall could help you discover regional content, and Google TV is also a reliable UI for content discovery. There is also Xiaomi TV+ for free ad-supported streaming channels. I appreciate the options on offer. You can cast content through Chromecast or AirPlay 2 and install other apps you like from the Google Play Store. The TV ships with 32GB of storage.

But there is a hardware limitation here. The quad-core ARM Cortex-A55 processor, coupled with just 2GB of RAM, shows the struggle when you switch between apps, open and close menus and load homescreen rows. This wasn't right away noticeable. Only when I was juggling multiple apps and cycling between screens and settings did things start slowing down. I also observed occasional lags while navigating picture settings with content still playing in the background.

So, there are a lot of options and features, but sometimes the UI hesitates momentarily.

Should you buy Xiaomi TV S Mini LED 75 2026?

At Rs 99,999, Xiaomi has priced the S Mini LED 75 2026 TV similarly to comparably specced TVs from Hisense and TCL. And for the money, you are getting several good things like a massive 75-inch screen with rich colours and plenty of brightness, paired with loud enough speaker output, packed in a minimal design suited for modern living spaces. In the mix, the multi-UI choice of Android 14-based Google TV and PatchWall+ is nice to have, and the connectivity selection should be fine for basic use.

However, in regular use, you'd notice some of the compromises. The software experience is not always as fluid and responsive as some competing TVs in this broad competitive market. And sometimes, in certain scenes, you'd come across processing limitations like motion stutter, artefacts in darker backgrounds, or inconsistent HDR tuning. And while the connectivity options cover the essentials, specifications like USB 3.0 or a more capable HDMI implementation would have made the package feel more future-ready.

Still, despite these shortcomings, the Xiaomi S Mini LED 75 2026 edition makes sense for a particular kind of buyer. If your priority is a large-screen cinematic experience with vibrant visuals, strong brightness, and Mini LED contrast without spending flagship money, this TV delivers that experience rather convincingly. So, it is best suited for those who want an impressive screen presence in their living room or bedroom for casual viewing and some occasional gaming.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar stories.

Also Read: Amazon Fire TV Stick HD review: A smart upgrade for older TVs at just Rs 4,999

The Indian summers are at their peak, and finding an air conditioner that balances cost, features, and raw cooling power can be tough. The Intex SRAC183i Inverter AC enters this competitive space with an aggressive Market Operating Price (MOP) of Rs 35,490. It targets buyers who want modern inverter technology without the premium price tag of legacy AC brands. Of course, there is a catch, which I address later in this review, but before that, here is a detailed breakdown of its technical specifications.

Also read: Hisense Intelli Cool Pro 1.5 ton AC review: Reliable cooling with reasonable smarts

Cooling Capacity: 1.5 Ton Inverter Split Air Conditioner: Ideal for medium-sized rooms (150–180 sq. ft.).
Compressor: High-Efficiency Inverter Compressor for faster cooling and lower electricity consumption.
Condenser: 100 per cent Copper Condenser with Anti-Corrosion Blue Fin Coating for extended durability.
Special Modes: Turbo Cooling Mode for instant temperature drop and Eco Mode for optimised performance.
Airflow: 4-Way Air Swing for uniform cooling across every corner.
Smart Features: Sleep Mode, Self-Diagnosis, and Auto Restart Function.
Display and Aesthetics: Hidden LED Display with a Modern Premium Design.
Power Management: Stabiliser-Free Operation with a Wide Voltage Range.
Price: MOP - Rs 35,490.

Design, build quality and remote control

The indoor unit (IDU) of the Intex SRAC183i keeps things simple, clean and functional. It’s everything that a modern AC should be. There are no aggressive geometric shapes or flashy accents. Instead, its classic white chassis blends easily into almost any indoor environment. The finish is smooth, and the plastic used feels sturdy enough to resist rattling or creaking when the blower runs at full speed.

While this AC isn't ultra-slim, Intex has managed the proportions well. It doesn't look overly bulky or project too far out from the wall. A major highlight here is the Hidden LED Display. When the AC is turned off, the front panel looks completely seamless. Once turned on, the temperature digits glow softly through the plastic panel, giving it a modern, premium aesthetic that punches above its price class.

The indoor unit comes with a 4-Way Air Swing (automated horizontal and vertical louvres). This is a massive bonus, given that in this budget segment, many manufacturers cut corners by offering only 2-way auto-swing. Intex has included full automation here to ensure that you can direct the airflow exactly where you want it, right from the couch or bed.

The outdoor unit (ODU) is exactly what you want it to be: large, heavy and robustly constructed. The outer casing uses thick sheet metal designed to endure direct sunlight, heavy rain and dust storms.

The accompanying remote control is compact, lightweight and fits comfortably in the hand. It features a clean button layout with dedicated shortcuts for major modes like Turbo, Eco and Sleep. I really liked the presence of a Self-Cleaning button, which runs the indoor fan for a short duration after turning off the cooling cycle to dry out residual moisture on the evaporator coils, preventing mould and bad odours.

Key features and daily usability

There are a bunch of features on this model that further make the pricing exciting. These are tailored for everyday convenience and regional power quirks:

Stabiliser-Free Operation: The AC is engineered to handle a wide voltage range safely. If you live in an area prone to minor voltage fluctuations, you don't need to mount a bulky, unattractive external stabiliser on your wall.

Auto Restart: In case of a power cut, the AC automatically resumes operation with your previous temperature, fan speed and swing settings once power is restored. This is essential for uninterrupted sleep during stormy summer nights.

Sleep Mode: This feature gradually adjusts the room temperature by a couple of degrees over the course of the night. It accounts for the natural drop in ambient night temperatures and your body's cooling metabolism. It’s super useful for someone like me who often wakes up freezing at 4 am to either change the AC temperature or to switch it off. Needless to say, this feature also helps save power.

Eco Mode: For mild summer days or evening usage, Eco Mode caps the maximum power consumption of the compressor, optimising performance so your electricity meter doesn't spin out of control.

Cooling Performance

There couldn’t have been a better time to test this AC. The temperature in Delhi-NCR has been exceeding 40 degrees Celsius over the past month, often hitting 45 degrees in the last two weeks. I have been testing the AC in a fairly decent-sized master bedroom (~160 sq. ft.), which revealed its true capabilities.

The unit delivers a solid and reliable performance. The Intex 1.5 Ton AC does not offer an instant blast of air upon startup. Instead, it follows a steadier, progressive approach to lowering the room's temperature. It quietly works its way down to your target setting rather than forcing the compressor to max capacity instantly. However, once it hits that target, it settles incredibly well, maintaining a perfectly uniform thermal environment without annoying temperature spikes.

Even when outside temperatures hovered at 45 degrees Celsius, keeping the AC set to 24 degrees was more than enough to keep the room perfectly chilled. The advanced inverter compressor does an excellent job of constantly adjusting its cooling capacity based on the real-time heat load of the room, keeping the compressor running at lower, more efficient speeds once the room is cool.

In case you need an immediate temperature drop, there is also Turbo Cooling Mode, which forces the compressor and the indoor blower fan to run at absolute maximum capacity for quick relief, though it does come with a temporary jump in power usage.

Air distribution is another high point. Thanks to the 4-way swing and a well-engineered blower fan, the air throw easily covers the entire room, leaving zero hot pockets or stagnant air zones. Furthermore, the indoor unit is relatively noise-free even at medium-to-high fan speeds.

Durability and trade-off

Intex has utilised a 100 per cent copper condenser coil to ensure that this AC lasts for years. Copper is vastly superior to aluminium because it offers better heat exchange efficiency, is much easier to repair if a leak occurs and handles high pressure significantly better.

To sweeten the deal, the copper coils are treated with an Anti-Corrosion Blue Fin Coating. This protective layer acts as a shield against moisture, acid deposition and salt accumulation. This is particularly important and useful if you live in a coastal area or an urban zone with high pollution levels, which can accelerate coil corrosion and cause gas leaks.

While the performance is top-tier for the price, a major limitation of this AC is that it carries a 3-star energy efficiency rating. An inverter compressor helps lower electricity consumption compared to old fixed-speed ACs, but a 3-star rating means it will inherently consume more power annually than a premium 4-star or 5-star inverter AC of the same capacity.

So, you must factor in your projected usage patterns before purchasing. If you only plan to run the AC for a few hours at night during the hottest months, the money saved upfront on the purchase price makes a lot of sense. However, if this is for a home office or a living room where the AC will run 12 to 15 hours every single day, the increased electricity bills over 2–3 years might bridge the price gap to a 5-star model.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy Book 6 Ultra review: The Jack of all trades

Final verdict

The Intex SRAC183i 1.5 Ton Inverter AC is a highly capable, value-driven appliance. At Rs 35,490, it has a premium and modern design with great inclusions like the hidden LED display, robust build quality, a 100 per cent copper condenser, and a fully automated 4-way air swing. Some of these features are often missing from budget competitors.

While it takes a steady, methodical approach to cooling rather than a flash-freezing one, it handles intense heat effortlessly once it stabilises. The 3-star rating is its only notable compromise. If you need a reliable, feature-packed AC for moderate daily use and want to keep your initial investment low, this Intex model is an excellent, smart choice for your home.

Samsung's A-series has long been the most sensible answer to the question of which mid-range Samsung phone to buy in India. These phones are reliable, well-supported, widely serviced and built to last. The Galaxy A57 continues that tradition in nearly every meaningful respect, arriving thinner and lighter than its predecessor, rated IP68 for the first time in this line and powered by the new Exynos 1680 chipset with a base configuration that now starts at 8 GB of LPDDR5X RAM. It ships with Android 16 out of the box with One UI 8.5 and Samsung's promise of six major OS upgrades gives the A57 one of the strongest long-term software commitments in the segment. The camera hardware looks unchanged on paper: a 50 MP main sensor with OIS, a 12 MP ultrawide and a 5 MP macro, but the improved ISP (image signal processing) tells a more interesting story in real-world use.

All of that sounds like a compelling package and in many ways it is. The problem is the price tag. Launched at Rs 56,999 for the base 8 GB + 256 GB variant and Rs 62,499 for the 12 GB + 256 GB model, the A57 costs roughly Rs 15,000 more than the A56 did at launch and that gap demands justification. Whether the A57 earns it is exactly what this review sets out to find.

Samsung Galaxy A57 review: Design and build

Pick up the A57 after the A56 and at 179 g and 6.9 mm thin, the A57 feels like a meaningfully different proposition in hand than the A56's 198 g and 7.4 mm profile, which made it feel slightly blocky by comparison. Samsung has shaved off 19 g and half a millimetre of thickness while keeping the same 6.7-inch footprint and the result is a phone that balances well and sits comfortably in a single hand without feeling dense or unwieldy.

The build quality is excellent for the price. A layer of Gorilla Glass Victus+ covers both the front and the back, while the aluminium frame is solid and well-finished and the whole assembly feels premium without resorting to fussy materials or design gimmicks. The A57 is available in four colours: Navy, Grey, Icyblue and Lilac, all of them clean, grown-up finishes that age gracefully and don't demand attention. There's no aggressive texture pattern or loud colour science here.

The upgrade to IP68 dust and water resistance is a genuine improvement over the A56's IP67. The A57 can handle immersion to 1.5 m for up to 30 minutes, which is a meaningful real-world upgrade for anyone who's ever fumbled their phone near a sink or been caught in the rain. At this price, it's the baseline you'd expect and Samsung delivers it.

The under-display optical fingerprint sensor is fast and accurate. The dual stereo speaker grilles are positioned sensibly. There's no 3.5 mm headphone jack, which is expected at this point and the USB Type-C 2.0 port is functional but dated.

Samsung Galaxy A57 review: Display

The Galaxy A57 features a 6.7-inch Super AMOLED+ panel running at 120Hz with a Full HD+ (2340 x 1080 resolution). The move from the A56's standard Super AMOLED to Super AMOLED+ brings a measurably richer viewing experience, so you can expect deeper blacks, slightly more vibrant colours and a more consistent brightness profile across the panel.

In our testing, the A57 peaked at 2,020 nits, comfortably exceeding Samsung's own claim of 1,900 nits, while the SDR content peaked at 730 nits. We conclude that it is a brighter panel and outdoor legibility in direct sunlight is significantly better than on the A56. The HDR10+ support means streaming content on Netflix and YouTube looks the way it was intended to and the OLED contrast gives movies and games a visual punch that LCD alternatives at this price simply cannot match.

The 120Hz adaptive refresh rate keeps scrolling and animations fluid and the Aqua Touch feature handles wet or sweaty finger inputs reliably. The touch latency is low and the screen responds accurately without any perceptible lag.

The one criticism worth raising here is the display resolution. While the A57's display is perfectly sharp for everyday use, the text is crisp, images are clean, but at Rs 56,999, competitors in this segment are offering 1.5K panels. It's not a dealbreaker in practical use, but it's a visible gap on a spec sheet that Samsung should have addressed at this price point.

Samsung Galaxy A57 review: Performance and software

The Galaxy A57 is powered by Samsung's own Exynos 1680, built on a 4 nm process and with an octa-core CPU where one prime core is clocked at 2.9 GHz, four performance cores at 2.6 GHz and three efficiency cores at 1.95 GHz, paired with the Xclipse 550 GPU. The base 8 GB LPDDR5X RAM configuration is a step up from the A56's base 6 GB and storage uses UFS 3.1 across all variants.

Here's how the A57 fared in our benchmark suite:

The AnTuTu score of 1,382,419 puts the Exynos 1680 well clear of the Exynos 1580 and in competitive territory against other upper-mid-range chips. The 81% CPU throttle score is the more meaningful figure for real-world use as it tells you that the A57 sustains close to its peak output under extended load rather than collapsing into thermal throttling after a few minutes. That matters for sustained gaming sessions, long video recording runs and anything that demands consistent compute power over time.

In daily use, the phone is fast, fluid and consistent. App launches feel quick, multitasking between heavy applications is seamless and the UFS 3.1 storage keeps file transfers and installs snappy. For gaming, the Xclipse 550 handles popular titles like BGMI and COD Mobile at stable frame rates without alarming the thermals. It isn't a chip that will impress serious gamers, but it delivers exactly what a mid-range daily driver should: predictable, drama-free performance.

Software is one of the A57's strongest arguments. One UI 8.5 on Android 16 is one of the cleanest Android implementations available with fluid animations, sensible information architecture and a bloat level that's lower than previous Samsung mid-range generations. Galaxy AI features like Circle to Search, Live Translate and Note Assist are functional rather than gimmicks. Samsung's commitment to six major OS upgrades means the A57 will remain current software-wise well into the 2030s, which strengthens the long-term ownership story that few competitors can match at this price.

Samsung Galaxy A57 review: Battery and charging

The Galaxy A57 has a 5,000 mAh battery, the same as A56 and charges at 45 W over a wired connection. There's no wireless charging and no reverse charging support.

In our PCMark Work 3.0 battery life test, the A57 ran for 14 hours and 43 minutes, which is a solid result. In daily use, moderate users will comfortably reach the end of the day with some charge remaining and lighter users can realistically stretch to a day and a half. Heavy users, such as those combining navigation, extended camera sessions, social media and video streaming, will want to plug in by evening.

The charging speed is where Samsung's conservatism costs the A57. A full charge from flat to 100% took approximately 1 hour in our testing, which is a perfectly acceptable result in isolation. But in a segment where competitors are now shipping with 65 W, 80 W and even 100 W fast charging as standard, 45 W feels like it belongs to an earlier generation. At Rs 56,999, anyone who buys this phone today has a right to expect more here.

Samsung Galaxy A57 review: Cameras

On paper, the A57's camera system is nearly identical to the Galaxy A56: a 50 MP f/1.8 main sensor with OIS (1/1.56", 1.0 µm pixels, PDAF), a 12 MP f/2.2 ultrawide with a 123° field of view, and a 5 MP macro lens. The front camera is a 12 MP f/2.2 fixed-focus unit. The hardware hasn't changed on paper, but the Exynos 1680's improved image signal processor and Samsung's refined computational photography pipeline make a tangible difference in output, primarily in daylight, where the A57 is a genuinely excellent performer.

Daylight and indoor performance

The main sensor is at its best when given light to work with and it makes full use of it. Samsung's colour science is immediately recognisable with punchy, saturated and visually pleasing tones, even if it occasionally tips towards vibrancy. In brightly lit outdoor environments, the camera handles high-contrast scenes confidently, keeping highlights in check while properly exposing subjects in shadow. Dynamic range is one of the sensor's clear strengths.

In the default 12.5 MP pixel-binned mode, detail and sharpness are excellent. Fine textures like small printed text, metallic surfaces and fabric weaves are all rendered clearly and with good edge definition. Shooting in the full 50 MP mode produces images that are slightly softer than the binned output but avoids the artificially over-sharpened look that some sensors apply. For those who intend to edit before sharing, the full-resolution files offer a clean canvas that responds well to post-processing.

White balance under mixed indoor lighting is handled gracefully. The camera reads warm ambient light accurately and renders a cosy atmosphere without skewing too far yellow. Skin tones in portrait shots are natural and flattering, and subject-tracking autofocus is reliable and fast.

Natural bokeh, zoom and portrait performance

The primary lens creates a smooth, natural background separation at close focusing distances and the roll-off from sharp foreground to defocused background has an optical quality to it rather than looking computationally generated. The focal plane is fairly narrow at close range, which requires some patience when shooting foreground subjects against a busy immediate background, but the results when you get the framing right are genuinely impressive for the segment.

Portrait mode handles edge detection nicely. It isn't perfect on subjects with complex hair or translucent edges, but it avoids the worst artefacting and produces social-media-ready results consistently.

The main camera's 2x digital crop is a highlight. It produces clean, detail-rich images that hold up to close inspection and, crucially, it performs significantly better than the dedicated 5 MP macro lens in close-up scenarios. For portraits and close-up photography, the 2x crop is the right mode in virtually every case.

Ultrawide

The 12 MP ultrawide is a solid performer in good light. Colours stay accurate, dynamic range is reliable and edge-to-edge sharpness is improved compared to older A-series generations. The 123° field of view is a genuinely wide capture angle that serves architecture, landscapes and group shots well. Fixed focus means it's better suited to distant subjects than to anything in the immediate foreground.

After dark, the ultrawide's usefulness drops sharply. Nighttime shots from this lens are soft, noticeably grainy and prone to colour temperature miscalculation. It's a limitation shared across most phones in this segment, but it's worth factoring into your expectations if ultrawide photography in low light is important to you.

Selfie Camera

The 12 MP front camera is one of the A57's quieter highlights. In good light it captures excellent detail, wide dynamic range and vibrant colours. The fixed-focus lens performs best at a natural arm's length and while it softens in dimmer rooms, the output remains highly usable. The addition of 4K at 30 fps video recording on the front camera is a practical benefit for content creators and video callers alike.

Low light and night mode performance

This is where the A57's limitations become clearest. In urban environments with reasonable ambient light like illuminated signage, streetlights and lit shop windows, the main camera holds its ground. It exposes bright elements accurately and avoids blowing highlights. But the dynamic range narrows noticeably in darker areas: shadows accumulate noise quickly and fine detail in poorly lit foreground elements tends to get crushed.

In severely dark scenarios, standard mode struggles significantly. Noise levels are heavy and finer subject detail such as textures, labels and small objects, becomes indistinct. Switching to Night Mode offers only a marginal recovery. It lifts exposure slightly, recovers a little more of the scene's brighter elements and manages colour noise modestly better. But the processing relies heavily on aggressive noise reduction, and the result is images that are technically brighter but visually soft and muddy. 

The 5 MP macro lens is largely unnecessary. Its output quality is budget-tier, and the required shooting distance places the phone close enough to its subject that you'll often shadow it before you've framed the shot. The main camera's 2x digital crop outperforms it consistently and is the obvious choice for any close-up work.

Verdict

The Samsung Galaxy A57 is a well-built, well-supported and well-designed phone that gets a great deal right. But the price is the conversation the A57 cannot escape. At Rs 56,999 for the base variant, Samsung is asking significantly more than the A56 ever commanded and the upgrades, while real, are uneven. The camera hardware is essentially unchanged. Charging remains at 45 W in a segment that has moved on to faster standards. The display stays at Full HD+ when 1.5K has become the benchmark for this price bracket. And the low-light camera performance, particularly through Night Mode, is not the step change this price demands.

For buyers upgrading from an A55 or older, the A57 is an easy recommendation because the cumulative improvements are significant and the long-term software commitment is compelling. For A56 owners, the case is much harder to make. And for anyone entering this segment fresh at around Rs 57,000, the competition is serious and informed. The A57 is a good phone, but we would advise buyers to be on the lookout for a price cut or discounts during sale season.

There’s a standard, there’s the Pro, and then there’s the Ultra. Why do phone makers tag their highest-end product as ‘Ultra’? Derived from a Latin word ultrā, according to the Oxford dictionary, it means beyond, something which is extreme or something which exceeds its usual limit. Now, Oppo has done something extreme this time with the launch of its latest flagship phone, the Oppo Find X9 Ultra. This phone checks almost every box to be called Ultra. By the way, I’ve used a bunch of Ultra phones since 2020, and over a period of time, the meaning of this word has changed. Earlier, it mostly meant having better zoom or specs on the Ultra model. But now, these are the phones that are expected to do everything well: cameras, performance, battery life, display, gaming, software, and literally everything.

For this review, I didn’t want to test the Oppo Find X9 Ultra the usual way. Instead of shooting near my office or house, I carried it across Rishikesh and Dharamshala, used it in various conditions, including bright sunlight, tricky sunsets, mountain landscapes, low-light street photography and also took the phone to an IPL match, just to understand one thing: does this phone actually deserve the Ultra title?

After living with this device for the past couple of weeks, I think Oppo may have made one of the most complete camera flagships of 2026. Here’s my full Review.

Camera: The obvious reason to buy this smartphone

For me, the Oppo Find X9 Ultra feels slightly different because this is a phone that clearly wants to behave more like a camera than a smartphone with good cameras attached to it. So, as I mentioned above, instead of another normal camera test, I took this device to two cities, Rishikesh and Dharamshala. I shot with it in bright sunlight, in tricky lighting, sunsets, on the bus, and in low light, just to understand one thing: how good is this camera system when you genuinely rely on it?

The Oppo Find X9 Ultra features cameras co-developed and tuned by Hasselblad. The main lens is a 200MP Sony LYT-901 with a large 1/1.12-inch sensor size and an f/1.5 aperture. This is paired with a 50MP Sony LYT-600 ultra-wide sensor with an f/2.0 aperture, a 200MP 3x telephoto OmniVision OV52A sensor with an f/2.2 aperture, the world’s first 50MP 10x ultra-telephoto customised Samsung JNL sensor with an aperture of f/3.5, and a 3.2MP monochrome sensor with an aperture of f/2.4. On the front, you get a 50MP autofocus Samsung ISOCELL JN5 sensor with an f/2.4 aperture.

Now, for obvious reasons, the main camera is where the Find X9 Ultra is the strongest. In this poolside image, you can see that the tiny textures and shadows were retained in the lower section of the pool lounger. The phone does not aggressively smooth or sharpen the image unnecessarily. This image was captured in broad daylight in Risikesh.

Similarly, when you look at the overall performance of the main camera, it retains texture and shadow details extremely well in photos. Even difficult elements like darker foliage and water reflections stayed controlled. The colours are also balanced and look quite natural. However, there were some moments where the images kind of looked a bit over-sharpened, but most of the time, I was satisfied with the results.

For everyday photography, the experience stayed consistent and impressive. The Oppo Find X9 Ultra delivers crisp details and strong dynamic range in photos, but what really stands out is how reliable the camera is. I can confidently say that you can point and shoot with this device without worrying too much about the outcome.

By the way, I also compared the Oppo Find X9 Ultra camera with the Vivo X300 Ultra. You can watch it right here.

Macro photography is also a strong area on the Find X9 Ultra. While walking around the pool area at my hotel in Rishikesh, I noticed a small bug on the ground, and I instantly took a picture, and the texture captured on the wings and body was impressive. There were fine details, and the image didn’t look artificially sharpened.

I would say portrait photography is probably one of the key factors of getting the Find X9 Ultra. The images this phone takes look balanced and cinematic. If you zoom in on the shot, you could easily spot the details. The bokeh effect looks very natural, and hands down, for me, this is the best smartphone in the world, which has the best edge detection, period.

In this photo below, you can literally see every hair strand of the subject.

With that said, not every smartphone camera, as good as it is, can be perfect, nor is this one. One of the cons I noticed is the camera’s tendency to slightly brighten up faces in some photos, which does not look natural. One more thing, the Find X9 Ultra keeps more of the frame, i.e. background and foreground in focus, instead of creating that subject separation. So, because of this, you may find some of the portrait photos less dramatic.

In terms of zoom, at 6x, it performs extremely well; the facial details, beard texture, fabric patterns and even smaller textures remained highly detailed.

World’s first 50MP 10x optical telephoto lens

Now, Oppo did something insane with the Find X9 Ultra. This phone includes the world’s first 50MP 10x ultra-telephoto sensor, and it has proper 10x ‘optical’ zoom. And this telephoto lens is not just there for marketing. It actually makes a visible difference once you start shooting at longer focal lengths.

While shooting mountains in Dharamshala, the camera retained snow textures and tiny landscape details surprisingly well. The phone also maintained sharpness while still preserving small textures inside the frame. 

One of the best experiences I had with this sensor was during an IPL match. I took shots at 30x (690mm), and the results were genuinely impressive for a smartphone. In one of the images of Virat Kohli, you can see the details of his tattoo, and even the grass texture remains visible.

Of course, I also pushed it to its max zoom at 120x, and sure, at this focal length, the AI processing starts taking over heavily, and the images stop looking natural. But to be honest, that applies to every smartphone out there.

The ultra-wide camera also surprised me more than I expected. Usually, the ultra-wide cameras are where you can see the compromises. But here, Find X9 Ultra has done a very solid job overall. Colours stay close to the main sensor, details remain sharp, and the camera avoids softness and distortion around the edges.

In outdoor scenes, plants and textures remained detailed near the edge of the frame. Plus, the dynamic range handling was also strong during this sunset image.

I also went to McLeodganj during the evening to check the Find X9 Ultra’s low-light capabilities. One thing about this device is that it consistently pulled strong details from darker areas without making the images look bright. And the best thing is that it didn’t add a blue tint to the sky.

In the shots captured from the main camera at 35mm, the shadow retention remained excellent. The wall textures, building information, and surrounding details stayed visible, and the highlights were intact.

Low-light portraits look beautiful, the colour production was also spot on, but again, the skin got brightened up in some of the shots.

However, there were moments where the processing became slightly inconsistent. In some low-light scenes, I noticed visible grain appearing in the sky areas, which affects the quality of the overall image.

As for the 50MP front camera, I was happy with the results. The selfie camera preserves facial texture, and it also handles edge detection well in portrait images. Skin tones remain balanced, but here as well, some photos do have the faces brightened. Maybe Oppo needs to tweak this issue once and for all via a software patch. Overall, though, I would not say that this is the best selfie camera out there, but it is one of the best for sure.

Video recording is another area where Oppo has improved a lot in recent years. The X9 Ultra can shoot up to 8K at 30fps and 4K at 120fps. Plus, all the cameras can shoot 4K videos at 60fps. The Oppo Find X9 Ultra records videos in Dolby Vision (which is enabled by default).

The Pro mode is also there, which allows you to shoot Log recording in Oppo’s O-Log2. The Pro mode gives you 5 LUTs to choose from, and you can also import your own LUTs.

I recorded multiple clips around the poolside, mountain roads, markets and at the stadium, and the footage consistently looked stable and detailed. Even while shooting, the sensor shift is smooth.

XPAN is one of my favourite modes in the Oppo devices. I always had fun shooting with it. And this time, Oppo’s added a lot of filters to it, although my favourite remains the Bold B&W.

That said, one thing I'm disappointed about is that Oppo didn’t launch the Teleconverter kit in India as they did with the Find X9 Pro. The extended zoom lens gives you more freedom to capture the far subject. I really wish that had also made the cut with the Find X9 Ultra.

Oppo Find X9 Ultra: Design

The Oppo Find X9 Ultra has to be one of the best-looking phones out there in the market. I’m using the Tundra Umber colour, which is inspired by the Hasselblad X2D camera, and even the Oppo and Hasselblad logos sit horizontally, so when you look from the back, it looks like you’re shooting with a camera. The back is vegan leather that gives you a grip while holding the phone. In hand, the Find X9 Ultra feels chic. Although it does feel a bit top-heavy. Somehow, I didn’t feel any strain on my pinky finger while holding this phone. In terms of thickness, it is 8.7mm. 

The Find X9 Ultra has an IP68 and IP69 rating for dust and water resistance. The Ultrasonic fingerprint scanner is very reliable and works crazy fast.

The Oppo Find X9 Ultra also comes in the Canyon Orange colour, but I personally prefer the Tundra Umber finish only.

The camera module has a hexagonal mirror that looks premium and distinct. And this time, Oppo added a penta camera setup on the back that makes it even crazier. Just like its younger sibling, and taking inspiration from the iPhones, the X9 Ultra comes with the Quick button so that you can control the camera through it. 

Oppo Find X9 Ultra: Display

The Oppo Find X9 Ultra features a beautiful 6.82-inch QHD+ LTPO AMOLED display with a 144Hz refresh rate. The display speaks for itself right away when you start using the device. Colours instantly pop when you watch content, and at the same time, the black looks deep. It is also quite bright. I never had any problem using this in the scorching heat of Delhi. Speaking of brightness, Oppo claims 3,600 nits of peak brightness, and 1,800 nits in High Brightness Mode, where it actually matters. The good news is that in the Digit Test Labs, the phone reached a mind-boggling 2,730 nits of brightness. What this means is that visibility will not be an issue at all, whether you use the phone indoors or outdoors.

The Find X9 Ultra also supports Dolby Vision, HDR10+ and HDR Vivid, which enhances the content-watching experience.

Oppo Find X9 Ultra: Performance and software

Oppo Find X9 Ultra is a camera monster, no doubt about it, but it is also a power monster at the same time. Under the hood, this beast is repping a flagship Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 processor along with 12GB of LPDDR5X RAM and 512GB of UFS 4.1 storage. Courtesy of the top-tier hardware, the phone feels snappy and is actually fast. App opening times are fluid, multitasking is smooth, and transitions feel polished. I mean, what else can you expect from a phone that has specs like this?

I also ran some benchmarks for those who care about numbers. In Antutu, it scored 4.10 million, which is bonkers. In Geekbench, the X9 Ultra scored 3,613 in single-core and 10,608 in multi-core. In the CPU throttling test, the CPU throttled to 86 per cent, and at last, in the 3DMark Wildlife Extreme Test, it got an overall score of 7,276.

Gaming-wise, this phone is sorted as well. I played three games on the X9 Ultra: BGMI, CODM and Genshin Impact, and I never got any stutter or lag during gameplay. The gaming experience is so smooth without any major fps drop, and the thermals were maintained even after an hour of gameplay. 

You can play BGMI and CODM at 120fps with ease, and can play Genshin Impact at 60fps without any hiccups. I wish I could also play Genshin Impact at 120fps, but that’s fine. 

The Find X9 Ultra comes with ColorOS 16 based on Android 16, and yes, ColorOS is great because it's almost the same as the OxygenOS on OnePlus devices. The OS is lightweight, clutter-free and runs smoothly without any issues. There are a lot of customisation options in the UI, plus there are some useful AI tools to work with. Like the AI Editor tool in the Photos app literally works great. 

On the left of the device, there’s a Snap Key, which we also saw in the previous Oppo devices. That also comes handful if you want to toggle certain actions, like turn on the DND mode, or if you quickly want to record a voice note, then you can do it instantly.

Oppo's software support policy is also great. They’re promising 5 years of OS updates and 6 years of security patches. That said, 5 years still feels a bit less when companies like Samsung and Google promise 7 years of software updates.

Oppo Find X9 Ultra: Battery

Oppo continues to retain the Ultra title in the battery department as well. It packs a 7,050mAh battery and supports 100W SUPERVOOC wired charging, and also supports 50W AIRVOOC wireless charging. Thankfully, the charger is there in the box, but it comes with a Type A to Type C cable.

The 7,050mAh battery took 48 minutes to charge from 0 to 100 per cent, which is very reasonable. In my PCMark Battery test, it got 17h 12mins, which is amazing. 

In real-world usage, too, the phone easily gave me 1.5 days of battery life on a single charge. Of course, depending on your mileage, the endurance can vary.

Best camera phone of 2026?

After spending a couple of weeks with the Oppo Find X9 Ultra, I think the company launched this with a purpose. While Oppo makes good camera phones, they didn’t just want to make good cameras on this one; I think the focus was on making the entire photography experience feel complete.

The Find X9 Ultra’s main camera is incredibly reliable, the portrait mode is easily among the best I’ve used on any smartphone, and that 10x optical telephoto lens genuinely changes how you shoot photos. Add to that a beautiful display, excellent battery life, flagship-level performance and a polished software experience, and you understand why this is an Ultra flagship.

Of course, as I said earlier too, it is not perfect. Sometimes the phone over-brightens faces, low-light processing can occasionally introduce grain in darker skies, and ColorOS still doesn’t match the long-term software commitment offered by Samsung or Google.

But overall, the Oppo Find X9 Ultra feels like one of the most complete flagship phones currently available. More importantly, it feels like a phone made for people who genuinely enjoy taking photos, not just posting them.

And honestly, after using this phone across two cities, mountains, markets, sunsets and stadiums, I can confidently say this: the Oppo Find X9 Ultra is easily one of the best camera phones of 2026. 

But, the main question remains: for everything that’s on offer, and for as brilliant as this phone is, would you be willing to spend Rs 1,69,999 on an Oppo flagship? As I said, it is one of the best camera phones right now, and it absolutely deserves all the attention.

Panther Lake is a beast, and yes, we absolutely do need the Nvidia GeForce RTX 5070 GPU on the Samsung Galaxy Book 6 Ultra. For those wondering why I started this review with such an abrupt statement, well, this is the answer to the question I raised in my first impressions article. The premise was simple: the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra is a high-end premium laptop. It is not the slimmest machine around, but for its massive footprint, the weight and thickness are actually quite impressive. More importantly, though, did we really need this kind of hardware on a premium machine such as this? Because, for what it’s worth, at around Rs 3 lakh, you can easily buy yourself a solid gaming laptop, but it probably won’t look the part. Or you can spend that money on a premium ultrabook with stunning looks, but it won’t come close to matching the Book 6 Ultra in terms of raw power.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy Book 6 Ultra in Digit Test Labs: Panther Lake is a beast, but do we really need Nvidia RTX 5070?

The point I am trying to make, and going by the headline of this review too, is that the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra is a true ‘jack of all trades’ laptop. It has the looks, the specs, the features, and the performance to back it all up. Here’s my full review explaining why I think so, and also to help you decide whether this machine is worth your hard-earned cash or not.

Galaxy Book 6 Ultra: The Samsung user experience

I won’t bore you by talking about the regular Windows 11 software stuff. There are already a ton of Windows machines out in the market with Copilot, capable AI features, and all the usual tricks. And generally, the more money you invest, the better the experience gets. We all know that already…

The main reason why I haven’t missed my Mac all that much and have actually been using a Windows laptop full-time is the ‘Samsung software’ factor. Sure, this machine runs Windows 11. The dedicated Copilot key is also here, which, I’ll be honest, I haven’t really used all that much. What I have used thoroughly though, are the ecosystem features. The way this laptop behaves when you pair it with other Samsung gadgets.

My main phone is a Galaxy S26 Ultra, and I also use the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro. Covering the basics first, all three of these devices work in perfect sync. I’ll be listening to music while working on the Book 6 Ultra, and the moment a call comes in, the audio automatically shifts to my phone and the video pauses. Once the call ends, the audio seamlessly shifts back to the laptop. By the way, you can also take calls right on the PC, but I don’t really prefer that feature (More peaceful the way it is). And yes, I know this is pretty basic stuff, and we’ve had it for years on the Apple iPhone and Macs, which is great. My point is that, because I was so used to using my Mac in a certain way, I naturally tried to replicate that same experience on the Windows platform. And since I had never experienced that level of simplicity on Windows before, I genuinely didn’t think it could be this good.

Also, yes, while these features existed on the older Galaxy Book 5 series laptops too, they never worked this well. In fact, the newer Samsung ecosystem features, combined with the older ones, come together to deliver a genuinely solid Windows 11 experience.

For instance, Quick Share was already available on the older Book 5 models, and it continues on the newer models as well. But what the new model also gets is Storage Share, which lets me wirelessly access my laptop’s storage directly from my S26 Ultra. So, just like I can access my Samsung phone through the File Explorer sidebar on Windows, I can also access my laptop’s 2TB storage from the File Manager on my phone instantly. At that point, why would I even bother sharing files through Quick Share when I can simply access both devices’ storage with a tap and get things done?

There’s also a dedicated Samsung Settings section that lets me tweak how I want all my devices to behave with one another. Continue on other devices, as the name suggests, is probably the most useful feature I have used on a Windows laptop paired with an Android phone. Of course, I’ve always loved how Continuity works between an iPhone and a Mac, but over the past year or so, that feature has become quite finicky. Sometimes it works, sometimes it doesn’t. And even when it did work seamlessly, it never felt as reliable as it does on Samsung devices. Over the past two months, I can barely remember a moment when I copied something to my clipboard and the ‘paste’ command failed on the other device.

Multi-Control is another feature I use a lot. It lets me move my PC’s cursor directly onto my S26 Ultra. The moment I drag the cursor to the side of the laptop’s screen, it instantly appears on the phone. Why is this helpful? Because it makes dragging and dropping images between devices ridiculously easy. Sure, Quick Share and Storage Share are great for larger file transfers, but for smaller ones, it doesn’t get much better than this. It’s especially useful when I’m transferring video thumbnails from my laptop to my phone’s gallery.

The point is, I can go on and on about the seamless connectivity and ecosystem benefits you get here, but that would make this an extremely long review. What you really need to understand is this: if you thought Apple was the only brand that could make two devices feel like they were part of one seamless experience, Samsung and Windows, despite being two completely different entities, are doing a much better job than you might expect. And my Galaxy Book 6 Ultra, paired with the Galaxy S26 Ultra, is living proof of that.

Sure, not everything is perfect, and there are still a couple of things I genuinely miss from my Mac. For instance, the ability to natively change an image’s file type, or easily resize multiple images at once using Preview. Another very convenient feature is being able to simply press the space bar to quickly preview photos and videos. And then there’s the screenshot workflow. On a Mac, after taking a screenshot, before it even gets saved to its designated location, you can instantly grab the preview from the corner and drag and drop it anywhere. It’s especially useful when I quickly want to drop a screenshot into ChatGPT’s search box without having to dig through folders.

Again, these are not Samsung problems. These are features that are simply missing from the Windows 11 platform. But I understand that nothing is ever perfect, and I genuinely hope that, if not Microsoft, then maybe Samsung eventually brings some of the better ideas from the Mac ecosystem into its own suite of PC features and settings. We’ll see.

It’s bright, it looks the part, and it is loud

Needless to say, the Samsung Galaxy Book 6 Ultra comes with a gorgeous 16-inch AMOLED display with a 120Hz refresh rate, and yes, it is touch-enabled too. Speaking of the latter, though, I am personally not a fan of touchscreens on laptops. In fact, I would prefer not having one at all. I don’t think laptops really need touchscreens unless they can properly transform into a tablet, like the Windows Surface machines, which this one certainly cannot.

The Galaxy Book 6 Ultra is unapologetically a high-end, mainstream laptop. It is not a convertible, not a tablet-laptop hybrid, but simply a laptop, and honestly, I love that about it. I really like how it looks and feels. For a 16-inch machine, it is actually quite manageable. In fact, the 1.79kg weight is genuinely impressive. Although I will say, the charger that comes bundled with it, the 140W Samsung brick, is huge. So, for most of my usage, I have simply been using my own 150W PD charger, which gets the job done perfectly fine.

But without drifting away from the main topic, this is a very nicely built machine with aluminium used throughout the construction. The lid, the keyboard deck, and even the underside are all metallic. Opening the lid reveals a gorgeous display that is bright, punchy, and simply top-tier. It also comes with an anti-reflective coating, which is something I only truly appreciated while commuting to work.

Now, I am not saying it works perfectly because, above all else, this is still a glossy panel. But having used so many laptops over the years, Macs and Windows machines alike, I genuinely don’t think I have used another laptop with a screen this usable outdoors. By that, I mean when I travel to work, I usually sit in the front seat and continue working during the ride. Sunlight has always been my biggest enemy because on several laptops I’ve used, screen visibility completely falls apart under harsh light. That simply hasn’t been the case with the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra, and a lot of that comes down to the anti-reflective coating.

Again, I am not saying it works miracles, but for what it’s worth, I genuinely don’t know of another laptop with a more usable display under harsh sunlight. And on top of that, it gets seriously bright. Samsung claims an HDR brightness of 1,000 nits and an SDR brightness of 500 nits. In the Digit Test Labs, this machine actually hit 1,104 nits of brightness, and those numbers absolutely reflect in real-world usage.

The bezels are also very slim and symmetrical on three sides. All four corners of the display are rounded too, which looks really clean aesthetically. And speaking of the bezels, right at the top centre sits the Full-HD webcam. It delivers pretty good quality and should be more than enough for video calls and meetings. The microphones also do a perfectly fine job. That said, this is still one area where I feel Macs continue to do slightly better.

However, the speakers on this thing are simply top-tier. Samsung has absolutely nailed the audio experience on the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra. The six-speaker setup here gets seriously loud, but more importantly, it sounds rich and full instead of simply blasting noise at your face. While watching movies, I found that the vocals sounded clean. In songs, instruments have proper separation, and there is actual depth and bass here, something that a lot of Windows laptops still struggle with. Even at higher volumes, the audio does not start cracking or sounding tinny. The soundstage also feels surprisingly wide for a laptop this slim, to the point where I never really felt the need to connect external speakers while casually consuming content.

Honestly, between the gorgeous AMOLED display and the excellent speaker setup, the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra is just a fantastic media consumption machine overall.

Galaxy Book 6 Ultra: Panther Lake paired with RTX 5070

Now comes the actual meat of this machine, the performance. The Intel Panther Lake chipset inside this thing is an absolute beast; I have said it above, and I will say it again. I mean, there’s no other way for me to put it. Everyday usage is obviously effortless, but that is expected from a laptop that is this costly, but for the cost, it also comes with a very potent chip.

Also read: Asus Zenbook Duo 2026 review: Panther Lake makes this the best multitasking laptop I’ve used

You see, the Intel Core Ultra 7 356H chip is a high-performance 16-core processor that also features a 50 TOPS NPU. And you may also think and question: do we really need all this NPU power right now? I mean, sure, there are AI features here and there across Windows 11 and several creative applications, but I still don’t think we are at a stage where most people are fully utilising this kind of AI horsepower on a laptop. But five years down the line? That is where I think this chip is going to show its worth. Because 50 TOPS is a lot of AI compute power. And, as more AI-powered workloads start shifting locally onto devices instead of relying entirely on the cloud, this kind of hardware will matter much more.

But beyond its AI capabilities and how fast and relevant it is going to be in the future, what genuinely impressed me, though, was just how confidently this machine handles all sorts of workloads. Of course, the main credit for the top-notch performance also goes to the hardware, which includes the aforementioned Core Ultra 7 356H CPU, RTX 5070 GPU, paired with 32GB LPDDR5X RAM and 2TB of superfast NVMe SSD storage.

My usual workflow is writing and editing articles, shooting emails, doing video meetings, editing photos, and watching YouTube. That, in a nutshell, is what I usually do on my daily work laptop. And then, when I reach home, my laptop is also my haven for all the OTT content that I watch. But, while using this machine, I have also been gaming quite a lot, so that’s added to my regular schedule now. And boy, have I missed gaming!

And, I think this is where the combination of Panther Lake and the RTX 5070 really starts to shine. Now, yes, before the hardcore gaming crowd comes after me, this is not a full-powered RTX 5070 implementation. Samsung has tuned the GPU to a 90W TGP, which obviously means it won’t perform like the mainstream Alienwares and Razer Blades of the world; laptops that are thicker, louder, and built entirely around gaming performance. But, for what this machine is trying to achieve, the balance here is surprisingly good. Because, at the end of the day, this is still a relatively thin and premium productivity-first laptop that also happens to game properly.

For instance, I played Shadow of the Tomb Raider on this machine quite extensively, and the performance was genuinely impressive. At 1080p resolution, with high settings and DLSS enabled, the game comfortably stayed around the 110-130 fps mark, while temperatures remained surprisingly manageable. More importantly, the laptop never became unbearably loud or hot in a way that made me want to stop gaming altogether. And that is important because most productivity laptops with dedicated GPUs usually end up sounding like jet engines the moment you give them the beans.

Hogwarts Legacy, which is an even heavier and far more demanding title, also ran surprisingly well. Now yes, this is exactly the kind of game where you can tell the RTX 5070 here isn't running at its absolute maximum wattage. But even then, with the right settings tweaks, the experience remained genuinely enjoyable. At high settings with DLSS enabled, I was getting around 60-75 fps in most areas, while some of the heavier open-world sections dipped slightly lower. But I would again say that Nvidia’s DLSS technology deserves a lot of credit here because it really helps maintain smoother frame rates without heavily compromising the visual quality. And because this laptop also supports frame generation, gameplay feels noticeably smoother than what numbers may suggest.

GTA V, unsurprisingly, ran like a dream. And yes, I know GTA VI is right around the corner, but GTA V still remains one of those games that can really test if a laptop can sustain performance properly over a continuous session. The game comfortably stayed around 120 fps at very high settings without breaking a sweat.

And then there’s Tekken 7, which I absolutely enjoyed on this display. Performance-wise, the game stayed locked at 59-60 fps throughout, which is exactly what you want from a button-mashing game.

Of course, what I also appreciated was how controlled the thermals remained throughout all of this. Sure, the laptop does get warm, especially around the keyboard deck while gaming. And yes, if I were to place the machine on my lap and start playing games, the underside definitely gets hot. But that is the case with pretty much any laptop that has hardware as capable as what you are getting here. More importantly, that is not really how you are supposed to use a laptop while gaming in the first place.

What really matters is how the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra behaves during normal daily usage. For instance, even while charging, the laptop mostly stays cool and comfortable to use. I usually use my laptop, propped on my lap, while I nicely recline back on my office seat. Mind you, I do this at times, when the laptop is also charging, and it never gets uncomfortable. Also, surprisingly, the fans, while you do notice them when the machine is under load, are not annoyingly aggressive either.

Keyboard, trackpad and battery life

Now, coming to one of the most important parts of any laptop for me personally, the keyboard and trackpad. And Samsung has done a fantastic job here. I genuinely enjoyed typing on the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra. The keyboard has slightly shallow travel, and the keys are very clicky-clacky. Yes, they do make a noticeable amount of noise while typing, but truth be told, that sound is like music to my ears. There is a very satisfying tactile response every single time you press a key, and because of that, typing never felt tiring to me on this machine.

The trackpad is also massive. It is smooth, very responsive, and one of the best trackpads I have used on a Windows machine. Gestures work just as they are supposed to, palm rejection is solid, and the overall feel of the click mechanism is spot on. It genuinely feels premium.

That said, just like the missing Mac features I mentioned earlier, I also have to add gestures to that list. Because, while Windows 11 gestures work well here, Apple’s trackpad gestures are still on another level entirely. The fluidity, animation response, and overall polish on a Mac simply feel more refined. But again, this is not a Samsung problem. It is more about how Windows itself is optimised. Samsung has clearly done everything it possibly can on the hardware side because, as far as Windows laptops go, this is easily the best trackpad experience I have had so far.

Before I tell you about the battery life and my final take, here's a quick look at the port situation too. To no surprise, the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra is loaded with everything you'd need. There are two Thunderbolt 4 Type-C ports, a USB Type-A 3.2 port, an HDMI 2.1 port, a headphone jack and a dedicated SD card reader slot.

Battery life is another area where the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra impressed me. This is my second Panther Lake-powered machine that I have tested, and one thing has become very clear to me: Intel has made serious progress with efficiency this generation. Battery life on Panther Lake laptops is genuinely solid. The Galaxy Book 6 Ultra comfortably lasts an entire workday for me most of the time. Depending on how aggressively I was using it, I sometimes did have to charge it towards the end of the day. But for my usual workflow, the Book 6 Ultra consistently delivered around eight hours of usage quite comfortably.

In the PCMark battery test, the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra scored 897 minutes, which again proves just how far Windows laptops have come in terms of endurance.

That said, while Windows 11 paired with Panther Lake chips shows really good progress in battery life and efficiency, Apple’s ARM-based architecture still holds the crown when it comes to sheer longevity on a single charge. Macs still manage to squeeze out more runtime while staying incredibly efficient under heavier workloads. But the gap is definitely getting smaller now, and that is the important part. Because a few years ago, a Windows laptop with this level of performance simply would not have lasted this long away from the charger.

Galaxy Book 6 Ultra: Verdict

So, coming back to the question I asked right at the beginning of this review: do we really need a premium laptop with hardware this powerful? After spending a considerable amount of time with the Samsung Galaxy Book 6 Ultra, my answer is very simple: yes, we absolutely do.

This laptop is simply for anyone who wants everything in one machine.

It looks premium, feels premium, has one of the best displays I have used on a laptop, sounds fantastic, performs brilliantly, games surprisingly well, and still manages to deliver genuinely good battery life. Add Samsung’s ecosystem features on top of all this, and the experience starts feeling far more complete than what I usually expect from a Windows machine.

Sure, there are still things that macOS does better. Trackpad gestures are more refined, some quality of life features are still missing on Windows 11, and Apple’s ARM-based chips still hold the crown when it comes to sheer battery efficiency. But the gap is now smaller than it has ever been before.

Also, addressing the price bit, yes, Rs 3,10,990 is a lot of money for a laptop. And at this cost, compromises become very difficult to justify. But thankfully, the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra does not really make many major mistakes. Samsung clearly understood what they were doing here. They didn’t want to build an ultra-thin machine with mediocre performance, nor did they intend this machine to be like a bulky gaming laptop that sacrifices portability.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra review: King of the hill

With the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra, Samsung built something that balances both worlds surprisingly well. And that balance is what I ended up appreciating the most.

In a nutshell, this is a machine that lets you work hard and then play harder when the work is done. Trust me, very few laptops manage to pull this off convincingly. Which is why I think the Galaxy Book 6 Ultra truly earns the ‘jack of all trades’ title.

For years now, earphones from Oppo and its sister concerns have been legit recommendable options in the affordable Indian TWS market. So, when one of them launches a new product, you have certain expectations. Let's see if the newly launched Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro meets that. On paper, it brings 55dB ANC, Bluetooth 6.0, LHDC 5.0 support, AI-backed call noise reduction, and up to 54 hours of total battery life. I have tested the Enco earbuds for quite some time, and I find they are a well-rounded package.

But are they worth the asking price of Rs 4,999? Find that out here in my Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro review.

Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro: Design and comfort

Our Enco Air 5 Pro review unit comes in a sober black colour. The oval-shaped case has a powdery smooth finish that feels good to touch, but the small, rounded form and this finish mean it can be a bit slippery at times. The matte black paint job attracts smudges and stains, but nothing a swipe can't clean. And if you go with the white variant, this problem shouldn't be there to begin with.

The compactness of the case means it is easy to carry in a pocket, and with finger gymnastics, you can open it one-handed. The earbuds are easy to take out and put back in with satisfactory suction.

The buds themselves look small and chic in their black colour. They look a bit similar to the OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro (review). The silicone in-ear tips stay put in the ear canal. I was confidently wearing them while rushing through crowded metro stations and trains. And since they are comfortable to wear, I would put them on even without music playing.

On the design front, one more thing worth talking about is its IP55 ingress protection. This allows them to withstand some dust and water. Good to have.

Overall, there is nothing flashy about the Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro other than the fact that it features a functional design.

Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro: Connectivity and controls

While I would call my overall experience with the Enco Air 5 Pro quite good, I did have one gripe with the earbuds, i.e., it frequently won't respond to a single tap to resume music playback, and one or two times it wasn't working at all, even though it was active and connected. Putting it back in the case and taking it out again made it work.

But rest, the Bluetooth 6.0-based connection was strong. The pairing was quick with Google Fast Pair and Windows Swift Pair. The HeyMelody app is easy to set up. 

Thereafter, it simply worked everywhere I went, even in the office basement and in the underground metro. Sometimes I would just stroll to the office pantry, a few meters away from my desk, where the playback device is, and face no drops or stutters.

Dual-device connectivity also works for a smooth transition between my personal MacBook, Windows work laptop and phone. You can control this setting and other things like ANC levels, transparency mode, EQ presets, gaming mode, touch gestures, and firmware updates from the HeyMelody app. It is a very user-friendly app, and if you have used any Oppo or OnePlus earbuds, then you’d be familiar with it already.

Coming to controls, the Enco Air 5 Pro has one of the most responsive gesture recognitions I have experienced. You tap, and you know it has registered, even if it takes a millisecond for action.

To face no delay in gaming and video playback, Oppo has given a Game Mode that claims up to 47ms of low latency. Slick. 

Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro: Sound quality

At the core of the Enco Air 5 Pro is a 12mm titanium-coated dynamic driver with support for LHDC 5.0 high-resolution audio codec. I was using the Ultimate sound EQ profile. Like many earbuds in this segment, the tuning is for mainstream users who would listen to pop tracks and anything bass-oriented. You’ll have a good time headbanging. But, in some tracks, you’d want the bass thumps to be more precise and defined.

You may feel the sound staging isn't very wide either. Enabling Oppo Alive Audio mode widens the room for the sounds and is a neat feature to try. 

And vocals, albeit clear enough, don't stand out as much as they do on the Realme Buds Air 8 (review). Both Sonu Nigam’s voice in Iss Tarah and Chinmayi’s voice in AR Rahman’s Muththa Mazhai (Reprise) are vanilla on the Oppo earbuds, while they are more real and eargasmic on the Realme earbuds.

Treble performance is decent but leaves you wanting more. Take MJ, and Paul McCartney’s Say Say Say, the vocals and instrumental high notes don't touch the heights the Realme Buds Air 8 manages to. 

Overall, in isolation, the Oppo tuning remains safe and easy to listen to for hours, which many mainstream users may actually prefer.

Also Read: Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro review: A strong premium pick, especially for Galaxy users

Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro: ANC and calls

Oppo claims up to 55dB ANC on the Enco Air 5 Pro, which is extremely ambitious and quite effective at the same time. Say you are sitting in front of a desert cooler, the Oppo earbuds dull down most of the noise coming from the fan and the moving chassis. But here also, the Realme earbuds are more aggressive.

Out of the different ANC (active noise cancellation) levels, the High one works the best. If you are in a Metro, in the High mode, most sounds are hushed, but you can still hear the guy standing beside you. But in the Moderate profile, you can hear people standing at a distance of about 5 meters. The metro rail noise will also be mildly audible. The High profile lets in sudden sounds, which is good while travelling.

Transparency mode doesn't sound too artificial, which is good. 

Call quality is another strong area. The six-microphone setup, combined with AI noise reduction, delivers a clear voice, and background noises are also prevented.

Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro: Battery life and charging

Battery life from the Enco Air 5 Pro can easily get you by a day. At 80% volume, ANC off, and AAC codec, the Enco Air 5 Pro ran for about 7 hours and was at 50% energy. So, the stated 13 hours is achievable. Coupled with the case, the runtime can last up to 54 hours.

The mileage may vary with ANC on and other settings changed. In any case, the fast charging claim of 4 hours of battery life from just 10 minutes of charging is also interesting. A full charge takes around an hour and a half for refuelling both the earbuds and the case.

Should you buy Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro?

The Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro has many things going in its favour, which makes it a well-balanced and fairly easy-to-recommend pair of earbuds under Rs 5,000. It has a clean design, the fit is comfortable for long hours, battery life is dependable, ANC is strong, connectivity is reliable, and the overall feature set feels complete. 

The sound tuning also works well for mainstream listeners. It is bass-friendly and easy to listen to for extended periods without becoming tiring. The ANC implementation, too, feels effective.

However, the Enco Air 5 Pro doesn’t quite stand out because of the competition it faces, especially from its cousin, the Realme Buds Air 8. The Realme earbuds offer a more expressive and energetic sound signature, wider soundstage, sharper vocals and treble response, and a slightly more aggressive ANC experience. So while you cannot really go wrong with the Oppo earbuds, there also isn’t one defining feature that clearly separates them from the rest of the segment.

So, if you want a balanced pair of earbuds for everyday listening that is comfortable to wear, looks decent, lasts through a full day, offers enjoyable sound, strong ANC, and a healthy set of practical features, then the Oppo Enco Air 5 Pro at Rs 4,999 is a good buy.

It is just that the sub-Rs 5,000 TWS space has become extremely competitive right now, and some rivals simply feel more exciting or offer slightly better overall value depending on what you prioritise.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Philips SHP9500 open-back headphones review: Clear, clinical and comfortably priced

Is it just me, or are smartphone brands getting really confusing when it comes to the naming strategy of their flagships? Case in point, the X300 is Vivo’s standard flagship offering for 2026, but the recently launched X300 FE is priced around Rs 3,000 higher. Which begs the question: where exactly does the ‘FE’ model fit in the lineup? Similarly, Oppo has also taken a similar path with the official launch of its latest high-end smartphone in the X9 series, the Oppo Find X9s.  

By the way, this is the first time Oppo has brought an 's' branded Find X-series smartphone to the Indian market. Going by the name, you may think that this phone should sit below the standard Oppo Find X9 (review), in terms of pricing and also as a slightly toned-down version in terms of what you are getting here. But the moment you look at the pricing, things become a little harder to understand. 

Oppo has priced the Find X9s at Rs 79,999 in India, making it more expensive than the standard Find X9 itself. Like I mentioned, what Vivo also did with the X300 FE (review). 

This situation raises a few unanswered questions. Is Oppo planning to slowly phase out the regular Find X9 from the market? Will the standard model become more expensive later? Or does Oppo simply believe the Find X9s offers a more polished overall experience despite carrying a slightly less powerful chipset on paper? Right now, the company has not made its strategy very clear.

But what is very clear is the fact that I have been rigorously testing this phone in the Digit Test Labs for a good while. And the question you should actually ask is, can Oppo justify the Find X9s price tag? Let's find out.

Oppo Find X9s review: Design

When I took the Oppo Find X9s out of the box, the first thing I noticed was how closely it resembles the Find X9. The overall size and design language feel very similar, but that is not a bad thing at all. Oppo has gone for a clean and minimal look here, and I think the company has done a good job with the overall design.

I received the Midnight Grey colour option for review, and personally, I liked how premium and classy it looks. It does not have a flashy pattern or a shiny finish, which gives the phone a more elegant appearance. Oppo is also offering the device in Sunset Orange and Lavender Sky colour options for users who prefer brighter shades.

The Find X9s comes with flat edges and softly curved corners, making it comfortable to hold even during long usage sessions. Whether I was watching videos, scrolling through social media or gaming, the phone felt easy to grip. At just 7.99mm thick, the device also feels slimmer than many other flagship smartphones in the market.

On the rear panel, the squarish camera module sits in the top-left corner without looking too bulky or distracting. I also liked the matte finish on the back because it doesn't attract fingerprints.

Another thing worth mentioning is the weight distribution. The phone feels balanced in the hand and does not feel top-heavy despite featuring a large camera setup. Oppo has also added IP66, IP68 and IP69 ratings, which means the Find X9s offers strong protection against dust and water exposure.

So, the Oppo Find X9s focuses more on comfort, practicality and a premium in-hand feel rather than trying too hard with flashy design elements, and I think many users will appreciate that.

Oppo Find X9s review: Display

The Oppo Find X9s features a 6.59-inch LTPS AMOLED display with a 1.5K resolution, 120Hz refresh rate, 3,600 nits of claimed peak brightness, and a pixel density of 460 PPI. On paper, these are solid specifications, but what stands out most is the size of the display. In a market where flagship phones are getting increasingly larger, the Find X9s hits a sweet spot. The screen feels big enough for watching videos, gaming or scrolling through social media, while still being compact enough to comfortably use with one hand.

The AMOLED panel itself delivers a good viewing experience. Colours look vibrant without appearing overly saturated, blacks are deep, and content looks sharp. For protection, Oppo has added Corning Gorilla Glass 7i, which should offer some peace of mind against minor scratches and accidental drops in daily use.

Oppo claims the display can reach up to 3,600 nits of peak brightness. But since we all know how the ‘peak brightness’ marketing claim works, what really matters, though, is the real-world performance. In our lux meter test, the panel reached around 1,850 nits with auto brightness enabled. While that number is far from the marketed figure, it is still bright enough for comfortable outdoor use. Even under harsh sunlight, the screen remains perfectly readable without much struggle, which matters more in day-to-day usage than peak numbers on paper.

So, the Oppo Find X9s gets the basics right with its display. It is sharp, smooth and bright enough for outdoor visibility, and the size feels practical without compromising on the viewing experience.

Oppo Find X9s review: Performance

The Oppo Find X9s is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 9500s chipset, which is built on a 3nm process. The smartphone comes with up to 12GB RAM and 512GB storage. For this review, I received the base 12GB RAM and 256GB storage variant.

In everyday use, the Find X9s delivers the kind of smooth experience most people expect from a premium flagship smartphone. Whether I was endlessly scrolling through Instagram, jumping between multiple apps, replying to messages or quickly opening the camera to click photos on the go, the phone felt fast and responsive throughout. Animations are smooth, apps load quickly, and overall, the device rarely gave me a reason to complain during regular usage. The phone also handles multitasking comfortably. I could keep several apps running in the background without noticing aggressive app reloads. 

However, things become slightly less impressive when you look at the benchmark scores. The Oppo Find X9s scored 23,84,561 on Antutu. In Geekbench 6, the device managed 2,215 in the single-core test and 7,282 in the multi-core test. For comparison, the recently launched Vivo X300 FE, powered by the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 chip, delivered higher benchmark numbers, scoring 28,21,622 on Antutu along with 2,767 in Geekbench single-core and 8,750 in multi-core tests. 

Interestingly, the Oppo Find X9, which is available at a slightly lower price, actually offers better raw performance. During our testing, the Find X9 achieved an Antutu score of around 3.44 million. In Geekbench 6, it scored 3,142 in the single-core test and 9,721 in the multi-core test, clearly outperforming the Find X9s as well as the Vivo X300 FE.

So while the Oppo Find X9s handles real-world usage smoothly, benchmark enthusiasts might find better value in some competing devices or even within Oppo’s own lineup.

Now, I know the Oppo Find X9s is more of a camera-centric flagship phone, but many users, including me, also expect good gaming performance at this price. So, I spent a good amount of time playing BGMI on the device to see how well it handles gaming.

With HDR graphics and Extreme frame rate settings enabled, the phone delivered a stable 60fps experience. Switching to the Better Frame Rate setting allowed the device to push a stable 90fps gameplay, which definitely felt smoother during fast-paced matches. However, considering the high price tag of the phone, I was honestly expecting support for 120fps gameplay.

That said, I also understand that Oppo is clearly prioritising cameras and overall balance here rather than trying to create a gaming flagship. During longer gaming sessions of around 20 minutes or more, the phone did warm up slightly, but thankfully not to the point where it became uncomfortable to hold or affected gameplay in any major way.

On the software side, the Find X9s runs on ColorOS 16 based on Android 16, and the experience feels polished and fluid in day-to-day use. Animations are smooth, multitasking works well, and the UI feels clean, though there are still a few pre-installed apps out of the box. Oppo has also added several AI-powered features like AI Bill Manager and AI Recorder, which can actually feel useful instead of gimmicky during usage. The company is also promising four years of major Android OS updates along with six years of security updates for the Find X9s, which definitely adds long-term value to the device.

Oppo Find X9s review: Camera

The Oppo Find X series is known for offering strong camera performance, so naturally, I had high expectations from the Find X9s as well. The smartphone features a triple rear camera setup consisting of a 50MP Sony LYT-700 primary sensor with OIS, a 50MP ultra-wide camera, and a 50MP Sony LYT-600 periscope telephoto lens with 3x optical zoom and OIS. On the front, you get a 32MP camera for selfies and video calls.

The primary camera performs really well in most conditions. During the day, photos come out sharp with good details and balanced colours. I liked that the phone does not overdo saturation like some other flagship phones. Colours look lively without appearing unrealistic, and skin tones are handled nicely.

Portrait shots are also quite good. The phone manages background separation nicely, and most portraits look clean enough for social media uploads. That said, edge detection is not always perfect and can occasionally struggle in tougher scenes, though the overall results are still quite usable.

Low-light photography is another area where the Find X9s impressed me. Night shots retain a good amount of detail without making images look artificially bright. The phone does a nice job of controlling noise while still keeping textures intact. 

The telephoto camera is useful too. At up to 3x zoom, images remain detailed and quite usable. However, once you move beyond the optical zoom range and rely more on digital zoom, image quality starts dropping, and details become softer.

The ultra-wide camera is the weakest part of the setup. While it is perfectly usable for landscape shots or group photos, there is a visible difference in quality compared to the primary camera.

As for selfies, the 32MP front camera captures decent photos with natural skin tones and enough detail for Instagram or video calls. 

Oppo Find X9s review: Battery

The Oppo Find X9s packs a huge 7,025mAh battery with 80W wired fast charging support. During my time with the device, battery anxiety was rarely a concern. Whether I was doom-scrolling Instagram late at night, watching YouTube videos, using navigation, or clicking plenty of photos throughout the day, the phone comfortably kept going without constantly making me look for a charger.

With light to moderate usage, the Find X9s can easily last close to one and a half days on a single charge. Even on days when I used the camera heavily, streamed content for long hours, and played games, the device still managed to survive an entire day without much struggle.

I also noticed that battery drain during regular tasks remained under control. Streaming videos for around 30 minutes consumed roughly 4 per cent of the battery, while an hour of power-hungry Google Maps navigation drained only around 5 per cent.

However, the PCMark battery benchmark results were slightly underwhelming, given the massive battery capacity. The device lasted around 20.5 hours in the test, which is good, but honestly, I expected better numbers from a 7,025mAh battery. But this is again a synthetic benchmark test we are talking about, and what really matters is the real-world experience where the Oppo Find X9s delivers. 

Also, using the bundled 80W charger, the Oppo Find X9s takes about 1 hour and 30 minutes to fully charge from 0 to 100 per cent. While there are faster charging phones available, the charging speed here still feels reasonable once you consider the large battery capacity.

Oppo Find X9s review: Verdict

The Oppo Find X9s is a smartphone that gets a lot of things right. It offers a premium and compact design, a vibrant display, good cameras, excellent battery life and a smooth overall experience. The phone feels comfortable to hold, easy to use for long hours and reliable enough to handle almost everything you throw at it without much trouble.

However, what makes the Find X9s slightly difficult to judge is its positioning within Oppo’s own lineup. Apart from the processor, the Find X9s offers almost identical specifications to the standard Oppo Find X9. The display, cameras, battery capacity, charging speeds and overall experience remain largely similar. That naturally makes the pricing harder to justify, especially when the regular Find X9 is available at a lower price while also delivering noticeably better real-world and benchmark performance.

And this creates a situation where it becomes slightly difficult to recommend the Find X9s over the standard Find X9 unless you specifically prefer its colour options or simply want the latest addition in the lineup. 

Again, don’t get me wrong, for what it’s worth, the Oppo Find X9s is still a very capable compact flagship smartphone. It focuses more on balance, comfort, battery life and overall usability rather than chasing raw performance numbers. But at its current pricing, the regular Find X9 feels like the more sensible choice. Unless Oppo decides to discontinue the standard model, then we’ll have a different debate. That’s a story for another time. 

Budget smartphones can no longer be seen as devices that compromise on features the way they used to a few years ago. A few years back, whenever I wanted to buy a smartphone, that too with a price point of around Rs 15,000, it usually meant being prepared to live with at least one noticeable compromise. The devices back then usually had a mix of a few things, like decent performance with poor cameras. However, if that were not the case, then I would see a device that heavily focused on battery life but ignored display quality or software experience. Similarly, a few brands also tried to impress buyers with flashy designs and big specifications on paper, but those things rarely improved the actual everyday experience. But that's no longer the case, as Motorola launched the Motorola G37 Power in the budget category.

The budget smartphone market has changed a lot now. Brands are no longer focusing on just one feature. Rather, most smartphones today try to offer a complete package with good displays, capable processors, bigger batteries, better cameras and cleaner software. While this is a good thing, it has obviously made this category a bit more confusing, which is actually beneficial for you and me. Recommending a budget smartphone now has also become a bit harder than before as a result of that.

The Motorola G37 Power approaches this segment a bit differently from the existing brands and models. Instead of focusing on one flashy feature, Motorola tried building a smartphone that gives you balance and feels more practical in everyday use. The specs suggest the same, as the device comes with a huge 7,000 mAh battery, a MediaTek Dimensity 6400 chipset, military-grade durability, Gorilla Glass 7i protection and stereo speakers. In terms of software, it sports Android 16 with Motorola’s clean software experience out of the box. On paper, that already sounds quite impressive for a smartphone priced at Rs 15,999.

However, the specifications alone never tell the full story, especially in the budget segment where things like optimisation, heating and day-to-day consistency matter much more than big numbers. The real question is whether Motorola has managed to make a phone that actually feels reliable in real-world use or if this is just another budget device trying to stand out in an overcrowded market. After using the Motorola G37 Power as my primary smartphone for some time, here is what I think.

Motorola G37 Power design: Practical, comfortable and built to last

The first thing that surprised me about the Motorola G37 Power was the packaging. Motorola has kept things simple, but the overall unboxing experience still feels neat and slightly more premium than what you usually expect in this segment. When you unbox the device, it immediately gives you the impression that the company is trying to offer a polished experience rather than just another budget smartphone.

Once unboxed, you find some paperwork, a SIM ejector tool, the Motorola G37 Power handset, a charging cable and the adapter in the box. Talking about the handset, it feels light when holding it, and the synthetic leather finish gives you a good grip on the device. I tried using the device for about 1.5 to 2 hours while travelling in the busy Delhi metro. Trust me when I say this, but I never reached the point where the device felt tiring to hold. Whether it be watching videos, scrolling social media or replying to emails or WhatsApp messages, the phone remains comfortable enough.

The design language itself feels clean and familiar, as the rear panel has a premium leather finish that gives the phone a more polished look than most devices in this segment. The camera module is simple without looking overly flashy, which honestly works in Motorola’s favour because many budget phones now try too hard with oversized camera islands.

Furthermore, the side-mounted fingerprint scanner is fast and reliable. It unlocks the device quickly without requiring repeated attempts, which is something budget phones still occasionally struggle with. However, one thing I think the company can improve is the scanner’s sensitivity. At times, if your hands are wet or even slightly sweaty, then the scanner may deny access to the device.

Build quality is another area where the phone leaves a positive impression. The Motorola G37 Power comes with Corning Gorilla Glass 7i protection, MIL-STD-810H military-grade certification and an IP64 rating. While these are specifications most users may not actively think about every day, they add confidence during real-world usage. The phone feels sturdy in hand and does not flex or creak under pressure.

You may have forgotten this, but older smartphones used to come with a headphone jack and an SD card slot. Motorola brings back that nostalgia by retaining these practical features that many brands have gradually started removing. The phone includes a 3.5mm headphone jack along with 1TB expandable storage support via a microSD card slot, and honestly, these features still matter to many of us who are buying a new device in a budget category.

Motorola G37 Power display: Smooth enough for everyday entertainment

Motorola’s G37 Power is equipped with a 6.67-inch LCD screen, which instantly feels big and immersive to use on a daily basis. Sure, the HD+ (720p) resolution isn’t the sharpest in the segment, but it does get the job done. Personally, the screen size worked out well for me while enjoying YouTube videos, social media browsing, or any other form of online streaming entertainment. In addition, having a hole-punch display makes it appear modern from the front. 

That said, I do feel Motorola could have trimmed the chin a bit more, as there is some visible room that could have improved the overall screen-to-body ratio. Again, considering this is an LCD, and not an AMOLED panel, this is a tradeoff. 

On the bright side, the phone supports a 120Hz refresh rate, which instantly elevates the user experience. Simply scrolling in the app drawer or switching between menus, all felt fluid. More importantly, the animations remain fairly stable most of the time, so the smoothness doesn’t feel inconsistent or exaggerated.

Motorola has also added its Display Colour Boost feature, and in daily use, I noticed it gives colours a slightly richer look without pushing them into unnatural territory. Videos look more engaging, skin tones stay fairly balanced, and overall, the display maintains a pleasant, easy-on-the-eyes tuning that works well for extended consumption.

Motorola claims the panel can go up to 1,050 nits in High Brightness Mode (HBM), i.e., when used in direct sunlight, this is the maximum brightness the screen can achieve. Of course, the screen is not as bright as an AMOLED, but in my testing, the display held up well outdoors, and I was able to comfortably view videos and browse content even under harsh lighting conditions. Again, it is not going to be perfect, nor is it the brightest, but as I said earlier, it gets the job done.   

However, I do want to pinpoint an issue while using the camera outdoors. While previewing the image in the viewfinder, the screen gets quite dim. Again, this is a natural smartphone behaviour. And you may think, if this is so normal, why don’t a lot of people complain about this? You see, while phones with AMOLED screens also get dim while previewing an image in the viewfinder, even at their dimmest, they are decently bright. Can’t be said the same about an LCD. So, there’s that. 

Overall, Motorola has done a pretty good job with the overall presentation of the phone. And to hit a certain price point, you can’t have all positives. Case in point, the LCD display is decent on the G37 Power, and as I said, I personally find it okay; it is quite obvious that this is the area where most of the cost-cutting has happened.

Motorola G37 Power performance: Surprisingly stable for the price

Performance is easily one of the strongest aspects of the Motorola G37 Power, and honestly, this is where the device starts clearly separating itself from many similarly priced competitors. The handset is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 6400 processor paired with up to 8GB LPDDR4X RAM and 256GB UFS 2.2 internal storage. On paper, these specifications already place it in a fairly comfortable position for its segment, but as always, real-world performance matters more than spec sheets, and thankfully, this is where the device holds up quite well.

On a daily basis, the apps on the smartphone open at a reasonable speed, and I never felt that I had to wait around for things to load. Even the basic tasks like calling, messaging, social media scrolling, Chrome browsing, video streaming, and light image editing all run smoothly without pushing the device into discomfort.

Using multiple apps at the same time also works better than expected. You can switch between apps without the phone feeling unstable, and while there are small delays now and then, they are not distracting. Many budget phones start to lag after some time of use, but this one stays fairly steady throughout the day.

Gaming performance is decent for its class, as games like BGMI and Call of Duty Mobile remain playable with stable frame delivery on balanced graphics settings. However, keep in mind that the device is not made for heavy or high-graphics gaming, and if you push the settings too high, then you'll notice its limits quickly. Aside from the heavy gaming, lite games like Temple Run, Subway Surfer, UNO, Ludo and chess work well.

When playing heavy games, you may feel that the device gets a bit warm, especially during long gaming sessions. But it doesn't ever reach a point that feels uncomfortable.

In the performance tests, the device shows balanced results as it scored 5,41,583 in Antutu, which is solid for this category. While in Geekbench 6, it gets 817 for single-core and 1,345 for multi-core, which reflects steady everyday performance rather than extreme power.

Graphics performance is also consistent, with a score of 1,451 in Geekbench OpenCL. In 3DMark tests, it scores 1,390 in Wild Life and 383 in Wild Life Extreme. It also gets 3,903 in SlingShot, and what stands out is its stability of around 99.5 per cent, which means it keeps performance steady over long use without dropping much.

For regular work tasks, the phone scores 11,085 in PCMark Work 3.0 which shows that it is efficient while handling daily use. Storage speed is good for this segment because of UFS 2.2. Apps open quickly, and file transfers feel smooth enough that you do not notice delays in normal usage, even if it is not as fast as premium phones.

Motorola G37 Power software: Clean, lightweight and easy to live with

Software has traditionally been one of Motorola’s strongest areas, and thankfully, that remains true here as well. The Motorola G37 Power ships with Android 16 out of the box, along with Motorola’s Hello UI. The overall experience feels relatively clean, lightweight and easy to use. Unlike several budget phones that aggressively push advertisements or unnecessary pre-installed applications, the G37 Power avoids making the interface feel cluttered.

That cleaner software experience genuinely improves daily usage. Animations feel smoother, notifications remain less chaotic, and the UI never feels overloaded with duplicate apps or unnecessary features.

Motorola has also included several useful software additions like Moto gestures, Moto Secure and Google Gemini integration. Features like a twist-to-open camera and a chop-chop flashlight still remain surprisingly convenient during regular usage. The company is also promising an upgrade to Android 17, which adds some confidence regarding long-term software support.

It’s not all sparkles when it comes to the software because the experience itself isn’t flawless. I did encounter some lag when quickly swapping between two demanding apps, but it doesn’t happen that often.

Motorola G37 Power battery and charging: Built for endurance

Battery life is undoubtedly the headline feature of the Motorola G37 Power, and honestly, the phone genuinely lives up to the Power branding.

The G37 Power packs a massive 7000mAh battery, and you feel that advantage right away once you start using it normally. During my usage, the phone comfortably lasted well beyond a full day, even with heavier tasks like gaming, camera usage, video streaming, social media browsing and extended 5G usage. Moderate users can realistically stretch the phone close to two days or even more, depending on usage patterns. The PCMark Work 3.0 battery result also doubles down on my statement, as the device, during the battery test, lasted for 19 hours and 50 minutes.

However, when the device is completely out of juice, getting it up to speed using the 30W TurboPower charger takes around 85 minutes to completely charge the device from 0 per cent to 100 per cent. 

Motorola G37 Power camera: Good enough for casual photography

The Motorola G37 Power features a 50MP primary camera along with AI-based camera features, and honestly, the overall camera experience feels reasonably balanced for the price.

Daylight photography is where the phone performs best when compared to other devices in the same price bracket. Images captured through the primary camera generally offer decent detail levels, good colours and respectable dynamic range considering the segment. Motorola’s image processing appears slightly boosted at times, but thankfully, it avoids becoming overly aggressive in most situations.

Portrait mode performance is also fairly good for a phone at this price. Edge detection remains reasonably reliable around subjects, while background separation looks natural enough for social media usage.

The front camera also does an adequate job, especially in selfies, where the picture looks quite natural, and there is good colour accuracy and enough detail for daily use.

However, when used in low light, the camera is just mediocre. Though the night photos come out okay, they aren’t the strongest point of the phone. You may notice a bit more noise in darker scenes, and the details can look slightly soft when the lighting is poor. Still, the results are acceptable for the price.

Video recording is also good enough for everyday use. The G37 Power manages stable enough footage in good lighting conditions, although it is clearly not a camera-focused device.

Motorola G37 Power: Verdict

The Motorola G37 Power feels like a phone built around practicality rather than gimmicks, and honestly, that works strongly in its favour.

Instead of focusing on a single main feature, Motorola has tried to build a balanced device that performs reliably across the most important areas. You get excellent battery life, stable performance, good durability, clean software, stereo speakers and a surprisingly polished overall experience for the price.

The phone is not perfect, of course. The LCD display, while okay, isn’t the brightest or sharpest in the segment. The low-light camera performance could have been better, and the phone still carries some weight because of the massive battery. But none of these issues feels like a deal-breaker once you consider the overall package. And that’s the best I can say for a sub-Rs 20,000 smartphone in 2026, considering the rising prices.

Fire TV devices launched in recent memory run on Amazon's own Linux-based Vega OS. The same is the case with the newly launched Fire TV Stick HD. On the surface, you get the familiar Fire TV UI, and it targets users who still own full HD TVs or monitors, or just don't care about 4K streaming. I installed it on an old Samsung dumb TV I have at my in-laws' place. So, my folks and I were happy to stream and use the modern TV content and features. I will share with you how the experience is, and by the end, you will know if it is worth spending Rs 4,999 on this streaming dongle.

Design and remote

The new Fire TV Stick HD is said to be around 30% slimmer than previous sticks. Well, I haven't compared it personally, but it does feel light and slim enough to easily carry around. I received the review unit at my office, and carrying it to my in-laws' place and back was easy because of this. When plugged in, you can still access nearby ports. But, this partly depends on the TV.

The port on the Fire TV Stick HD is USB-C, and the accompanying charging cable has a USB-A head on the other end. For powering it, you can plug it into the USB-A port on the TV itself. But if the USB-A port isn't close enough, then the shortness of the bundled cable could be an issue. You'll have to rely on an extension board. Plus, there is no adapter in the box. So, you'll have to use any USB-A charging brick you may have. Still and all, the switch from micro-USB to USB-C port is appreciated.

Besides these, inside the box, you get the Alexa Voice Remote, two AAA batteries, and a quick start guide. Amazon now sells the HDMI extender separately, unlike older models, where it was included.

The remote is also very handy and easy to use. You get the navigation ring, volume buttons, mute, OTT shortcuts for Prime Video, Netflix, and YouTube, App Store, and the Alexa microphone button. The buttons are clicky. There is no backlighting, though, which may matter in a dark room.

This remote can be used to control the TV, too, as it works via Infrared. So, design-wise, the offering is decent.

Setup and software

Setup is easy for the most part. Plug the stick into the HDMI port, Power it up through the USB-C port, join Wi-Fi, sign into your Amazon account, and the system walks you through the rest. You can also scan a QR code for faster account sign-in. But the Wi-Fi setup screen was slow to load on the mobile UI. And the cable length issue I mentioned is also annoying during setup.

Once it is set and you reach the home screen, the interface looks familiar if you have used Fire TV before. The home screen has dedicated tabs and sections for movies, shows, free streaming content, live TV, etc. There are major OTT apps lined up and below that recommended content from these is also present. But Amazon Prime and MX Player content gets major footage here.

There is no side-loading but the app store has everything I want. And in case I don't find something, well that's true for other OEM skins, too. The storage is 8GB only and that means you need to be selective and careful with app installation.

Something that comes out of the box is Alexa integration, which can be an integral part of the Fire TV experience. Voice recognition works well. Say, if I ask Alexa to 'play Pushpa,' it directly plays the movie on Amazon Prime Video, but Google Assistant shows where I can watch it, say on MX Player. But, Alexa isn't as good at information retrieval as Google Assistant. If you ask for 'IPL Match Today,' Google gives all the details required, while Alexa shows JioHotstar listing on the app store.

Also Read: Amazon Fire TV Stick 4K Select review: A lean but healthy offering with only the essentials

Performance and streaming quality

The Fire TV Stick HD runs on a quad-core 1.7GHz processor paired with 1GB LPDDR4 RAM and 8GB storage. These are very basic specifications. But even with that, for the most part, navigation is fast enough. Sometimes you'd notice some brief pauses in the loading of menus and app loading times. It isn't that bothersome. It is just what you expect with the specs in question. There were no noticeable bugs or crashes, though.

The biggest limitation here is obvious. This is still a Full HD streaming stick. For the untrained eye, it should be fine. But since I am used to 4K TVs, I could see the hit in quality. And it gets worse, the bigger the TV screen is. That said, a big screen TV probably has a dependable smart OS already. And in isolation, the 1080P streaming quality is agreeable for watching TV shows, web shows, movies, and everyday TV and YouTube content.

There is HDR10+ support, but no Dolby Vision. The list of specs also includes AV1 decoding. That and Wi-Fi 6 should aid in smoother streaming. Motion handling with the Match Original Frame Rate setting works to preserve the creator’s intent. And in the Display Settings, you can tweak HDR, colour format, colour depth (up to 12 bit), and the video resolution.

In case you are interested in gaming, you can expect casual gameplay with Xbox Cloud Gaming support. You'll need a Game Pass subscription and a compatible Bluetooth controller for this. Amazon has given Bluetooth 5.3 support.

For audio, it relies on HDMI passthrough, and the sound is delivered through the TV's speaker. There is Dolby Atmos support for compatible soundbars and receivers. Again, it is passthrough and not built-in decoding.

Should you buy the Fire TV Stick HD?

Caveat Emptor: You should know what you are buying. The Fire TV Stick HD is meant for Full HD streaming, and it does that reliably. The support system around it, including the software UI, app library, and voice controls, is also decent. But you should be aware of its limitations beforehand.

This is not meant for power users who want to sideload apps, experiment with features, or heavily customise the experience. Unlike Android TV sticks, it does not allow external APK installations, and the onboard storage is fairly limited, too. Similarly, if you already own a 4K TV or want a 4K streaming experience, this is not the stick for you. In that case, the Fire TV Stick 4K Select or higher-end models make more sense.

Where the Fire TV Stick HD works best is with older Full HD televisions, monitors, secondary TVs in bedrooms, guest rooms, and similar setups where casual streaming is all that is expected. And in that role, it largely delivers what the name promises: the Fire TV experience with HD streaming.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Vu Vibe DV review: A balanced QLED TV under Rs 35,000

Earlier this year, Dell Vice Chairman and COO Jeff Clarke was addressing a pre-CES 2026 virtual press briefing when he took everyone by surprise with just one statement- “I owe you an apology today. We didn’t listen to you. You were right on branding. You guys heard that right.” Now it isn’t everyday that you see the Vice Chairman of a tech giant admitting their fault. And it isn’t everyday that you see them making a U-turn on a decision that was passed just a year back. But Dell did exactly that with the XPS brand. 

For years, the XPS lineup was the premium Windows laptop. At one point, it was even called a MacBook alternative for those looking for a Windows device that is at par with Apple’s laptops. So when I got the opportunity to review the all-new XPS 14, I was quite intrigued. 

I have been using the laptop as my daily driver for more than a week. With a refined look and some mind-blowing performance, there are a lot of exciting things happening here. But, it also comes at a premium price tag. Rs 2,57,890 to be exact. So should you buy the all new XPS 14? Let’s try and find out in this review. 

Also read: Forza Horizon 6 first impressions: A stunning drive through Japan

Dell XPS 14: Design and build

The funny thing about the XPS 14 is that when you first look at it, it almost feels… boring. It’s this clean, minimal machine with a matte black finish and a subtle XPS logo sitting in the centre. The laptop demands to be carried straight to a business meeting. But, when you lift the lid, a familiar surprise awaits.

There is the familiar zero-lattice backlit keyboard, which we have seen earlier on the XPS lineup. It comes with an edge-to-edge design with large, flat keys placed tightly together. Typing on this thing feels firm and snappy. However, it might take a little time to get used to it if you are coming from a more traditional keyboard layout.

The touchpad blends seamlessly, almost hides, into the chassis and uses haptic feedback for clicks. It feels smooth, quick, and very responsive. In fact, I stopped carrying a mouse while using this laptop and that is probably the biggest compliment I can give to any Windows laptop touchpad. The chassis also feels incredibly smooth, especially around the palm rest area. 

As for the build quality, it feels rock solid. There is minimal flex on the lid and when you hold the laptop in one hand, there’s a sturdiness that’s reassuring. That said, the laptop is slightly heavier than what I’d like it to be but that’s not a dealbreaker.

Also, the weight distribution here is excellent and I could open the laptop easily with one hand. There is also a subtle magnetic snap when you close the lid, which is just super satisfying. I don’t know why, but I kept opening and closing it for no reason.

However, ports here are very limited. You get three USB Type-C ports with Thunderbolt support, a headphone jack, and that is pretty much it. I really missed having an HDMI port or even a USB-A port here. At this price point, you don’t really want to be living the dongle life.

Dell XPS 14: Display and performance

The display on the XPS 14 is honestly gorgeous. You get a 14-inch 2.8K OLED panel with 100 percent DCI-P3 and sRGB coverage. Now during our internal testing, we found this claim to be accurate. 

In real world usage, the colours here look rich and vibrant. Blacks are super deep, contrast looks fantastic, and watching content is simply a treat.

At 500 nits peak brightness, this is also a bright enough display. I used the laptop outdoors quite a bit and visibility was never an issue. Now yes, because this is OLED, reflections are definitely noticeable and that can get annoying sometimes, especially under harsh lighting. PS: This is a touchscreen. Which is nice to have, but full disclosure time- I did not use it at all.

Let’s now talk about the star of the show here- performance. The Intel Core Ultra X7 chip is an absolute beast and the laptop just blazed through our benchmarks.

In the 3D Mark Time Spy benchmark test, the laptop showed a phenomenal score of 6045 points. This puts it way ahead of other laptops in the same price range. 

And in the other 3D mark tests, a similar trend continued. Nightraid saw a score of 37494 while the Fire strike test saw a score of 11317. In wildlife and Wildlife extreme tests, the scores were 40961 and 12934. 

I also ran the PC Mark 10 benchmark test. And the laptop had an overall score of 7181 with some impressive numbers in other tests. For instance, it got 10823 points in essentials, 26012 in rendering and 13632 points in Digital content creation tests.  So looking at the scores, the XPS 14 can easily handle your demanding creative tasks, and even a bit of gaming.

In the PC Mark 10 Full SSD test, the laptop scored 2155 points which is once again way ahead of competition.

Coming to Geekbench, the XPS 14 scored 2850 in single core test and 16148 in multi-core test. And in Cinebench r23 benchmark, the laptop scored 13894 in multi core test and 2051 in single core test.  

In real world usage, the laptop performed admirably. App launches were fast and smooth, there were no slowdowns and I could get through all my tasks easily.  

Another thing that took me by surprise was the speaker setup. Because in many Windows laptops the speakers are usually just… there. But that’s not the case here. The speakers of the XPS 14 are actually good.

They get loud, there is proper bass, and the sound feels full. I played the official video of Michael Jackson’s Beat It in the office and the moment the music started playing, I immediately started getting side-eyes from my colleagues and had to turn the volume down. I could also clearly hear not just the music, but also the thuds and other tiny details.

The webcam is another win here. Video calls looked sharp and clear, and most importantly, I actually looked decent during meetings. So, both the speakers and webcam are far better than what I have seen on several other laptops in this price range. Kudos to Dell for that.

Battery and thermals

Now nobody likes laptops that make you hunt for a charger on a busy work day. And the XPS is NOT one of those devices. In our battery test, the laptop lasted around 17 hours at 70 percent screen brightness, which is quite impressive. This also means that you won’t need to charge your laptop every day. 

As far as real-world usage is concerned, I used the laptop comfortably through a work day full of video meetings, web browsing, and an occasional YouTube video streaming, And when it was time for me to clock out, the laptop still had 40% of battery left which is super. For added context, I was using the laptop in balanced power consumption mode at 80% brightness.

Coming to the thermals, they are also very well managed. Even while running benchmarks, the laptop’s keyboard area got slightly warm but never uncomfortable to use. The touchpad and chassis remained cool overall. During our internal testing, I noticed the surface temps staying below 30 degrees in all major areas. So, the laptop can handle cooling well.

Verdict

The Dell XPS 14 feels like a laptop that focuses on refining every little experience. It looks premium, comes with a solid build, and delivers incredible performance. The speakers and the webcam here are nice little bonuses to have. With that being said, I do wish Dell had included more ports and the touchscreen isn’t of much use. 

As mentioned already, this model costs Rs 2,57,890. And this is just out of reach for a lot of people. So, the Dell XPS is certainly not for everyone out there. But if you do have the budget for it, this is one of those laptops you can buy without overthinking too much.

Also read: Dell unveils Alienware 15 and Dell 14S laptops globally: All details

In most Indian cities, you need an air purifier to breathe quality air at home. And today, if you search online, you get plenty of options across budgets. Recently, I made a listicle for air purifiers under Rs 20,000, and one brand that stood out for its offering is Qubo. The Here Group company recently launched the R700 air purifier and sent us a unit for review. It retails at around Rs 15,000 in India, and on paper, it is a very competent product. It boasts a CADR of 460 m³/h, coverage area of up to 700 sq. ft., True HEPA H13 filtration, BLDC motor, app support, and voice assistant integration. But specifications alone do not make a good air purifier. In real-world usage, factors like airflow behaviour, purifying quickness, noise, maintenance cost, and day-to-day convenience matter more. So, I have used the Qubo R700 for a few weeks now and here's my experience.

Qubo R700: Design and indicators

Most air purifiers I have come across are in white or off-white colour. The Qubo R700 at least tries to look different with its matte black cylindrical design, which isn't just an aesthetic choice, but the cylindrical form factor with pores on the surface allows for 360-degree air intake. This also means that regardless of the way it is placed, there are some openings to intake impure air.

That said, over time, the black finish does attract smudges, dust, dirt and stains. But you can easily wipe and clean it.

It weighs very little, too. The day it was delivered on a bike, it was easy to carry it upstairs to my room on the first floor. At about 4.1kg, the R700 can be easily moved around the house, if needed.

On top, you have the air vents for pure air throw and a control panel with comprehensible text and icons. The control panel is a touch interface. You get toggles for Power On/Off, Fan Speeds, including sleep mode, Timer, Auto Mode, and QSenseAI. Well, the difference between the latter two is that Auto Mode regulates fan speed only between 1, 2 and 3 levels, whereas QSenseAI cycles between Sleep Mode and other fan speeds based on your usage habits and indoor air quality. It is slightly more efficient than regular Auto Mode.

In the centre, there is a PM 2.5 indicator which changes in real-time. And besides the white-coloured lighting of these icons and PM 2.5 numerical indicator, there is also a colour-based indicator: Red for very poor quality, Yellow for poor air quality and Green for satisfactory air quality.

Out of the box, the filter will already be installed inside the purifier, but it will be covered in plastic. To remove it, unlock the bottom cover by rotating it anticlockwise. Take out the filter, remove the plastic cover, place the filter back inside, and lock the cover by rotating it clockwise. Then plug in the purifier and start using it.

Also Read: Best air purifiers between Rs 15,000 and Rs 20,000 in India in 2026

Qubo R700: Filtration and real-world performance

The Qubo R700 purifier claims a CADR of 460 m³/h with room coverage of up to 700 sq. ft. These figures are impressive for the price. I placed it in our bedroom, which measures about 150 sq. ft., and it mostly sat there unintrusive, unless we were lighting up dhoop batti in the pooja room nearby or during the night. While sleeping, the lights on the top can be distracting, so I would always manually enable sleep mode.

You don't have to always tap the touch panel to control the R700 purifier. The Qubo app also does the same job, perhaps even more conveniently. Say, you are in the living room or on the bed, and want to toggle any mode/settings, you can do that with the app. It works over 2.4GHz Wi-Fi. The pairing is straightforward. When it works, it works reliably. But, sometimes, say when QSenseAI puts the purifier in standby mode, then when the purifier detects impure air and starts working, the app still shows the purifier as off.

I tested it wih dhoop batti lit in different scenarios:

• Lit it for about 15 feet away in an open 550 sq. ft. space, and the R700 took under 10 minutes to reduce PM2.5 by 50 per cent.
• Burned the dhoop batti for 2 minutes in a closed 160 sq. ft. room, and the purifier took under 5 minutes to reduce PM 2.5 by 50 per cent.
• If the dhoop batti is placed really close to the purifier, then it does bring down the pollution level in the room even quicker.

Dhoop batti has dense smoke, and if it takes anywhere around 10-20 minutes for near-normal air, then that is decent. In essence, this test shows the purifier can ramp up quickly and noticeably reduce indoor particulate matter (PM) levels within a short period.

The Qubo R700 uses a 5-stage filtration setup consisting of:

• Pre-filter
• Anti-bacterial filter
• True HEPA H13 filter
• Activated carbon layer for odour, VOCs and cooking smells
• Nano-silver coating

The most important filter is True HEPA H13, which is rated to capture 99.95 to 99.99 per cent of particles measuring 0.3 microns. This includes: PM2.5 pollutants, fine dust, smoke particles, allergens, pollen, and Pet dander. Well, we have a Labrador at our place, and he was seen quite often lying next to the purifier. Perhaps the cool air from it and the purifier don't get warm either. So, I guess that's a thumbs up from his end, too.

Another aspect where I appreciate the Qubo R700 is its quiet operation. You see, it is said to run up to 55 dB noise output. So, at the highest fan speed, it is audible. But when it is running at moderate PM 2.5 levels, the fan noise isn't much. So, during afternoon nap, I didn't mind using it normally without sleep mode or putting it on standby. But if you prefer the least noise, sleep mode is quiet enough. The BLDR motor inside helps in this sound profile. There is no unnecessary rattling or vibration noises.

That BLDC motor also helps in power efficiency. Qubo claims the R700 draws around 50W at peak operation. But it works dependably, and I figure running it for extended periods should not dramatically increase electricity bills.

Qubo R700: Everyday convenience and long-term costs

So, the purifier supports Wi-Fi connectivity, the Qubo mobile app and within the app, you can enable the Amazon Alexa-based voice control feature. You can say commands like turn on the purifier, turn off the purifier, etc., and the connected R700 does so. But, I feel this is very fancy and in indian homes, using the app controls or directly interacting with the device is more handy.

Besides remotely controlling the purifier, you can use the app to monitor air quality over a period of time, like the last 24 hours, 7 days, 30 days, a year, etc. You can use the app to schedule a timer, set a child lock and configure features like QSenseAI, enable silent mode, change the lighting brightness, or turn it off.

The Qubo app also guides you on how to change or clean the filter, order a new filter and understand the PM 2.5 readings. Well, at one point, I found that this understanding section wasn't showing a 404 page not found error. I informed the brand about this bug and was assured a fix.

By the way, Qubo says the filter can last for 15,000 hours, and that's about a year and a half. This could differ based on your usage and pollution exposure in your place. On the Qubo website, the R700 filter costs Rs 4,250. That is not cheap for an Indian middle-class home, but the competition also charges in the range of Rs 3,000 to 5,000. This is as important a factor to consider as the upfront cost since it matters for long-term ownership.

Should you buy Qubo Smart Air Purifier R700?

The Qubo R700 gets most of the fundamentals right. It can automatically and timely detect pollutants and clean the air quickly. The coverage and air throw distance are good enough for bedrooms and even medium-to-large living rooms. It works quietly and has modes to ensure your sleep or focus isn't disturbed by its operation. The inclusion of a BLDC motor aids in its hushed performance and possibly power efficiency. All of these come packed in a neat and functional design that is portable and should blend well into your room decor. And this is backed by easily accessible LED-lit indicators and a serviceable app experience.

I say serviceable since the Qubo app needs more polish. It has the expected features. But there are some minor sync issues between the app and the on-device controls, and a few bugs and glitches that need to be ironed out. They don't come in your way, but once Qubo fixes them, the purifier will be even better to use every day.

At Rs 14,990, the Qubo R700 is genuinely competitive and a well-rounded product. It will be a good purchase if you want clean air at your place or where your loved ones are.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Qubo Q600: Why you should consider this sub-Rs 15,000 air purifier

Foldable phones are no longer just futuristic experiments that people look at from a distance. Over the past few years, these devices have quietly evolved into proper flagship smartphones with slimmer bodies, better hinges, brighter cover displays and enough power to challenge the traditional premium phones. And now, the market has clearly split into two personalities. The clamshell foldables have become the stylish, compact option for users who want something trendy and pocket-friendly, while the book-style foldables have carved out a space for productivity, multitasking and that tablet-like entertainment experience. Although almost seven years down, foldables are still not as mainstream as traditional slab phones, at least in India. But that’s a debate for a different time.

Book-style foldables have always been expensive, particularly those that have remained firmly in the ultra-premium category, making them both exciting and difficult to justify for most buyers.

While some brands have already taken hold in almost both of the categories, Motorola has now finally stepped into the book-style foldable segment with its Motorola Razr Fold. The company already understands the foldables. The Razr lineup has managed to build a strong identity in the clamshell segment, balancing the nostalgia with modern flagship appeal. And now with the Razr Fold, along with a relatively affordable price tag for a ‘foldable,’ the company wants to hold in the segment.

At Rs 1,49,999, the Motorola Razr Fold already undercuts rivals like the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold 7 and Pixel 10 Pro Fold while still promising flagship-grade specifications and the complete foldable experience. Naturally, that makes this phone far more interesting than just another foldable launch. Right?

But lower pricing alone is not enough anymore. The real question is whether Motorola has managed to bring something genuinely fresh to the category or if this is simply a more affordable entry ticket into the foldable world. More importantly, can it actually challenge the established players and become the book-style foldable that finally feels easier to recommend? Here is what I think.

Motorola Razr Fold design

The Motorola Razr Fold feels like one of those devices where the company has clearly spent time understanding what people actually complain about. Over the years, the foldables have become slimmer and more powerful, but many still struggle with awkward weight distribution, bulky hinges or designs that feel delicate despite the premium pricing. The Razr Fold, at least in the first impression, tries to move away from that feeling.

And honestly, after using multiple generations of the Razr clamshell lineup, this one instantly feels different. The body is slim, the weight distribution feels balanced, and unlike some foldables that can make you nervous when unfolding, this one feels natural and smooth to open. Motorola’s hinge tuning deserves credit here. It is not overly stiff, not too loose either, and that makes everyday usage much more comfortable.

One of the standout aspects is just how thin this device is. At around 4.5mm when unfolded, the Razr Fold enters the territory where foldables stop feeling like ‘thick experimental devices’ and start feeling closer to regular flagship phones. Even when folded, it manages to stay relatively compact, considering this is an 8.1-inch book-style foldable. Yes, at over 240 grams, you still feel the heft in your pocket, but that is expected for this category.

The cover display is another area that immediately grabs attention. Motorola has gone with a large 6.6-inch external screen, and visually, it gives the phone a very modern look from the front. The panel itself looks vibrant and immersive, although I do think the bezels slightly take away from that near-futuristic appeal Motorola is aiming for. They are not bad, but once you notice them, you do wish they were slimmer.

Open the device and the main 8.1-inch display becomes the centrepiece. Motorola is heavily pushing the ‘crease-less’ experience here, but it is there. You can still notice it at certain angles under light, but while actually using the device for reading, streaming, or multitasking, it fades into the background fairly quickly.

The overall design language still feels very Motorola. The back panel has that familiar clean aesthetic with a square-shaped camera island housing the triple-camera setup and an additional sensor. The Motorola logo sits neatly in the centre, while the Razr branding at the bottom keeps things minimal without looking empty.

Durability is another area where Motorola seems to be making a statement. The Razr Fold comes with Gorilla Glass Ceramic protection and IP48/IP49 ratings. Add to that the titanium-reinforced hinge, and it makes a combination that flagships at a higher price offer.

Motorola Razr Fold display

The Motorola Razr Fold has an 8.1-inch LTPO pOLED internal display with a 2K resolution of 2484 × 2232 pixels and an 8:7.2 aspect ratio, providing a near-square layout ideal for multitasking, reading and media consumption. The outer display is a 6.6-inch LTPO pOLED panel with a taller 21:9 aspect ratio, which feels more like a traditional smartphone screen when used regularly.

Both displays support Dolby Vision, HDR10+ and 10-bit colour depth. Motorola claims peak brightness figures of up to 6,200 nits for the inner display and 6,000 nits for the cover screen. But we all know how the ‘peak brightness’ claims generally work. So, where it matters, in our testing, the actual measured HDR brightness levels with the inner display reached around 2,680 nits and the cover display touching approximately 2,860 nits. These are strong numbers for a foldable smartphone and were sufficient for comfortable outdoor visibility under direct sunlight.

As one would expect from OLED panels, the displays have high contrast, deep blacks and vibrant colour reproduction. HDR content benefits from high brightness and contrast capabilities, especially when streaming supported content.

The device handles the refresh rates well. The inner display offers an adaptive refresh rate range of 1Hz to 120Hz, and it offers balanced smoothness and battery efficiency based on the content that is being watched. The cover display also supports a refresh rate of up to 165Hz, and it's smooth.

Speaking of durability, the company has offered Corning Gorilla Glass Ceramic 3 for the outer display. The device also offers IP46, IP48, and IP49 ratings, which are relatively uncommon in the foldable category.

Lastly, the crease on the inner display is still visible under certain angles and lighting conditions, but it is less noticeable than in previous generations of foldables. The hinge mechanism also supports multiple usage modes, including laptop, tent, and desk modes, which adds flexibility to the overall experience.

Motorola Razr Fold performance

Performance is one area where the Motorola Razr Fold becomes genuinely interesting, specifically because Motorola has made a slightly unexpected choice here. At a time when many ultra-premium flagship phones will move towards the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 tier, Motorola has instead gone with the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 on the Razr Fold. And honestly, for a foldable in this segment, that feels both practical and a little daring at the same time.

On paper, though, this is still a very serious flagship chipset. Built on a 3nm process, the Snapdragon 8 Gen 5 uses Qualcomm’s custom Oryon cores and is heavily focused on AI workloads along with raw efficiency. Pair that with LPDDR5X RAM, UFS 4.1 storage and a massive vapour chamber cooling setup, and the hardware package immediately sounds flagship-grade.

In day-to-day usage, the Razr Fold rarely gives you a reason to complain. And honestly, that matters more on a foldable than raw benchmark numbers alone. A foldable is not just about opening apps quickly; it is about handling multiple things together without slowing down. That is where the Razr Fold performs well.

I used the device extensively for multitasking. Keeping work emails open while streaming content on the larger inner display, switching between Chrome tabs, scrolling social media, replying to messages and running apps side-by-side never felt problematic. The larger display naturally enhances the experience, but the processor also keeps things smooth enough that you actually end up using those multitasking features regularly instead of treating them as gimmicks.

Gaming performance is also surprisingly solid. BGMI and Call of Duty Mobile both run smoothly, with stable frame delivery and responsive touch input. Thermals, however, are worth talking about because foldables traditionally struggle here due to their thinner internal structure. The Razr Fold uses a 6002mm 3D vapour chamber along with liquid metal cooling and a breathable copper mesh design, which sounds aggressive on paper. In actual use, it does help keep temperatures in control, but heating is there (under heavy load).

The benchmark numbers also support the overall experience. The device scores close to 2.9 million on Antutu, which comfortably places it in flagship territory. Geekbench 6 scores came in at 2,576 for single-core and 8,606 for multi-core performance, showing strong CPU capabilities. GPU performance is also impressive, with a 3DMark Wildlife Extreme score of 5,094. PCMark Work 3.0 delivered 19,660, indicating excellent productivity performance, while storage speeds remain extremely fast thanks to UFS 4.1.

Interestingly, in synthetic benchmarks, the Razr Fold even manages to outperform one of its biggest competitors, the Samsung Galaxy Z Fold7, across several tests.

Software also plays a huge role here. The device runs Android 16 with Motorola’s Hello UI, and thankfully, the experience remains relatively clean and easy to use, what you would expect from a Rs 1.5 lakh phone. More importantly, Motorola is now promising seven years of OS and security updates. There are tons of features, AI integrations and modes that you can choose for your daily tasks.

However, the transition while switching between the cover display and the inner screen occasionally appears jittery, and some modes, were not working. That said, it can be fixed with the software update.

Motorola Razr Fold battery

The device packs a 6,000mAh Silicon-Carbon battery, which Motorola claims is the biggest battery currently available in a foldable smartphone. During our PCMark Battery Life test, the Razr Fold lasted for 1,135 minutes, which is a very strong result for a foldable device. In real-world usage, this translates to comfortably lasting an entire day, even with heavier usage patterns. I used the phone for multitasking, streaming content on the inner display, gaming sessions, social media browsing, camera usage and work-related tasks and battery anxiety never really became an issue.

Charging speeds are equally impressive. The device supports 80W TurboPower wired charging, which keeps refill times relatively quick despite the large battery size. Motorola has also included 50W wireless charging, which is still relatively rare in the foldable segment and makes the overall experience feel more premium and complete. There is also support for 5W reverse wireless charging, allowing the phone to power accessories like earbuds or even another smartphone in emergency situations.

Motorola Razr Fold camera

The Motorola Razr Fold clearly aims to reduce the gap between foldable phones and traditional smartphones when it comes to camera performance, and in real life, I have mixed reactions. On paper, the setup is among the more feature-packed systems currently available in the foldable segment. The phone includes a 50MP Sony LYTIA 828 primary sensor with a large 1/1.28-inch sensor size, f/1.6 aperture and 3.5-degree OIS stabilisation. Alongside it is a 50MP Sony LYTIA 600 periscope telephoto camera with 3x optical zoom, 6x portrait zoom and support for up to 100x digital zoom. There is also a 50MP ultra-wide camera with a 122.1-degree field of view that doubles as a macro shooter. For selfies, Motorola offers a 32MP internal front camera along with a 20MP setup that works with the outer display and rear cameras.

In day-to-day use, the camera system delivers a fairly balanced experience. The primary camera captures detailed images with good contrast. Motorola’s image processing leans towards a slightly vibrant colour profile, which makes photos appear visually appealing and sometimes excessively processed after post-processing. HDR handling is also reasonably controlled, with highlights and shadow details generally maintained well.

Portrait performance is also decent. Edge detection around hair and complex subjects is reliable in most lighting conditions, while background separation appears natural. Skin tones are handled decently well, and post-processing avoids excessive smoothing for the most part, but again, it is there.

The 50MP telephoto camera also performs well in favourable lighting conditions. Detail levels remain decent, colour consistency between the primary and telephoto cameras is maintained, and zoom shots remain usable at moderate ranges. The ultra-wide camera is versatile for landscapes and architecture, although there is a visible drop in detail compared to the main sensor, especially in lower lighting.

Low-light photography and selfies are also decent, with controlled noise levels and balanced exposure processing. Video capabilities are also extensive. The Razr Fold supports 8K recording at 30fps, and 4K at 60fps, across all cameras. Additionally, Dolby Vision recording and high-frame-rate slow-motion capture also come in genuinely handy.

Should you buy the Motorola Razr Fold?

The Motorola Razr Fold, for me, is an important device for Motorola, not just because of the book-style foldable category, but because it attempts to make the segment feel slightly more approachable. And to a large extent, it succeeds. It has a premium design, slim form factor, bright display, strong multitasking, dependable battery life and a camera system that performs decently.

At the same time, the device is not entirely free from compromises. The inner crease, while reduced, is still visible under certain lighting conditions. Software polish also needs some work, particularly with occasional transition stutters between the cover and inner display and a few inconsistent foldable-specific modes. The cameras are capable, but Motorola’s image processing can sometimes feel slightly aggressive, specifically with colours.

The biggest discussion, however, remains pricing. At Rs 1,49,999, the Razr Fold undercuts several premium foldable rivals while still offering flagship-grade hardware, which definitely works in its favour. But if the pricing had been slightly more aggressive, somewhere closer to the Rs 1,30,000 mark, this could have easily become one of the easiest foldables to recommend in India.

The Vu Vibe DV came to us for testing during the Digit Zero1 awards season last year. But since QLED TVs weren't a category in the awards, it couldn't participate. That said, over the months, we have used this TV a lot, and so I thought it deserves to be reviewed for the value it brings to the board. Vu launched the 55-inch model of this TV at Rs 36,999, and currently, it is available for Rs 34,990. And for that asking price, it brings a 4K HDR panel with Dolby Vision, HDR10, Google TV OS, a dedicated Game mode, and gaming features like VRR and ALLM. 

Surely, the specs sound quite promising on paper, but the real question lies: how do they translate in real-world use? And so, should you invest in this 55-inch Vu Vibe DV QLED TV? Read on. 

Vu Vibe DV: Display and audio

The Vibe DV uses a VA QLED panel with 4K resolution and support for HDR formats like Dolby Vision, HDR10, and HLG. The TV comes in multiple screen sizes: 43-inch, 50-inch, 55-inch and 65-inch. We have reviewed the 55-inch model. In our internal test, the TV projected 343.8 nits of brightness (close to the claimed 400 nits peak luminance) and 0.06 nits of black level, which gives about 5730:1 contrast ratio. That is not very high, but the results were clear and sufficiently detailed for a value midrange QLED panel. While watching Mission Impossible: The Final Reckoning's underwater submarine scene, a favourite test scenario of mine, everything was quite legible on this panel.

Colours are likeable but not very natural. The BT 709 colour gamut coverage measured around 91.4%, which results in an enjoyable SDR playback for YouTube, cable channels, and streaming content. As for HDR, the panel covered 69.54% in the BT 2020 gamut and 94.17% in UHDA-P3 coverage. Again, respectable numbers and in Filmmaker Mode, the skin tones and overall colours look slightly washed out, but the dark scenes and portions carry discernible details.

When it comes to motion handling, you can enable MEMC for smoother visuals in soap operas and sports, but in movies and web series, I suggest you disable this for a more original cinematic frame rate.

In case of games, the TV supports Game Mode, Auto Low Latency Mode (ALLM), and Variable Refresh Rate (VRR) through HDMI 2.1. But since the native refresh rate is 60Hz only, things like VRR are limited. So, you can have casual gaming. That's it.

On the audio front, HDMI-based eARC and ARC are available. But the headlining feature is the integrated 88W soundbar with Dolby Atmos support. The system uses a 4.1-channel equivalent setup with two main speakers and two dedicated tweeters. This delivers good front-firing sound with clear enough vocals, dialogues and fine overall output. Since you sit in front of the TV, that matters to some extent. But, when compared against a comparably priced Lumio Vision 7, this one comes second in loudness and overall quality.

Also Read: Panasonic Shinobi Pro PX950 Mini LED TV review: Bright 4K HDR performance at a premium price

Software interface

Vu Vibe DV is powered by a 1.5GHz quad-core VuOn AI processor paired with a Mali-450 GPU. It comes with 2GB RAM and 16GB internal storage. These are rather standard offerings in this range.

On top of this, you get Google TV based on Android 12 with the December 2024 security patch. Considering some of its rivals are giving Android 14, this seems a bit dated under the hood. But, on the surface, the Google TV UI is quite familiar and easy to use, even for a new user. Google's operating system organises content well across different streaming platforms instead of forcing users to jump between apps constantly.

The everyday performance is largely smooth with occasional expected lags and micro-stutters. This is apparent in the time it takes to load all thumbnails on the homescreen after a cold boot. But, overall, the navigation across menus and apps feels responsive enough.

And since it is Google TV, you get built-in Google Assistant for voice commands, and for casting, there is both Chromecast and AirPlay support. So, you have pretty much everything one expects in this segment.

Design, remote and connectivity

The Vu Vibe DV stands out because of the integrated soundbar beneath the display. There is a massive Vu insignia on this soundbar. So, there is no confusion about the brand name. It is a purposeful design choice. The rest of it is routine stuff: inverted-V stands, slim bezels on three sides, a tad thicker chin, to which the soundbar is connected.

On the left side (behind the TV), you get the IO lineup, including three HDMI ports, one with eARC support, alongside two USB ports, Ethernet, optical audio out, AV input, and a headphone jack. In case you want to connect a different audio device, the HDMI eARC support would allow lossless audio passthrough through it.

Wireless options include dual-band Wi-Fi, Bluetooth 5.3, and Apple HomeKit.

The remote connects via Bluetooth, and it also has a thicker bottom portion. It is very handy and has the requisite buttons for navigation, input modes, volume and channel change, and OTT hotkeys. The OTT hotkeys are limited to just Netflix and YouTube. Rest, you get hotkeys for Picture, Sound, Wi-Fi, and even two picture modes, viz., Cinema and Sports. These don't take you to any settings page; they straight-up toggle or cycle through the modes in question. Perhaps, the idea is that these are the most commonly used settings on a TV by Vu's target audience. It makes sense.

Should you buy Vu Vibe DV TV in 2026?

The Vu Vibe DV has a head-turning design and interesting features like a 55-inch 4K HDR QLED panel, an 88W integrated soundbar, Google TV OS, and a decent connectivity setup. The panel produces appealing visuals, and most users will have a good 4K viewing experience on this TV. The speaker setup delivers fairly loud and engaging sound. The software experience is neat and easy to use, with hiccups that are par for the course in this price bracket.

However, some things could have been better, like the audio tuning, as well as the colour and contrast calibration. We would have also appreciated more software updates and additional HDMI 2.1 ports.

For what’s on offer, especially at around Rs 35,000, the Vu Vibe DV should be serviceable for regular users. You are getting a balanced 55-inch QLED TV. But the market has other options like the Lumio Vision 7 (review) at this price. However, that TV has its own downsides, such as weaker shadow detail. So ultimately, the choice depends on what matters more to you. 

Either way, the Vu Vibe DV QLED TV is a pretty decent option for its asking price. 

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Hisense U7Q Mini LED TV review: Practical option under Rs 70,000 with fair trade-offs

Remember the Moto 360 smartwatch? Not the third-gen model that came to India in 2021, almost 1.5 years after the global launch. But the OG Android smartwatch from 2014 and 2015. Back then, the Apple Watch didn’t even launch until 2015, and the Moto 360 was already established as a premium smartwatch option. However, over the years, Motorola has moved away from the smartwatch market, and to date, the brand hasn’t shown any keen interest. Of course, as I mentioned, out of the blue, the company did launch the 3rd-gen Moto 360 in 2019, but the main reason behind this whole context is Motorola getting back into the mix with the launch of the latest Moto Watch 2026.

Motorola stepping back into the smartwatch space was always going to invite a simple question. Will this be a serious return to form, or just another attempt to fill a product lineup? Sure, the Moto Watch arrives with confident claims. You get an AMOLED display, Polar-powered fitness insights, dual-frequency GPS, Bluetooth calling, AI notification summaries and battery life that promises to stretch well beyond a week. As you see it, this sounds like a well-planned comeback, at least on paper. But as always, spec sheets only tell part of the story.

I have used the Moto Watch 2026 thoroughly. This review is more of a long-term ownership rather than chasing an embargo deadline. I have literally used this watch, day in and day out, through crowded metro rides, long office hours, evening walks, sleep tracking and frequent Bluetooth calls to understand how it behaves once it becomes part of daily life. 

As is the case when you use a smartwatch, it isn't about the features or the promises, but it’s about consistency. So, without any further ado, let’s dive in and check what the Moto Watch 2026 actually offers and feels like.

Moto Watch 2026: Design

Motorola may not have made smartwatches in a long while, but that doesn’t mean the company has forgotten how to make one. I must admit that the company has taken a safe route with the design, as the Moto Watch features an aluminium case, a stainless steel rotating crown and a 1.43-inch round display protected by Gorilla Glass 3. But, just like the Moto 360 watches from the past, the new Moto Watch 2026 manages to look premium at first glance, especially in the silver colour.

What also stands out immediately is how light it feels. At just 35 grams without the strap, the Moto Watch 2026 is one of those watches you stop noticing after a few hours. For someone who tracks sleep regularly, that comfort matters. It never felt intrusive at night, and even after a full day of notifications and occasional workouts, there was no wrist fatigue. Comfort is easily one of its strongest qualities.

Of course, not everything about the watch can be perfect. So, I’d like to point out that the rotating crown on the Moto Watch 2026 is overly sensitive. I mean, it works, but slight accidental touches can rotate it and shift screens unintentionally. Again, it’s not a major flaw, but it happens often enough to feel mildly irritating.

I also felt that while the stainless steel link strap looks sharp and sturdy, it tends to attract dust quickly. Fine particles settle into the joints within days of outdoor use. Sure, you could blame the Delhi AQI for this too, as it’s practically the national scapegoat at this point, but it genuinely takes away from the experience, or at least it did for me. The metal straps also raise concerns around sweat buildup over time, especially in the Indian summers.

Motorola also shipped silicone and vegan leather straps, and compared to the stainless steel, they feel average. The point is not about them being uncomfortable, but they are not particularly premium either. Considering straps are the primary point of contact with the user, this area could have been more refined.

Moto Watch 2026: Display

The 1.43-inch AMOLED panel is central to the Moto Watch experience. In controlled indoor settings, it looks good, as the colours are vibrant, blacks are deep, and animations feel fluid. Furthermore, when used under direct sunlight, the brightness peaks at around 885 nits, which is enough for outdoor visibility on a watch. But the real issue lies with auto-brightness, as there were repeated instances where the screen dimmed excessively, making it difficult to read notifications. Moreover, adjusting it manually isn’t always immediate, as the brightness is so dim that you can hardly see anything unless you find a shade. In daily commuting scenarios, this becomes frustrating.

Bezels are clearly visible, and once you notice them, they’re hard to ignore. The round design suggests a fuller display than what you actually get, slightly reducing the visual appeal. Touch response is smooth, swipes register properly, and wrist-raise detection works reliably. There were no display glitches or flickers during my use.

Always-On Display is available and looks clean. However, it comes at a cost, as with AOD enabled, battery life drops significantly. Combine that with continuous health tracking, and endurance falls to around two to two and a half days. That’s a sharp contrast to its standard usage claims.

The smartwatch also boasts a Gorilla Glass 3 to protect the screen. While it sounds reassuring, in regular metro and bus travel, I noticed minor scratches within days. Do note that I had no falls or drops, rather just routine usage in crowded conditions.

Furthermore, with IP68 and 1 ATM resistance, it can handle splashes and rain, but do keep in mind that this isn’t designed for swimming sessions or water sports.

Moto Watch 2026: Software experience

With the latest Moto Watch, the company has ditched WearOS and has bet on MotoWatchOS, and this single change has changed my experience in many ways.  Navigation through swipe gestures remains smooth, though the crown’s sensitivity occasionally disrupts the flow.

The interface felt way smoother when compared to the other devices in the same price bracket. Swiping through menus, accessing widgets and reading notifications feels fluid. The good part was that there were no crashes or unexpected restarts. Furthermore, the notifications arrive promptly, and the wrist detection works consistently.

However, the limitation lies in ecosystem flexibility, as it doesn't allow you to install third-party apps. This means no Spotify, Strava or expanding beyond what’s preloaded in the watch. In a market where competitors offer broader app ecosystems, this feels restrictive.

Another complaint that I have with the makers is that the call logs do not sync automatically on the watch as they do on your handset. One of the practical disadvantages of this is when I try to make a call using my smartwatch on a crowded bus or metro, where I can't reach my smartphone, I can't get a grip on the call logs.

The experience just worsens, as you can't even access the contacts from your device if you've not added some of the contacts beforehand using the Moto Watch app on your smartphone. That literally leaves you with your memory, as you can only tackle that situation if you remember the phone number of the person you want to connect with or have contacted them using the device before.

Also read: Vivo X300 Ultra review: Raising the bar for what a flagship should be in 2026

Moto Watch 2026: Health tracking

Motorola’s partnership with Polar adds credibility, and features like Training Load Pro, Smart Calories and Nightly Recharge suggest a data-driven approach.

In regular use, heart rate tracking felt reliable during walks and light workouts. SpO2 and stress tracking delivered consistent readings under normal conditions. However, one thing to note is that continuous heart rate and SpO2 tracking significantly impact battery life, especially when combined with AOD.

Talking about sleep tracking, while the data presentation is detailed and structured, it still felt less precise to me. The recovery scores didn’t always match how I actually felt. In my opinion, there's still room for refinement in interpreting that data.

The watch supports over 100 sports modes, including cricket, which is a thoughtful inclusion for Indian users. I tested two of the most common features used by us: the indoor and the outdoor walk.

For the indoor step tracking, I felt that the device occasionally registered extra steps during non-walking movements. However, for the outdoor walk, I tested the device for 2 kilometres, which lasted around 21 minutes. The distance and pace tracking were reasonably accurate during the test, and the calorie and heart rate readings were close enough for daily tracking.

The main issue I faced was the unexpected auto-pause of the workouts. This wasn't a one- or two-time thing, but something that bugged me several times that I don't even remember the count now. The thing that put me off was that it didn't start automatically and required manual intervention. Whether due to wrist detection or GPS fluctuation, it happened more often than it should.

Despite dual-frequency GPS (L1 and L5), signal stability under trees and near tall buildings wasn’t flawless. It did recover automatically, but hardware advantages didn’t always translate into seamless real-world performance, giving me disappointments. 

Also read: OnePlus Nord CE 6 review: The safest all-rounder in the segment

Moto Watch 2026: Calling and connectivity

The built-in speaker and microphone allow for Bluetooth calling when paired with your smartphone. Incoming call alerts are clear, with strong vibration feedback. The Bluetooth connectivity remained stable when tested during metro rides and bus travel.

Call quality is acceptable but not perfect, as when tested outdoors, there was distortion at higher volumes, and the speaker produced a faint buzz. However, while indoors, the calling experience was much better. The microphone works best when your wrist remains closer to chest level. However, if your hand drops too low, then the voice clarity reduces significantly.

Moto Watch 2026: Battery life

Battery performance of the Moto Watch depends heavily on how you use the device. Under the standard use case, when the Always-On Display is turned off and real-time tracking is disabled, the watch comfortably lasts 12 to 13 days. However, in heavier usage scenarios with AOD and continuous tracking enabled, I experienced around 4 to 5 days, which is lower but understandable.

Charging the watch from zero to full takes about 60 minutes using the two-pin magnetic cradle via USB-C. The good part was that I didn't experience any noticeable heating during the charging process.

Furthermore, I even tested it by charging it for 5 mins to test how long it can last with that quick top-up, and to my astonishment, it provided enough battery for a full day. The catch is that the AOD and real-time tracking should be turned off. The battery percentage drops steadily and predictably, which further adds to confidence when using the device as a daily driver.

Moto Watch 2026: Verdict

The Moto Watch 2026 feels designed for users who want a lightweight, comfortable smartwatch that handles essentials without demanding constant attention. In normal usage, battery life is strong. Notifications are reliable. Heart rate and SpO2 monitoring work well for everyday health tracking. Bluetooth calling is good enough for quick conversations.

It isn’t perfect, as the GPS reliability could be better, auto-brightness needs refinement and the absence of third-party apps limits flexibility. But if your priority is a straightforward smartwatch experience with solid battery life and dependable basics under Rs 7,000, the Moto Watch makes practical sense. It doesn’t try to overwhelm you with features. It simply focuses on staying functional in daily life, and for many users, that may be enough.

It’s no secret that smartphone prices are on the rise, all thanks to the rising component and chipset costs. But, in the midst of all this, the newly launched OnePlus Nord CE 6 feels quite sensible, and I’ll tell you why. You see, following the industry trend, OnePlus could have easily gone for a much higher price this year, especially with all the upgrades this phone brings, but thankfully, that has not happened. And honestly, that alone already gives the phone a strong start in the sub-Rs 35,000 segment. Speaking of which, the OnePlus Nord CE 6 price in India is set at Rs 29,999 for the 8GB + 128GB version, while the 8GB + 256GB is priced at Rs 32,999. No 12GB RAM option this time, at least for now.

Also read: Vivo X300 Ultra review: Raising the bar for what a flagship should be in 2026

Now, let me clear this one thing out: the Nord CE 6 is not trying to be a ‘mid-range gaming phone’ per se, like the CE 5. Instead, and I say this in a praise-worthy manner, it feels like OnePlus has taken a step back and asked a much more practical question: what does the average user actually want from a phone they use every single day? The answer, clearly, is balance. And balance is exactly what the Nord CE 6 delivers.

When I was putting together this review and looking at upgrades in the Nord CE 6 over the CE 5, the list is quite solid. There’s a bigger battery, smoother display, improved durability, brighter panel, faster touch response, better software support and more polished software features. Sure, the older Nord CE 5 technically had a slightly more performance-focused chipset with the Dimensity 8350 Apex, but in everyday use, the difference is nowhere near as dramatic as benchmarks may suggest. More on that in a bit.

I guess we have done a lot of establishing here. Let’s get on with my full review of the OnePlus Nord CE 6 and whether you should get one or not.

OnePlus Nord CE 6: Design

The first thing you notice about the Nord CE 6 is that it feels more aligned with the rest of OnePlus’ current lineup. The design language is cleaner now, especially with the rectangular camera deco at the back. It looks neat, organised and understated.

And honestly, that is probably the point. Because I can see people say that there isn’t anything groundbreaking here with the design, and I agree. But not every phone needs to scream for attention. I think the Nord CE 6 has a very safe design, but again, safe is not necessarily bad. In fact, most people buying a phone in this category probably want something that looks premium but isn’t too loud. This phone achieves that.

The blue colour variant deserves a special mention too. I think black and white are predictable hues; there’s nothing really to like or hate about those shades. But the blue feels breezy and fresh. I have been using the blue version, and it genuinely looks lovely in person.

Now yes, the Nord CE 6 is heavier than the CE 5 by around 16g, but that increase mainly comes from the massive 8,000mAh battery inside. Considering the battery size, the phone still remains relatively slim at 8.5mm. Most phones with batteries this large easily cross 9mm in thickness and become uncomfortable to hold. That does not happen here.

Build quality also feels reassuring. The phone feels solid in hand, and durability has definitely improved over the previous model. For context, the Nord CE 5 had an IP65 rating, whereas the Nord CE 6 has four ratings: IP66, 68, 69 and 69K.

OnePlus Nord CE 6: Display

The display is easily one of the best highlights of the Nord CE 6. For starters, this is a 6.78-inch 144Hz LTPS panel, which instantly makes the entire experience feel smoother than most phones in this segment. Of course, high-refresh-rate displays are not new anymore, but 144Hz ones are still not that mainstream, so you do notice the difference.

But honestly, the real talking point is the brightness.

OnePlus claims 1,800 nits HBM brightness, but in the Digit Test Labs, the panel hit a whopping 2,990 nits, which is seriously impressive for this price range. Obviously, outdoor visibility is excellent. You can use this phone indoors or out in the harsh sun, and you probably won't even notice the transition. So yes, visibility is simply not a problem.

And this is not just about brightness numbers either. The display itself looks rich and vibrant. Blacks are deep, colours feel lively, and the overall viewing experience is excellent. Colours pop nicely thanks to the 10-bit panel, while HDR10+ certification means Netflix and Prime Video content looks genuinely enjoyable here. Oh, did I mention, one of my complaints with the Nord CE 5 was its single speaker. Thankfully, with the Nord CE 6, we get stereo speakers, which have decent output.

Overall, the display experience is very good here. You can watch a lot of videos here, play games, or simply gawk at the screen. This is honestly one of the brightest and nicest displays you can currently get in this category.

OnePlus Nord CE 6: Performance and software

Performance is where things get slightly interesting this year because the Nord CE 6 takes a very different approach compared to the Nord CE 5.

For its asking price, the older Nord CE 5 was unapologetically gaming-focused. At the time, the CE 5 performed really well in benchmarks, thanks to the Dimensity 8350 Apex chip. But also, in games like BGMI and COD: Mobile, it could do 120 fps. The Nord CE 6, meanwhile, focuses more towards balanced performance and efficiency.

Now, before anyone panics seeing benchmark comparisons online, let us put things into perspective. Yes, the Nord CE 5 scores higher in raw performance numbers. In my testing, the Nord CE 6 scored about 1.14 million on Antutu, while Geekbench scores sit at roughly 1,085 in single-core and 3,140 in multi-core performance. The older CE 5 is technically faster by around 30-35 per cent in certain benchmarks.

But synthetic benchmarks do not always tell the full story.

In actual day in the life, the Nord CE 6 is a fast phone. It is responsive and smooth. Apps open quickly, multitasking works well, and OxygenOS 16 remains one of the cleaner Android experiences around. Unless you are constantly checking the fps while gaming, you are unlikely to feel a massive difference in regular use.

Naturally, the Snapdragon 7s Gen 4 inside the Nord CE 6 is built more around efficiency and thermal stability rather than raw performance. And that approach actually makes sense for the audience this phone targets.

OnePlus has also added what it calls a ‘Dual-Chip Firepower’ setup. Alongside the Snapdragon processor, the phone includes a dedicated Touch Reflex Chip that handles touch input separately. This enables a claimed 3,200Hz touch sampling rate, which OnePlus says is the fastest in the segment. In real use, the touch response genuinely feels instant. Inputs register extremely quickly, especially while gaming. The phone may not support 120fps in BGMI or COD: Mobile like the CE 5, but gameplay still feels smooth and responsive.

For context, the Nord CE 6 caps BGMI and COD: Mobile at 90fps, which some hardcore gamers may notice. However, the trade-off here is much better thermal management. The large cooling system keeps temperatures under control. And honestly, for most people, stable 90fps gameplay with cooler thermals is probably more useful.

Software is another area where the Nord CE 6 improves significantly. The phone ships with OxygenOS 16 based on Android 16, and the experience feels polished. OnePlus has added several genuinely useful AI features too, without making the software feel bloated. Some of the features, like AI Eraser and Reflection Eraser, work surprisingly well for quickly cleaning photos. AI Detail Boost sharpens zoomed-in shots nicely. As always, Circle to Search is extremely convenient, while practical additions like improved multitasking tools, better file sharing and support for multiple concurrent timers are quite useful.

For what it’s worth, OnePlus has slightly improved the software support cycle too. The Nord CE 6 gets 3 years of Android updates and 4 years of security patches, which is not the longest but still a noticeable improvement over the Nord CE 5’s shorter update promise.

OnePlus Nord CE 6: Camera

The Nord CE 6 keeps things fairly straightforward in the camera department. You are essentially relying on one 50MP primary camera for most of your photography, and honestly, that is perfectly fine because the main sensor does a decent enough job in most situations. Just in case, you are curious, the secondary sensor is a 2MP depth camera, and there’s a 32MP front camera for selfies and video calls.

Cutting to the chase, photos from the Nord CE 6’s camera come out detailed with pleasing colours and good dynamic range during daylight conditions. The camera does not try to oversaturate everything aggressively either, which I personally appreciate. Images generally look natural and social media ready without needing much editing.

Low-light performance is decent too, although you do start noticing some softness and noise in darker environments. Still, for a phone in this category, the results are more than usable.

Video recording is also decent, especially in good lighting conditions. Stabilisation works reasonably well, and colours remain consistent.

OnePlus Nord CE 6: Battery life

Hands-down, the battery life on the OnePlus Nord CE 6 is genuinely excellent. That massive 8,000mAh battery simply changes how you use the phone. With heavy usage involving gaming, camera use, streaming and social media, the phone comfortably lasts two full days. If your usage is moderate, stretching beyond two days is not difficult at all.

And despite the huge battery size, charging speeds remain impressively fast. A full charge takes roughly around an hour, which honestly feels quite reasonable considering how massive the battery is.

OnePlus Nord CE 6: Verdict

As the headline suggests, the OnePlus Nord CE 6 is the safest recommendation in the sub-Rs 35,000 category right now. And I mean that in the best possible way.

Sure, it may not be the most aggressive mid-range gaming phone anymore, and hardcore gamers may still prefer the raw performance edge of the Nord CE 5. But the Nord CE 6 feels like a far more complete smartphone overall.

To count its stars, the Nord CE 6’s display is excellent, battery life is outstanding, software support has improved, the design is clean, performance remains consistently good, and OxygenOS still offers one of the smoother Android experiences around. Most importantly, it feels dependable.

Also read: Vivo X300 FE Review: Fan of this edition but…

You see, for its price, the Nord CE 5 felt like a phone built mainly for gamers. The Nord CE 6 feels like a phone built for almost everyone. And honestly, for the majority of buyers, that probably makes more sense.

If you want a balanced Android phone that does nearly everything well without major compromises, the OnePlus Nord CE 6 is very easy to recommend.

There are flagship smartphones, and then there is the Vivo X300 Ultra. And I don’t mean that in the usual reviewer way, where everything sounds like a big deal in the first paragraph. Trust me when I say this, the X300 Ultra is actually one of a kind. It’s one of those phones that initially grows on you, and then at some point you realise, okay, this is special. For me, it slots right alongside the Galaxy S26 Ultra (read review) and the iPhone 17 Pro Max. And up until now, if someone randomly asked me what flagship phone to buy, I have always instinctively said Samsung or Apple, because let’s be honest, they are safe, familiar choices. But this time, if anyone asks me the same question, I think I will take a pause. Because if you actually have the money to spend (over Rs 1.5 lakh in this case), I genuinely feel like saying, just go buy the X300 Ultra.

There are camera phones, and then there is the Vivo X300 Ultra. And it has kind of reset my expectations for a flagship phone in 2026. Here’s my full review.

We have to start with the camera; there’s no other way

The Vivo X300 Ultra doesn’t just have a good camera system; it’s a proper, fully loaded setup, which tells you that Vivo just went all in. I remember using the Vivo X200 Pro, and I thought that was peak smartphone photography. Nothing I tried after that, including the Xiaomi 14 Ultra, really matched the Vivo experience. And now the X300 Ultra just takes that idea and goes beyond. Also, it’s not just that it takes great photos. A lot of phones do that now. It’s how much control it gives you, and how consistently it delivers.

There are so many ways to shoot on this phone. You have your regular auto mode, which already does a solid job. But once you step into Pro mode, you start seeing what Vivo is trying to do here. You get full manual control, and yes, you can shoot in LOG as well.

And, did I tell you about the ridiculous zoom on this phone? And I don’t mean to say that in a spec-sheet bragging manner, but in the sense that it is actually usable. You simply go in, frame your shot, and still get detail that holds up. Plus, in doing so, the phone doesn’t even flinch, be it daylight or low-light.

But portraits… portraits are where I had the most fun.

You get multiple focal lengths: 14mm, 35mm, 85mm, 170mm, and even 230mm. And it’s not just there for show. You actually end up using them depending on the situation. I know I used a lot of 35mm for something natural, 85mm for that classic portrait look, and then the longer ones when I wanted something more dramatic.

The good part is that the output just hits. I am literally at a loss for words on how good the camera on this thing is. In photos, the skin tones look natural. There is no weird over-processing. The background separation is clean and not overly artificial. Basically, there’s a certain character to these images that is really hard to explain, but very easy to notice once you start using the phone. And boy, is it a joy using this camera!

In general photos, it’s the same story. You get excellent detail and dynamic range, but more importantly, you get consistency. You don’t have to second-guess whether the shot will come out well. I mean, you really have to be a bad photographer to capture a bad photo on the Vivo X300 Ultra.

There are also a lot of editing tools built in. Enough that you can actually finish your photos on the phone itself without jumping to Canva or even Photoshop.

And, if you are still not down with all this, there’s the whole ecosystem around the camera: the teleconverter kit (200mm and 400mm lenses) and the shooting rig. I, alongside my team, actually used this setup to shoot a short film called The Proof, which is up on the Digit YouTube channel. And we shot it entirely on the X300 Ultra. I’d really suggest checking out the film (linked at the bottom) for the video quality, and that alone should tell you enough about how versatile this thing is.

And speaking of video recording, I think Vivo has really stepped up this year. You see, photos were already sorted, but the video now feels properly flagship-level. Stabilisation is solid, colours are consistent, and it handles lighting really well. I would again bring up the example of our short film, because we shot it during the day and evening, indoors and outdoors, and the footage turned out very usable without much effort.

In fact, just last weekend, I even ended up comparing the X300 Ultra with our Sony A7III camera. And look, a proper camera is still a proper camera. But when I took those photos of Krishika, side by side, from both devices, there were moments where the Vivo held its own in a way that genuinely surprised me. In fact, I can't believe I'm saying this, but I actually prefer the photos taken from the X300 Ultra over the Sony.

You can check out the full comparison by watching the video at this LINK.

If I had to rank camera phones right now, the Vivo X300 Ultra is easily number one for me. Then comes the Galaxy S26 Ultra, and then the iPhone 17 Pro Max. And that’s not me saying the others are bad. All three are incredible. But when it comes purely to the camera, this one just edges ahead.

Now, once you get past the camera, you may expect the rest of the phone to feel secondary. It doesn’t.

A design that feels as premium as it looks

The Vivo X300 Ultra has an interesting design. Yes, it is top-heavy, no doubt. That circular camera module is massive and sticks out quite a bit. But weirdly, that also makes the bottom half feel slimmer than it actually is. On paper, it’s about 8.2mm at its thinnest point, which is impressive considering everything inside.

In hand, the Vivo X300 Ultra feels… expensive. That’s the best way to put it. There’s this dense, solid feel to it, combined with a matte finish at the back that just feels nice. The sides are flat but slightly rounded, so they don’t dig into your fingers. I would still suggest using a case, because dropping this would hurt (emotionally and financially), but if you use it without one, like me, it feels amazing.

Durability is sorted too, with IP68 and IP69 ratings for dust and water resistance. You even get an IR blaster on top, which is a nice little bonus. USB-C 3.2 is here as well. The ultrasonic fingerprint is insanely fast, and paired with the superb haptic motor, the vibration feedback is quite satisfying every time I unlock the phone.

Honestly, at this point, I was trying to find something missing. The only thing that came to mind was Samsung’s privacy screen feature on the S26 Ultra. If this phone had that, it would have been dangerously close to perfect.

A display that keeps up with everything else

The Vivo X300 Ultra has an LTPO AMOLED screen, with a 6.82-inch size, 2K resolution, and a 144Hz refresh rate. And yes, it looks as good as it sounds. First up, there are a bunch of ways in which you can tailor the display experience on this phone. I have personally bumped up the resolution and refresh rate to max. For the colours, my favourite setting is Bright, because it just exhibits the complete range of vividness and punch.

So yes, everything looks vibrant on this thing, but not overdone. As vivid as the colours are, the blacks are equally deep, and everything just looks clean. It supports HDR10+ and Dolby Vision, so content looks great. For that matter, the audio output from the dual-stereo speakers sounds rich and full.

Vivo claims 1,800 nits HBM brightness, but in our testing at Digit Labs, it went up to 2,830 nits, which is kind of crazy. And you can feel it when you’re outdoors. Visibility is just not an issue.

In a nutshell, this is easily one of the best displays you can get on any flagship phone right now, period.

Power, software, and everything in between

Even when it comes to performance, there’s nothing to complain about. The Vivo X300 Ultra gets 16GB LPDDR5X Ultra RAM, 512GB UFS 4.1 storage, and the top-of-the-line Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 under the hood. What this means is that this phone is fast. Quite literally, in the way the software has been optimised, and the way animations and transitions work, everything is snappy. App opening times are quick, app switching is smooth, RAM management is top-tier, and it just feels like a flagship phone in 2026 should.

The benchmark numbers back it up too. In Antutu, the Vivo X300 Ultra scored 3,807,530. This is actually the highest Antutu score I have recorded on any Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 phone I have tested. Then, in Geekbench 6, the phone scored a solid 3,420 and 10,741 in single-core and multi-core performance, respectively. But honestly, you don’t even need to look at the benchmark scores, because as I said, the phone is fast.

By the way, gaming is solid as well. There’s support for 120fps in BGMI and COD: Mobile, while Genshin Impact is capped at 60fps. The gaming performance holds up, and thermals are managed nicely. However, yes, it did heat up when I used the camera rigorously, but that’s expected. The important part is that it doesn’t stop you from using it. Unlike iPhones, at least it doesn’t give up on you mid-shoot.

Finally, software is another area where Vivo quietly does a lot right. OriginOS 6 on Android 16 is actually very usable. I have already experienced it on the iQOO 15, iQOO 15R and now on the X300 Ultra. I think OriginOS is easily one of the best Android ROMS out there because you get features that people genuinely use. For instance, app locker, private space, app hiding, and app cloning are some of the practical additions I use. Customisation is also great. You can tweak things the way you like, including the lockscreen, the widgets, the way the clock looks, the display size, the AOD screen, fonts, icons, and so much more.

By the way, the AI features are there too, just in case you thought otherwise. The good part is that, thankfully, they are practical too. Photo editing tools, note summaries, recording and transcription in the recorder app, and my two personal favourites: native Screen Translation, which, as the name suggests, translates anything on the screen from one language to another. Especially useful when I am visiting a Chinese website, and I need a quick English translation. The second is getting AI captions in videos, and that too in your desired language. This comes in handy when a YouTube video doesn’t have captions, and it’s in a language I don’t understand (by the way, I only know English and Hindi), AI captions quickly translate it to English in real time.

I would again emphasise that these are OriginOS 6 features that I use in day-to-day life, and I feel the person who buys this phone will also use and appreciate them.

Battery life that keeps up with the rest

Battery life is yet another homerun for the Vivo X300 Ultra. And I know, you may think, is there anything wrong with the phone? Honestly, it is what it is.

The 6,600mAh silicon-carbon battery easily lasts a full day, and then some more, even with heavy use. In the PCMark battery test, it clocked 1,479 minutes, which is insane.

Charging is quick too: 100W wired and 40W wireless. Vivo includes a Type-C to Type-C PD charger in the box, which means that not only can it charge the X300 Ultra at 100W speeds, but even when I plugged in my Galaxy S26 Ultra or my MacBook Air M5, those devices are also able to take advantage of their maximum charging speeds.

By the way, the Vivo X300 Ultra takes about 45 minutes to fully top up from empty. But again, at no point did I feel like I needed to worry about the battery. And that kind of sums up the whole experience.

Vivo X300 Ultra: Should you buy it?

Will it be too far-fetched to say that the Vivo X300 Ultra is a near-perfect flagship? Because you need to understand, this phone is not just about having the best camera, even though it probably does. It’s about how complete the whole package feels.

Yes, the Galaxy S26 Ultra might still be the safer recommendation for most people. But if you are someone who actually cares about what your phone can do, especially with the camera, this one is very hard to ignore. In fact, it’s hard not to recommend it.

When you look at all the parameters, the Vivo X300 Ultra features a premium design, the display is excellent, performance is top-tier, the software is practical, and battery life is reliable. If you noticed, it nails every aspect of an all-rounder flagship smartphone.

In fact, for me, the X300 Ultra has set a new benchmark. I feel smartphone makers really need to pay attention here. And I’m genuinely curious about the upcoming Oppo Find X9 Ultra now, because that’s going to be an interesting fight.

But right now, as things stand, the Vivo X300 Ultra doesn’t just compete. It sets the bar.

There was a time when taking good photos meant carrying a DSLR camera and spending time editing before anything made it to social media. In 2026, that gap has narrowed quickly, and brands like Vivo deserve credit for that. Over the past few years, specifically with its imaging-focused approach and partnership with ZEISS, Vivo has positioned itself among the more serious players in smartphone photography. Cut short to 2026, Vivo X300 and X300 Pro, along with the new X300 Ultra, already reflect that direction, but they also sit on the higher side of the price ladder. That naturally leaves a gap, a space for something more accessible without letting go of that flagship camera DNA. And that is where the company brought in the Vivo X200 FE in July last year, which quickly became an instant hit.

At the time, the X200 FE felt like a smart move, bringing a capable camera setup, a fresh design and overall balanced experience close to the Rs 50,000 price point. The phone was praised not just because of the specs but for making the high-end Vivo imaging experience more reachable to the wider audience.

Now, Vivo is trying to build on that same idea but with the new X300 FE. It carries the same philosophy (a lot to talk about here) but with a massive jump in pricing, enough to overlap with the X300 itself. And that naturally raises a simple question: does it still make sense as the ‘accessible flagship,’ or has it drifted too close to the very segment it was meant to bridge?

Vivo X300 FE: Design and build

If I compare the Vivo X300 FE with the previous X200 FE, this is undoubtedly one of the biggest areas where things have changed. The company is still sticking to the idea of a compact flagship, but wait, the way Vivo has approached the design this time, it feels more refined and at the same time, experimental.

We still get to see the same 6.31-inch form factor, and honestly, I think this is one of the strongest aspects of the phone. It feels natural in the hand, easy to use and not bulky like most flagships today. It has a 7.99mm thickness and 191 gram weight, which strikes a good balance for everyday usage.

Moving to the back, and this is where you see the visible design shift. Vivo has moved to a horizontal, pill-shaped camera module placed across the top. Compared to the more complex, ZEISS-driven periscope layout on the X200 FE, this feels cleaner and more minimal. I can see some people pointing out a slight resemblance to Pixel phones, and to some extent, that’s fair, but it is subtle and not something that takes away from the phone’s identity.

In fact, unlike the other X300 models, or for that matter, even the X200 models, that feature circular camera models, the Vivo X300 FE with its pill-shaped camera island has a unique look of its own.

The finish is also premium. The matte (AG) glass back not only looks premium but also helps with grip and keeps fingerprints in check. I got the Urban Olive colour, and while I do not like what Vivo is trying to do with this muted, almost artistic shade, the Lilac Purple and Noir Black finishes look absolutely stunning.

Coming to the build quality, the aluminium frame adds sturdiness, and the use of glass on both sides keeps it in line with what you’d expect from a premium device. The rounded corners and flat frame combination also make it comfortable to hold for longer durations. It also gets IP68 and IP69 dust and water resistance ratings for that added durability.

Vivo X300 FE: Display

The Vivo X300 FE comes with a 6.31-inch LTPO AMOLED display, and on paper, it ticks most of the right boxes. You get a sharp 1.5K resolution (2640 × 1216) with a pixel density of 460 PPI, a 120Hz refresh rate and support for HDR10+ along with Netflix HDR certification.

In our testing, the Calman test using Spectracal C6, the display delivered an average deltaE of 0.9, which is excellent. To put that into perspective, anything below 1 is considered almost indistinguishable from real-life colour accuracy. Even the maximum deltaE of 2.6 (on white) stays within acceptable limits, meaning most users will not notice any inconsistency. Colours look natural, not exaggerated, which is something you begin to appreciate over time.

The panel also covers 99.7 per cent of the sRGB colour space, so whether you are watching videos, editing photos or just scrolling through apps, colours appear as they are meant to. The white point is very close to the industry-standard D65, which ensures that whites do not look overly warm or cool; they just look right.

Peak Brightness, officially rated at 5,000 nits, is good enough for both indoor and outdoor usage. In real-world use, visibility remains comfortable in most lighting conditions. Blacks, as expected from an AMOLED panel, are deep and inky, which helps with contrast and overall visual depth.

Vivo X300 FE: Performance

For a change, Vivo has offered an FE model with a top-tier Qualcomm chip and not a MediaTek one. The X300 FE features the latest Snapdragon 8 Gen 5, and I am still a little confused about why they went ahead with this SoC. For those unaware, the 8 Gen 5 processor gets a custom Oryon-based architecture with a 2+6 all big-core design, paired with LPDDR5X Ultra RAM and UFS 4.1 storage. Just to make it simple, this hardware setup is not just designed for power but also for smarter resource allocation depending on what you are doing: gaming, multitasking or even content creation. But again, this choice is a little expensive, and I will explain why in the verdict.

That said, in daily usage, the device did not really have anything to complain about. The Vivo X300 FE is fast, smooth and well optimised. I felt the snappiness and fluidity while doom-scrolling Instagram, switching between apps, or clicking photos on the go; everything just worked the way you’d expect from a flagship. However, thermal management can cause some trouble depending on how extensively you use this phone. Despite having a big vapour chamber cooling system, the device does get noticeably warm under load. The aluminium frame, in particular, tends to warm up quite a bit during longer sessions, which makes it slightly less comfortable to hold over time.

Coming to benchmarks, the Vivo X300 FE scores 28,21,622 on Antutu, which is strong, but not class-leading for this price segment. In Geekbench, it scored 2,767 in single-core and 8,750 in multi-core. GPU performance, measured via 3DMark Wildlife Extreme, came in at 2,695, while Solar Bay scored 7,120. PCMark Work 3.0 returned a score of 14,109. These are good numbers, but I was honestly expecting a bit more, specifically keeping the Vivo X300 in mind, which scored better in benchmarks.

Sustained performance is another mixed area. In our CPU throttling test, the X300 FE retained around 61 per cent of its peak performance. Now, that’s definitely not poor, but it does suggest the X300 FE finds it a bit challenging to hold on to peak performance over extended use, especially when paired with the thermal behaviour.

Vivo X300 FE: Battery

The Vivo X300 FE sticks to a familiar formula when it comes to battery, and that’s not necessarily a bad thing. You get a large 6,500mAh silicon-carbon battery, which is the same as what we saw on the Vivo X200 FE, along with 90W fast wired charging.

In everyday use, this translates to a top-notch battery performance for a phone of its size. During our testing, the X300 FE delivered 23 hours and 54 minutes in the PCMark Battery Life test, which is a solid result and comfortably puts it in the all-day (and then some) category. With a typical mix of usage, social media, camera, streaming and some gaming, I did not feel the need to constantly look for a charger.

Charging speeds are also in line with expectations. Using the 90W charger, the X300 FE goes from 0 to 100 per cent in just less than an hour. It is fast enough for most users, even if it doesn’t push into the ultra-fast territory some competitors are exploring.

One meaningful addition this time is 40W wireless charging, which wasn’t present on the previous model, making the package look more complete.

Vivo X300 FE: Camera

The Vivo X300 FE positions itself as a camera-first smartphone, and the hardware reflects that intent. You get a triple-camera setup led by a 50MP primary sensor (Sony IMX921, 1/1.56”, f/1.57) with OIS, paired with a 50MP telephoto camera (Sony IMX882) offering optical zoom and extended reach, and an 8MP ultra-wide lens with a 115-degree field of view. On the front, there’s a 50MP selfie camera. On paper, this is a versatile system, covering everything from standard shots to portraits and long-range zoom, with the added backing of ZEISS optics and Vivo’s image processing stack.

Vivo leans heavily on its ZEISS partnership here, not just for optics but also for tuning. Features like ZEISS multifocal portrait modes (ranging from 23mm to 100mm), multiple bokeh styles inspired by ZEISS lenses and the AI True Clarity Engine aim to deliver more natural textures, better subject separation, and improved detail retention, especially at higher zoom levels. There’s also support for a detachable telephoto extender, which pushes focal length further for niche use cases like distant landscapes or architectural shots.

In real-world use, the main camera does most of the heavy lifting, and it does it well. Images come out sharp, with strong dynamic range and good detail retention. Colours, for the most part, look vibrant, although there are instances where they lean slightly towards oversaturation rather than strict accuracy. Low-light performance is another strong area, with the sensor managing to pull in enough light while keeping noise under control.

The telephoto lens is also a reliable performer. It maintains a consistent colour profile with the main sensor, which helps when switching between lenses. Detail levels are good, and importantly, it holds up reasonably well even in low light, something that’s often a weak point in this segment. For portraits, the telephoto lens actually delivers better results than the dedicated portrait mode in many cases, offering more natural separation and sharper subject detail.

The ultra-wide camera, however, is where the setup feels less convincing. There is a noticeable drop in quality when you switch to it, both in terms of detail and dynamic range. It is usable, but it doesn’t quite match the standard set by the primary and telephoto cameras.

Zoom is a mixed bag. Up to around 3x, results are solid and usable. Beyond that, especially with digital zoom, the processing becomes aggressive. Images tend to lose detail and can appear overly softened, sometimes taking on an almost ‘oil painting’ look. The optional telephoto extender does help push boundaries, but it’s clearly more of a niche accessory than something most users will rely on daily, especially if they are buying an ‘FE.’

Tools like AI Retouch, object removal, reflection erase and even audio noise reduction for videos are designed to enhance usability. These work well in controlled scenarios, though, like most AI features, results can vary depending on the scene.

Vivo X300 FE: Verdict

The Vivo X300 FE is a good smartphone, but it feels slightly caught between its intent and where it sits in the lineup. On one hand, Vivo has delivered a well-rounded package. You get a compact, premium design, an excellent colour-accurate display, strong battery life, and a camera system that performs reliably. In daily use, it feels fast, polished, and easy to live with, which is exactly what you expect from something positioned close to a flagship.

But the bigger conversation is around its positioning. At this price, it sits very close to the Vivo X300, which, with ongoing offers, starts to feel like the more complete option, thanks to its better camera and performance, while offering a largely similar overall experience.

This simply makes me wonder if using the MediaTek Dimensity 9500s or another chipset in that range would have allowed for a slightly better balance, or if Vivo is intentionally placing it this way to make space for the Vivo X300T, if and when that arrives or maybe to show X300 as a promising choice.

For what it’s worth, the Vivo X300 FE is a solid compact flagship, one that makes sense more for what it offers than where it is placed.

We are in the middle of summer, and some of you may be looking to buy an air conditioner. It could be your first purchase or an upgrade. Either way, you want a good deal. Well, I have been using the Hisense Intelli Cool Pro AC for a month now. It is a 1.5-ton, 3-star inverter AC with 5-in-1 convertible modes, 4-in-1 healthy filter setup, and a respectable warranty structure. It is officially listed at Rs 36,990, but with cashback and bank offers, its price comes down to around Rs 32,490, which puts it in a more interesting spot. 

If you are looking for an AC in this range, read on to find out about its design, interface, how the installation went, how it actually performs day-to-day, and by the end, you can decide if the Hisense Intelli Cool Pro deserves your money or not.

Design and build

The Hisense Intelli Cool Pro has a minimal look. The indoor unit is a clean white panel, 1022 mm wide and a slender 231 mm tall, which makes it one of the slimmest units in its price range. It practically disappears on our wall. The finish is fine, and I haven't come across any rattles, creaks, or loose parts so far.

The display is a hidden LED type, visible only when the AC is running. It shows the set temperature. Nothing fancy, but easy to read from across the room. The louvres are ABS plastic and move smoothly in a four-way swing.

Matching the indoor unit, the remote also has a white-ish complexion on the front side. The back side is grey in colour, and on the bottom, there is a battery cavity with a slide-in cover. The remote is slim, lightweight and due to its curvy back, it is comfortable to hold. It works wirelessly up to 21 feet. Since it is infrared-based, you'll have to point it at the AC to register various commands. The buttons are clicky and have text and icon-based marking. So, you can easily know which button does what and perhaps not long before learn to use them without looking, thanks to a sensible layout. Using the remote in a dark room is also no problem, as the buttons are backlit. The rectangular screen above the button array is big enough for indicators.

The outdoor unit is also plain white in colour. There are vents through which you can see the fins with hairpin anti-corrosion coating. The compressor inside is made by GMCC, a leading manufacturer in this space. Both the compressor coil and the tube are made of copper. Overall, the outdoor unit has a metallic build and weighs around 30 Kg. While lifting it for installation, the technician did ask for a helping hand. So, that's a two-man job. And with that, let's get to the setup experience.

Hisense Intelli Cool Pro: Installation and setup

A solo technician came with the tools for the installation. He unboxed the AC and got on with the installation. In our case, there was some ducting and drilling involved. The vacuuming of the dust from this process is the customer's responsibility. Of course, you'll have to plaster the hammered area around the pipe. Another thing to note is that the unit also does not come with a plug pre-fitted. You will have to call an electrician separately, or yourself arrange a 16A 3-pin plug for the bare cable from the AC. This is a common practice, nothing out of the ordinary.

Also, if your outdoor unit needs to be wall-mounted, the bracket would cost separately. From Hisense, this costs Rs 1,000. The technician was professional, and he charged Rs 1,593 for his service. So, the total cost of installation was Rs 2,593 in my case (reimbursed by the brand since it is a review unit), and it took under 2 hours for the whole thing.

Once slotted into a socket and switched on, it worked fine. You can control the AC using the bundled remote and/or the ConnectLife app. The AAA batteries for the remote come in the box. Put them in, point the remote at the AC and start using.

Pairing and using the ConnectLife app to control the AC is even easier, as it works over Wi-Fi. During the app's setup, only a 2.4GHz Wi-Fi connection was accepted, but now it also works over 5GHz Wi-Fi. Regardless, the app takes a 2-second delay to trigger the commands like raising or lowering the cooling. The remote is quicker in that respect.

The app is not just about the basic commands, though.

Performance, UI, and smart features

Hisense Intelli Cool Pro sports a cooling capacity of 5,100 W, which is the same as some 1.5-ton 5-star ACs from its leading competitors. Yes, the Hisense model is 3-star rated, but it costs about 30% cheaper than its rivals. Also, on the other hand, the minimum cooling capacity of the Hisense AC is 1,785 W, which is higher than the competition's 1,500 W. This means that at its most relaxed setting, the Hisense is working a little harder than competitors.

Its air throw is rated at up to 12 metres, though I agree that matters less in a 130 sq ft bedroom. In my testing, a temperature gun reading on the wall showed a 3-degree drop in about 15 minutes. Granted, wall temperature varies with material, insulation, and airflow. So, take this as only a rough indicator.

If you want faster cooling, the Super mode puts the compressor into overdrive and brings a comfortable temperature noticeably quicker than normal mode.

You can manually change fan speeds in 4 steps, depending on your need: one auto mode and three different speed levels.

Then, there is the I-Feel mode, which reads the ambient temperature at the remote's location and adjusts cooling accordingly. If you are someone who keeps the remote on your bedside table, this is genuinely useful. The unit directs cooling to where you specifically are.

The Hisense AC is also a 5-in-1 convertible, meaning you can choose from usage-based preset modes that adjust cooling behaviour and power use:

• Baby mode for gentler airflow
• Comfort mode for balanced cooling
• Work from home mode for steady cooling with lower noise
• Family mode for faster cooling when more people are in the room
• Smart mode uses AI to adjust cooling based on ambient conditions

However, the brand does not specify the exact cooling capacity levels for each mode.

What the brand has explicitly displayed on the AC is the 3-star BEE rating sticker. This sticker shows the rating is valid between 1 January 2026 and 31 December 2027. The AC has an ISEER of 4.4, which denotes a sensible efficiency for the price.

Cooling aside, you also get health benefits from a 4-in-1 filter setup: a Catechin filter with antibacterial properties, an activated carbon layer for odour absorption, and a HEPA layer for PM2.5 particles. This is a big plus if you don't have an air purifier or don't want to run one. You can access the filters by lifting the front panel.

Hisense has also included a self-frost clean function that helps prevent mould and associated odour buildup over time. Again, a thoughtful addition.

In everyday use, the AC stays fairly quiet. My mother even asked if it was running properly, as our older AC is noticeably louder. Turn on Sleep Mode for an even hushed experience. Hisense rates the Intelli Cool Pro between 31 dB and 44 dB. In my testing with a sound level meter, noise levels ranged between 40 dB and 60 dB. This difference is expected, as brand ratings are usually measured in controlled conditions, while real-world usage includes ambient noise and higher fan speeds.

On the smart side, as already mentioned, the AC can be controlled through the ConnectLife app. Besides remote controls, you also get useful functions like timer, scheduling, and self-diagnosis of the AC's condition. These work reliably. There are If-Then-based automation routines, but some of the triggers were greyed out. There is no Apple HomeKit or Matter support. You can enable tariff settings in the app, which calculates your AC electricity cost based on your per-unit electricity rate. For example, you can set Rs 8 per kWh as the fixed per-unit electricity price. But I don't understand what it does afterwards. The app does not offer detailed energy analytics.

While voice assistant support via Alexa and Google Assistant is available, Sign in with Google wasn't working.

Before we get to my closing thoughts, let's talk about the warranty policy. The Hisense Intelli Cool Pro comes with a 5-year comprehensive warranty and a 10-year compressor warranty. The PCB and condenser are also covered for 5 years. That is very good to have.

Hisense Intelli Cool Pro: Should you buy this AC?

The Hisense Intelli Cool Pro cools fast, stays quiet enough that my mother thought it was not even running, and has different modes and features to enrich the experience. The design is minimal, the remote is functional, the 5-in-1 convertible modes give you some flexibility depending on who is in the room and what you are doing, the Super mode pulls the room temperature down quickly when you need it, and the 4-in-1 filter with HEPA is a genuine bonus at this price.

A few things could be better. The ConnectLife app works, and I used it more often than the remote, but some aspects like the tariff setting, the voice assistant and the automation triggers need some polishing. But these aren't in any way a dealbreaker in everyday use. And unless you are building a connected home, the absence of standards like Matter wouldn't bother you.

So, if you want an inverter cum convertible AC that is reasonably smart in looks and performance, you can consider the Hisense Intelli Cool Pro. It offers reliable cooling, promising filtration, and a reassuring warranty.

For the longest time, I was a controller-only gamer (love my PlayStation 5 way too much) and wasn’t very keen on trying a mouse and a keyboard. In fact, I have played most of the titles in my Steam library with a controller connected to my PC. But then, I am also a journalist, and there are times when I quickly hop into a game before getting back to writing a review or a feature. And this is where a good gaming mouse comes into the picture. Now over time, I have realised that lightweight gaming mice work best for me. And this is not just for gaming, but also for everyday work. Logitech’s latest, the G Pro X2 Superstrike, fits right into that space. It is one of those rare mice that feels like it belongs both on a work desk and a gaming setup.

Also read: Logitech MX Master 4 review: Brilliant for productivity, but it comes at a price

However, this is not just another lightweight mouse. Logitech is trying something very different here. It is rethinking something as basic as a mouse click. Yes, you read that right. Because instead of using traditional switches, this mouse uses haptic feedback and sensors to decide when a click should register. And how that haptic feedback behaves is completely up to you. Now in theory, this could mean a better performance in your favourite games. Strong focus on the words ‘in theory.’ And of course, all of this comes at a premium price. The mouse is listed at 19,999 on Amazon at the time of writing this review. 

So should you go ahead and spend that much on the Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike? Read on. 

Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike review: Specs at a glance

Before we delve into the details, let’s quickly look at what the Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike brings to the table in terms of specifications. This is a lightweight wireless gaming mouse that weighs around 61 grams, which already puts it in the competitive esports category. It is also powered by Logitech’s HERO 2 sensor, capable of going all the way up to 44,000 DPI, with tracking speeds of over 888 inches per second and acceleration beyond 88G.

You also get Logitech’s lightspeed wireless technology with support for up to an 8,000Hz polling rate, which is about as fast as it gets right now. The mouse features five programmable buttons and onboard memory, so your settings stay consistent across devices.

Finally, what steals the spotlight is the new click system. Instead of traditional mechanical switches, Logitech is using what it calls a Haptic Inductive Trigger System. This allows you to customise actuation distance and click feedback through software. We’ll be talking more about this feature a little later. With that, let’s move on to the experience. 

Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike review: Design and ergonomics

Now, if you think that each premium mouse needs to have a distinct design, think again. Logitech hasn’t really taken any big risks in terms of design here, and if you have used G Pro models earlier, you are going to feel right at home. 

My gaming setup is mostly black and white, and this mouse fits right into it. The Lunar Eclipse colourway looks clean and premium without trying too hard. There is also no RGB here, which may disappoint some gamers. As for me, I prefer this minimal and clean look.

The mouse is quite light, which makes it easy to move around during long sessions. That said, I would not call this the lightest mouse I have used. My Xtrfy M4 Wireless still feels slightly lighter, and that costs significantly less.

Another thing that stood out to me is the finish. The surface is very smooth, almost too smooth. And even though it looks great, it does not offer the best grip, especially during intense gaming sessions. I found myself wishing for a bit more texture or resistance. You can add grip tapes, and that does help, but out of the box, it feels extra smooth.

Coming to the button layout, it is simple and functional. You get two main buttons, a scroll wheel, and two side buttons, all well-placed and easy to distinguish. To conclude, the Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike is clearly designed with competitive gaming in mind, where simplicity is preferred over versatility.

Haptic clicks that change the game

Let’s now talk about the feature that sets this mouse apart from its competitors. Instead of traditional mechanical switches, Logitech has introduced the Haptic Inductive Trigger System with the G Pro X2 Superstrike. In easy to understand terms, the mouse does not rely on physical clicks anymore. Sensors detect how far you press the button, and a haptic motor gives you feedback to simulate that click.

Now, the first time I used it, it felt sort of strange. The moment I pulled the mouse out of the box and tried to feel its clicks, it felt like pressing a broken mouse. There was no feedback at all, as everything depends on the software.

But once I configured the clicks as per my liking, things got super smooth. There are just endless options here. You can adjust how sensitive the clicks are or can make them extremely light, where even resting your finger might trigger a click. In addition to this,  you can also make them heavier and more deliberate.

There are multiple levels of actuation and feedback, which means you can fine-tune the mouse exactly how you like it. You can even set different actuation points for left and right clicks. I enjoyed toying around with different settings until I finally settled on a nice balance that I preferred. 

On paper, all this customisation should improve your performance. After all, less travel distance means faster clicks, right? But my experience here begs to differ. 

Let me first clarify that I am not a competitive esports gamer. I mostly play story-driven games, with occasional sessions in titles like Doom: The Dark Ages, Battlefield 6, and Helldivers 2. 

So I tested this mouse across these games, and while it felt different, I cannot say my performance improved. Now this could be a skill issue. Or maybe this feature is more useful for players who are already playing at a very high level. Because realistically, a mouse can only do so much. It can make you faster, but it cannot magically turn you into an esports athlete overnight. 

In a nutshell, the Haptic Inductive Trigger System is clearly a feature aimed at competitive players. If you are someone who cares about every millisecond, you might appreciate it more than I did. That said, once you find your preferred settings, the clicks do feel good. They are different from traditional clicks, slightly softer and less sharp, but still satisfying in their own way.

Productivity, performance and battery

Outside of gaming, the Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike behaves exactly how you would expect a premium mouse to behave.

For everyday tasks like writing, browsing, or working on design tools like Canva, it works perfectly fine. There is no noticeable advantage from the haptic clicks here, and there also does not need to be. You should not expect to save time in your workflow just because your clicks register faster.

The HERO 2 sensor continues to be one of the strongest aspects of this mouse. Tracking is accurate and consistent across different surfaces, and I did not notice any issues during my usage.

Talking about the battery life, it is rated at around 90 hours, and in my usage, it held up well. I used it for roughly seven hours a day for work and up to two hours for gaming, and I did not feel the need to charge it for about a week.

One important thing to note here is that the battery performance also depends heavily on your haptic settings. Higher feedback levels consume more power, which is something you need to keep in mind. Since I mostly used moderate settings, battery life was not an issue for me.

Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike: Verdict

The Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike is one of the most interesting gaming mice I have used in a while. And this isn’t because it looks different, but because it is trying to change something fundamental. The haptic click system feels like an innovation that comes at a premium cost. It offers a level of customisation that you simply do not get anywhere else right now. And for competitive players, this could translate into a real advantage. 

With that said, the pricing of the mouse will make you stop and think for a second. So, if you have the budget and are curious about this new technology, the Logitech G Pro X2 Superstrike is definitely worth considering. However, if you are not into competitive gaming or are working within a tighter budget, other options offer more or less similar performance without the added cost.

Also read: Asus Vivobook 16 review: A dependable 16-inch laptop for work and study

Philips has a long legacy in the audio space. We had a tape recorder cum radio set from the brand that we treasured for years, even after it stopped being useful. That's the allure the brand holds for many of us, Indians. So, when Philips launched the SHP9500 in India, I was eager to test it. The review unit came in a few weeks back, and I have been using it since then as my primary work headphones. It comes with a long detachable wire and a black open-back design that states its studio headphone aesthetic. I had it sitting over my ears, giving me, spoiler-spoiler, a good time, but much to my colleague's chagrin. But in this course of use, I was trying to find whether the experience justifies the Rs 6,499 price it demands. Come, let me take you through my experience and by the end, you will have the answer.

Simple design and decent comfort

The SHP9500 does not try very hard with design. It sticks to a functional and familiar formula: Large circular earcups, a metallic headband with a lustrous finish, some of which gets exposed if you extend it, the metallic open-back grille, but black in colour, and a matte plastic frame. The detachable wire is also black, with the headphone input grey in colour.

There is a Philips logo on the hinges connecting both sides of the headband and earcups. Just so you don't get confused by the side, there are Left and Right markings on the outer surface of the respective earcups and on the inner headband cushion too.

But, I don't get the point of '50MM Vented NeoDymium Drivers' and 'Open Acoustic Architecture' text on both earcups. By design, this pair will be mainly used in a room. It is a very personal product and not something to show off. That's all, I rest my bickering.

The headphones feel light, and the clamp force is not too tight. The foam cushions are moderately soft, but the padding is thin compared to regular over-ear headphones. The mesh is breathable. This matters for airflow, and even though the material is a bit rough, it was comfortable to wear for hours in an air-conditioned office. But you may feel the coarseness in a non-AC, hot and humid room.

Speaking of comfort, Philips has bundled a really long cable, around 3 meters long. Even while using it on my office desk, at times it would unintentionally get tangled on my chair legs or my human legs. A minor quibble. But I get that the length means one can conveniently sit at a distance from the source, without any extender and move around, say in a studio.

The cable material is good, and the detachability allows you to connect third-party wires, too. More convenience, my friend. There is no built-in mic on the bundled cable. But thanks to the detachability, you can plug in an aftermarket option.

The overall build feels solid. The open-back design leaks sound, and that can annoy people around you. So, like any open-back headphone, the SHP9500 is meant for quiet environments. The outside noise seeps in. But you can escape that by playing music at a decent loudness.

Clear and raw sound

While I cribbed about the 50mm driver and open acoustic architecture branding in the above segment, I have praises for them here. The sound output is clear, present, and comes with a respectable amount of bass and treble. There is ample separation of instruments and vocals. You can hear what's going on in the track. And the Philips headphones sound plenty loud, too. I didn't have to raise volume beyond 75% or some times 80% volume on my MacBook Air M1.

The presentation is airier than closed-back headphones, but still, there's some enclosure. It is not as wide or expansive as more expensive headphones. But that doesn't take away much from the experience.

Vocals and instruments sound clean in my favourite: Hurt by Johnny Cash. I could even hear some scratch-like artefact towards the song's climax. Similarly, I could hear tiny details clearly in Far From Road by Handsome Family. And the openness of the sound is evident in Heartbreaker by the Rolling Stones.

Also Read: Sennheiser HD 505 Copper review: Studio-style clarity under Rs 20,000

The bass extension in songs like Breathe Into Me by Marian Hill or desi hip hop tracks by Seedhe Maut or Krsna slaps, but it is not very deep or overpowering. It feels controlled with some vibration.

The high portion in songs like Dawn of the Iconoclast by Dead Can Dance sounds detailed and listenable.

Besides music, the sound was clear and quick for solo games. For multiplayer gaming, you'll need a cable with a mic. And in case you intend to use it for casual editing, a colleague of mine used it to edit some videos and said it was fine.

Should you buy Philips SHP9500?

There are not many open-back headphones in the sub-Rs 7,000 price segment. And at its street price, the Philips SHP9500 can be a good entry to this kind of headphone. It is comfortable, easy to use, sounds clear and raw. For the price of Rs 6,499, it is a good purchase.

But if you want a mic input and don't have any lying around, then you will have to make an additional investment. And if you don't like the open-back form factor, the associated compromises in sound leakage, or the wired design, then you can look elsewhere.

So, for those looking for wired open-back over-ear headphones from a reputed brand at around Rs 6,000 to Rs 7,000, this Philips pair is worth checking out.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar stories.

Also Read: Sennheiser HD 500 BAM microphone review ft. HD 560s headphone: Clear, convenient, and modular upgrade

The moment I started using the OnePlus Pad 4, I immediately felt that there was a certain familiarity. If you haven’t guessed it, by familiarity, I am referring to the OnePlus Pad 3. Compared to last year's model, the design feels the same, the display looks similar, and even the overall experience doesn’t feel drastically different at first. Yes, on paper, the Pad 4 comes with its fair share of upgrades, but they don’t stand out instantly, and at first glance, it all feels predictable. Of course, predictability is not always a bad thing. When a product already works well, the focus shifts from adding new features to refining the overall experience. That is exactly what OnePlus seems to be doing here.

After spending a couple of weeks with the OnePlus Pad 4, one thing is clear: this is more of an evolutionary upgrade rather than a revolutionary one. What I mean to say is that the improvements are there, but they’re subtle, and you only start noticing them over time. 

Let’s dive into my full review of the OnePlus Pad 4.

Display and audio experience

The display continues to be the centrepiece of the OnePlus Pad 4. It uses the same 13.2-inch LTPS LCD panel with a 3.4K resolution and a super smooth 144Hz refresh rate. Most of the time, it delivers a sharp and fluid experience. The noticeable change is brightness. 

OnePlus claims up to 1,000 nits in high brightness mode (HBM), and in our testing at Digit Test Labs, the display easily went past the claims and reached around 1,080 nits. That extra difference, especially outdoors or in bright environments, really adds up to the overall experience.

Even indoors, the OnePlus Pad 4 delivers a consistent experience. The display is vibrant, smooth, and sharp. Being an IPS LCD means blacks and the contrast are not as deep as you’d get on an AMOLED screen. Plus, there is a slight colour shift when you look at different angles. But, looking at it head-on, and generally for most use cases, it performs well.

For me, the 7:5 aspect ratio continues to stand out. It feels more practical for reading, browsing, and multitasking compared to traditional widescreen formats. While watching content, there are black bars, but that’s acceptable given the overall usability.

I have tested the OnePlus Pad 4’s display quality at our Digit Test Labs, and the display recorded an average Delta E of 2.7 in the Calman colour test. In the Colour gamut test, it measured 98.4 per cent. These are solid numbers, no doubt, but not class-leading.

Audio is where it gave me a hands-down strong impression. The 8-speaker setup delivers high volume, with clear vocals and balanced overall output. Whether you’re streaming or casual listening, the experience would be reliable. You also get support for a wide variety of codecs, including LDAC, SBC, AAC, aptX, aptX HD, aptX Adaptive, LDAC and LHDC5.0.

Design and utility

OnePlus didn’t touch the design, and, in my view, that decision makes sense. Because the aluminium build, flat yet very slightly curved edges (more like 2.5D curves), and slim profile still feel well executed. However, the OnePlus Pad 4 is thinner and lighter than its predecessor. The build quality is top-notch, and the overall design continues to deliver that sleek, simple look. OnePlus also reduced its bezels, so now the screen-to-body ratio is 89.4 per cent compared to 87.3 per cent on the Pad 3.

There are still a couple of limitations that carry forward. There is no cellular option this time as well, and there is no fingerprint scanner. For a moment, I can still live without cellular connectivity, as I have fast Wi-Fi access both at home and at the office. However, not having a fingerprint sensor is a big miss. Considering this is a high-end Android tablet with all the bells and whistles, missing out on the fingerprint sensor doesn’t make sense. 

Apart from this, in terms of colour options, you get to choose between two: Sage Mist and Dune Glow (which I've been using), and both look clean and stylish.

Stylus Pro and Smart Keyboard

Along with the OnePlus Pad 4, OnePlus also introduces the Stylus Pro, which is one of the more meaningful upgrades this time. It offers 16,000 levels of pressure sensitivity, making it more suitable for sketching, drawing, and note-taking with better precision and control.

There are gesture controls as well, which add a layer of convenience, and there are practical features like magnetic attachment and the ‘Find My Stylus’ function that improve day-to-day usability. They also add an extra tip in the Stylus box, and it noticeably changes the writing and drawing experience depending on how the tablet is being used. Whether you prefer a smoother glide or a little more friction while writing, having that option is genuinely useful.

Now, OnePlus didn’t send over the keyboard. But from what I’ve seen, this time they’re going with a floating or levitating design, much like Apple’s Magic Keyboard. It has a trackpad and 16.05mm keycaps, which are larger than those on some laptops. That should help make typing feel more spacious and comfortable, especially if you are someone like me whose work involves a lot of typing.

The pogo pins have also shifted, and they are on the top left of the tablet now, so the old OnePlus smart keyboard will not work with the OnePlus Pad 4. That means existing users looking to upgrade may need to buy the new accessory separately.

Performance and benchmarks

Performance is where the OnePlus Pad 4 moves forward. The device is powered by the top-tier Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 chipset, and in benchmarks, it delivers strong numbers. It scored 39,31,305 on Antutu, while Geekbench results came in at 3,390 for single-core and 10,022 for multi-core. In the 3DMark Wildlife Extreme test, it achieved an overall score of 6,868, and in the CPU throttling test, it retained around 78 per cent of its peak performance.

Now, the results say that the hardware is capable. However, in day-to-day usage, I didn’t feel any noticeable difference when compared to the OnePlus Pad 3, which was already powerful. Now, don’t get me wrong here, the OnePlus Pad 4 delivers a buttery smooth and responsive experience. However, I couldn’t find a tangible and practical difference where I could straight off say that the new machine offers a leap in performance. Which again, is true on paper, but in the real world, the experience feels very similar to the older model.

You just know that if you are buying this as a brand-new tablet, everything on the OnePlus Pad 4 will feel effortless. You name it: multitasking, app transitions, app switching, gaming, and much more, all remain fast and fluid. Which reminds me, I tested BGMI and Asphalt: Legends on this tablet, and both games natively support 120fps without any hiccups. Even under sustained load, there’s no performance dip.

That said, if you are coming from the OnePlus Pad 3 and upgrading to the Pad 4, you won’t really notice a world of difference in performance.

Software experience

OnePlus Pad 4 runs on OxygenOS 16 based on Android 16, and the overall experience remains clean and smooth.

I like the Open Canvas feature, which continues to give me one of the most effective multitasking experiences. You can run multiple apps side by side in three windows. Additionally, you can add a floating window to it, and it feels fast, while the tablet handles everything very smoothly.

There are some integrated AI features on the Pad 4, like AI Writing, AI Translation, AI Painting, and AI Recorder, and they are useful, especially if you’re using this for work.

The ecosystem experience is also strongest within OnePlus devices. You can transfer your files through Quick Share and O+ Connect. However, if you’re coming from an iPad, you can still feel that gap.

Cameras

The camera setup remains the same as last year, as we saw on the OnePlus Pad 3. The Pad 4 includes a 13MP rear camera and an 8MP front camera.

Image quality is sufficient for video calls, document scanning, and occasional use. Beyond that, you can shoot videos in 4K at 30fps, but the overall quality is acceptable, which is expected, given this is a tablet we are talking about here.

On the front, you get an 8MP sensor capable of recording 1080p video at 30fps, which is once again pretty decent for taking video calls and meetings. Although the output is clear enough for everyday use, that’s really all you need from a tablet camera.

Battery and charging

Battery life is also one of the more practical improvements this year. The OnePlus Pad 4 now includes a 13,380mAh battery, and in heavy use, it gave me 10 to 11 hours of screen-on time, consistently. This makes it reliable for extended sessions without frequent charging.

Speaking of which, charging remains the same at 80W, and despite the larger battery, charging times remain manageable. The OnePlus Pad 4 takes about 1 hour and 45 minutes to fully charge from 0 to 100 per cent.

OnePlus Pad 4: Verdict

The OnePlus Pad 4 feels like a product made with confidence. I feel that the company clearly understood that the foundation was already strong, so instead of changing everything for the sake of it, it focused on improving the areas that really matter in daily use. To give you a refresher, the Pad 4 brings a brighter display, excellent battery life, dependable speakers, smooth software, and flagship-grade performance that never leaves you wanting for more. Add to that useful extras like Open Canvas multitasking and the improved Stylus Pro, and the overall package feels polished and easy to live with.

However, I also won’t deny that this is probably not the most exciting upgrade for existing OnePlus Pad 3 users. If you already own the previous model, the jump to the new one is not big enough to feel essential unless you specifically want the better battery or new accessories. 

But for anyone buying their first premium Android tablet, the OnePlus Pad 4 is a very solid option. More importantly, it feels complete, and that is not something every Android tablet manages to achieve.

If you look at the smartwatch market today, it is no longer the high-growth, excitement-driven category it once was. The latest data show marginal year on year growth, a possible sign that the segment is stabilising rather than expanding. The same data also shows that the local brands, which once drove volumes in the affordable segment, saw shipment drops and a sharp decline last. At the same time, the market itself has divided into two clear directions. On one side, there are premium smartwatches that show off the advanced sensors, better ecosystem and higher price tags. On the other hand are the affordable ones that are all about volumes, where design, battery life and basic health tracking matter more. This is also where most Indian buyers still are.

Within this crowded segment, there is another shift that is quietly happening: smartwatches are becoming more style-driven. And this proved to be right when my friend saw the Noise Diva Araya and asked if she could get one to experience it. Though she does not belong to the tech space, I wanted to understand it from her perspective and decided to pick this up as a challenge: reviewing a smartwatch that is made for women. (Just to answer the most basic question you may have, yes, all the features were experienced by her, and I am just framing it in my words here with my tech gyaan).

Coming back, the Noise Diva Araya is positioned as a jewellery-inspired smartwatch that clearly leans into design as its primary differentiator. It’s being pitched as Noise’s first ceramic smartwatch, with a scratch-resistant body and a crystal-studded bezel that’s meant to stand out more like an accessory than a typical wearable. On paper, it still covers the expected basics: an AMOLED display, Bluetooth calling, health tracking features like heart rate, blood oxygen, sleep and stress monitoring, along with a claimed battery life of up to five days. But the question is, how cool is it for the price? Read along.

Design and build

Without a shadow of a doubt, the NoiseFit Diva Araya is clearly designed to stand out. It uses a ceramic build paired with a metal case, and the highlight here is the crystal-studded bezel with 60 small stones placed around the dial. It is a very different approach compared to most smartwatches in this price range, which usually stick to simpler, sportier designs. The ceramic finish also adds a practical benefit; it is more resistant to scratches and gives the watch a smoother, more polished look.

The AMOLED display fits well into this design language. With up to 850 nits of brightness, it stays visible in most lighting conditions, whether indoors or outdoors. More importantly, it blends nicely with the overall look, giving the watch a clean, premium feel instead of looking like a basic gadget strapped to your wrist.

In everyday use, the design is where the Diva Araya makes its strongest impression. It looks far more premium than its price suggests. The circular dial, glossy finish and detailing give it an almost analogue-watch vibe, which works well for people who do not want something overly sporty or tech-heavy on their wrist. It is the kind of watch that people are likely to notice and ask about.

At the same time, it does not feel uncomfortable or bulky. It sits well on the wrist and feels balanced for daily wear. Overall, this is less about being flashy and more about offering a refined, jewellery-like design, something that is still relatively rare in this segment.

Display and UI

The second, yet important aspect is the display and UI. The Noise Diva Araya offers a fairly standard smartwatch display setup, but with a focus on aesthetics. It features a 1.28-inch circular AMOLED panel with a resolution of 416 x 416 pixels and peak brightness rated at 850 nits. In simple terms, this means the screen is expected to look sharp, vibrant and readable across most conditions, while also complementing the watch’s jewellery-inspired design. Always-On Display acts like a cherry on the cake, making the overall design pretty good.

In everyday use, the display does a good job indoors. It looks crisp, colours appear punchy, and text remains easy to read. The UI also feels fluid for the most part, making navigation straightforward even for first-time users. However, outdoors, the brightness does not always match expectations. While 850 nits sounds sufficient on paper, visibility under harsh sunlight could have been better, especially considering this is an AMOLED panel in this price range.

Where the watch does well is in usability. The interface is simple and easy to get used to. You can navigate using swipes in different directions. Swipe right for health stats like steps, sleep, calories and more, swipe down for quick settings and battery info and swipe up for notifications. There is also a crown that helps access apps and features quickly, which adds to the ease of use.

Feature-wise, it covers most basics, including weather, music controls, camera controls, Bluetooth calling and SOS. Customisation is another strong point, with multiple watch faces and layout options available. That said, the overall experience is slightly held back by inconsistent app connectivity.

Connectivity, calling, features and more

On paper, the Noise Diva Araya checks most of the boxes you would expect from a modern smartwatch in this segment. It supports Bluetooth 5.3 for connectivity, along with features like Bluetooth calling, notifications and an AI voice assistant. On the health side, it includes heart rate monitoring, blood oxygen tracking, sleep tracking, stress tracking and even skin temperature sensing. There is also a dedicated menstrual cycle tracker. Add to that safety features like SOS and utilities such as Find My Phone, and it comes across as a fairly well-loaded package.

In actual use, most of these features work as claimed, at least at a basic level. Health tracking, including sleep and step monitoring, is functional and gives you a general idea of your daily activity. The watch also handles notifications, quick controls and other utilities without much complexity.

However, there are a few practical limitations. The speaker volume is on the lower side, which affects Bluetooth calling as well as features like Find My Phone. In quieter environments, it is usable, but in slightly noisy surroundings, it becomes easy to miss.

The bigger concern is the app experience. The companion app, NoiseFit Health and Fitness, does connect to the watch, but the overall experience feels inconsistent. There are instances where the app crashes, especially when accessing certain features like cycle tracking. Watch faces take time to load, and in some cases, health data such as sleep or step counts does not sync reliably and may even disappear.

Battery and charging

The Noise Diva Araya keeps things fairly straightforward here. It packs a 320mAh battery and uses a magnetic charger, which is standard for most smartwatches in this category. The company claims up to 5 days of battery life, which sets a reasonable expectation for typical usage.

In real-world use, the watch actually holds up to the expectation. Over the course of testing, it managed close to 5-6 days on a single charge (without Always on Display), which puts it right in line with what is being promised. This includes regular usage like notifications, some health tracking and occasional feature use. As always, battery life will vary depending on how heavily you use features like Bluetooth calling, brightness levels or continuous tracking, but for moderate use, it feels dependable.

Charging, however, is not particularly fast. It takes around 1 hour and 45 minutes to get fully charged using the bundled magnetic charger. That is not slow enough to be a problem, but it is also not something that stands out.

Noise Diva Araya: Verdict

The Noise Diva Araya is a smartwatch that leans heavily on design, and that is both its biggest strength and its limitation. In a crowded segment, it stands out with a more refined, jewellery-inspired approach that genuinely feels more premium than its price suggests. For users who value looks as much as features, that alone can be a strong reason to consider it.

At the same time, the experience is not without compromises. The display is sharp but could be brighter outdoors, and while the feature set looks extensive on paper, execution is inconsistent in areas like app connectivity and calling. Battery life, however, remains a reliable aspect.

Overall, the Noise Diva Araya works best as a style-first smartwatch that covers the basics well, but those expecting a polished, seamless smart experience may find it falling slightly short.

I test a lot of smartphones. And with that comes testing many cameras. Main cameras, ultra-wide cameras, telephoto lenses, portrait modes, AI editing tools, night modes, and everything in between. Smartphone cameras today are brilliant, but they are also a bit predictable. Tap the shutter, let the software do the work, and you get a polished image in seconds. Nice? Absolutely. Memorable? Not always. That is why the Fujifilm Instax Mini 13 caught my attention the moment it landed on my desk. Instead of testing it myself straight away, I handed it to one of my younger colleagues at Digit and asked her to use it properly. Take it out, click with friends, try selfies, and tell me what it actually feels like to live with.

Also read: Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: One of the most complete phones you can buy, but…

What she came back with was simple: this camera is fun, a little unpredictable, and far more special than another perfect photo on a phone. Here’s the full review of the Fujifilm Instax Mini 13.

Design that instantly wins you over

The first reaction from my colleague was immediate: ‘This is so cute.’ Honestly, fair enough. Fujifilm clearly knows the audience here. The Instax Mini 13 comes in soft pastel shades and has that playful, rounded design that looks great in hand and even better on a cafe table.

Our pink unit looked charming straight out of the box. It is light, easy to hold, and doesn’t feel tiring during longer use. The grip is comfortable, the buttons are easy to reach, and the whole thing feels beginner-friendly from the first minute.

Yes, it is made of plastic, but it doesn’t feel cheap. In fact, it feels nicely put together for the price. It has enough sturdiness to feel reliable, while staying light enough to carry around for trips, birthdays, hangouts or casual days out. If you like products with personality, this one has plenty of it.

Easy to use, even if you’ve never touched a camera before

One of the best things about the Instax Mini 13 is how simple it is. There is no learning curve in the traditional sense. You turn it on, frame your shot, press the shutter, and your print pops out. That’s it.

For anyone who finds cameras intimidating, this is the complete opposite experience. There is no screen, which means no menus and no settings to tweak before every shot. It runs on AA batteries too, which may sound old-school, but it is actually convenient. You can easily buy replacements almost anywhere, and you don’t need to worry about charging cables.

The camera takes around a minute or so for the image to fully develop, and that waiting period is strangely fun. You don’t get instant gratification in the smartphone sense. Instead, you get a small moment of anticipation.

Fujifilm has also added Auto Exposure here, and this ended up being one of those features we appreciated a lot. In simple terms, you just need to understand that the Mini 13 automatically adjusts settings depending on the light around you. In real use, that means you simply pull out the camera and just click without overthinking anything. Of course, it does not get every frame perfect, but it makes the camera feel far more friendly for first-time users, if you know what I mean.

Also, because it is this simple, it is not built for people who want full manual control. Before getting this, you need to understand that this is a point-and-shoot instant camera made for memories, not for technical photography. And that is completely fine.

Photo quality: Imperfect, charming and full of character

If you are expecting smartphone-level sharpness, you are looking at the wrong product. The Instax Mini 13 does not aim for perfect photos. It aims for photos with feeling.

Without getting into the technical nitty-gritty, just know that the instant prints have that soft, nostalgic look people love. Colours often come out vibrant, especially in brighter environments. Background lights, neon signs, and party scenes can look fantastic on Instax film. There is a warmth to these photos that digital images simply don’t have.

My colleague especially liked how selfies looked. Faces were bright, skin tones looked pleasant, and the final print had that retro vibe many people actively chase with filters on Instagram.

That said, there are limitations. In some scenes, the flash can be a bit strong, which may make faces look brighter than expected. Low-light shots can also be softer or less detailed. Fine textures and tiny details are not this camera’s strength.

But here is the thing: none of that feels like a dealbreaker. In fact, some of those quirks are part of the appeal. Slight softness, unexpected lighting, imperfect framing, these are the details that make each print feel unique.

The only real learning curve: Framing

If you are coming from a smartphone, the biggest adjustment is the viewfinder. What you see while framing is not always exactly what ends up on the final print. It takes a little practice.

My colleague mentioned that some shots were slightly off-centre at first, and that is a normal part of using cameras like this. Naturally, after getting a few packs of film, you will eventually learn how to compose better and leave a bit of room around your subject.

However, selfies are easier thanks to the close-up mode and mirror on the front, though fitting three or four people into one frame can be tricky. This works best for one or two people, especially at arm’s length.

Apart from this, the new Close-up mode is another useful feature to have. Twist the lens once, and you are ready for closer selfies or tighter portraits. Again, quite handy for casual close-up selfies or photos of small objects.

There is also a built-in self-timer, and this might be one of the best additions for this generation. As the name suggests, you set the timer, place the camera down, and everyone gets into the frame. My colleague told me how she used the self-timer for a group shot because nobody wanted to be left out holding the camera.

Now, with everything out of the way, let’s get to the part that no one should ignore about the Instax Mini 13.

The catch is in the FILM COST

The Instax Mini 13 camera itself may seem reasonably priced at first, especially if you compare it with smartphones or premium cameras. But the long-term cost comes from regularly buying film. And film is not cheap.

And because of this recurring cost, it totally changes how you use the camera. You do not fire off ten shots of the same pose. You think first. You wait for the right moment. You make each click count.

For many Gen Z buyers who love the instant camera trend, the cost of film can be the biggest barrier. No doubt, the camera is fun, but owning one properly means budgeting for film packs again and again.

So yes, the initial price may look manageable, but the real spend grows over time. Still, I would not call that a reason to avoid it. It just means you should know what you are signing up for.

Also read: Asus Zenbook S14 review: Premium style at a premium price

Instax Mini 13: Final verdict

The Fujifilm Instax Mini 13 is not the most practical camera you can buy. Your phone is cheaper to run, sharper, faster, and more convenient in almost every way.

But that is also why this camera exists.

The Instax Mini 13 turns photography into something deliberate again. You click less, care more, and end up with something physical you can hold, gift, stick on a wall, or keep in a drawer for years. Trust me, that feeling is hard to replicate with photos lost somewhere in cloud storage.

Yes, film is expensive. Yes, results depend on lighting. Yes, it takes a bit of practice. But the joy this little camera brings is real.

Long story short, if you want perfect photos, use your smartphone, but if you want memories that feel special, the Instax Mini 13 is a lovely thing to own.

From the time of its inception, the Motorola Edge series has always had a certain charm, especially the ‘Pro’ variant. I love that Motorola keeps improving this lineup every year, and with the Motorola Edge 70 Pro, that evolution feels very visible. The moment you pick it up, it genuinely feels cleaner, slimmer, and more elegant. I even showed it to my teammates, and they also feel the same way. But, while the evolution is all nice and dandy, coming from the Motorola Edge 60 Pro, there are a few downgrades too, especially in the camera department. 

After spending two weeks with the Motorola Edge 70 Pro, here’s what I liked about this phone and what I didn’t. Let’s dive in.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Design

I love how this phone looks, and without even exaggerating, to whomsoever I have shown the Motorola Edge 70 Pro, they also loved the design very much. I’ve been using the Pantone tea colour variant, which has a Satin-luxe finish, and it looks elegant. It’s also quite thin too. I love the in-hand feel because it gives me a secure grip, and despite having a large display, it is very easy to use with one hand.

In terms of the dimensions, the Edge 70 Pro is just 6.99mm thin, and also very lightweight, weighing just 190 grams.

To keep the weight in check, the Motorola Edge 70 Pro has a plastic frame, there are power and volume buttons on the right side, and there’s a Motorola’s signature ‘AI Key’ on the left, which I’ll talk about in the software section.

The back of the device looks exactly like the Motorola Edge 60 Pro. The camera sensors sit on a squarish plateau with individual rungs around each sensor, giving it that signature Motorola identity. In terms of durability, the device is IP69 and IP68 certified for dust and water resistance. The phone is also MIL-STD-810H certified for that extra protection.

As for the typing experience, haptics feel tight on the Motorola Edge 70 Pro.

The Motorola Edge 70 Pro comes in 3 colour variants: Pantone Lily White, Pantone Tea (which I’ve been using) and Pantone Titan.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Display

Motorola has gone all out with the display here. It features a 6.8-inch 1.5K quad-curved Extreme AMOLED display with a 144Hz refresh rate, 10-bit colours and HDR10+ support. I can say that it is one of the best displays out there in this price segment.

The quad-curved display instantly elevates the premium feel that just looks and feels expensive. By hitting the middle-ground, it gives you the aesthetics of a curved display, while maintaining the usability of a flat panel. On top of that, there’s Corning Gorilla Glass 7i protection on the front for protection against bumps and scratches.

Watching content on the Edge 70 Pro’s display is very pleasing. I watched ‘Toaster’ on Netflix, and the experience was top-notch. Colours looked vibrant, the contrast was good, and the blacks were deep. In fact, the stereo speakers get quite loud and punchy without losing clarity, thanks to the Dolby Atmos support.

Now, Motorola claims a peak brightness of 5,200 nits, which sounds very prominent. But, as you all know, peak brightness doesn’t account for the whole panel. In that case, when we tested the brightness in the Digit Test Labs, I am happy to report that the Edge 70 Pro hit 3,080 nits in high brightness mode (HBM). 

To put it simply, the Edge 70 Pro’s display is legible inside and out, in the bright sunlight as well as in a dark room. So, brightness is not an issue here at all. Even, in the Calman colour test, it delivered an average delta E of 0.8 in the Natural profile mode. In the Colour Gamut test, it measured 99.8 per cent.

As for biometrics, the in-display optical fingerprint scanner feels plenty quick and worked well.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Performance

Motorola has upgraded the chipset on the Edge 70 Pro, moving to the MediaTek Dimensity 8500 Extreme from the previous Dimensity 8350 Extreme. My unit has 12GB LPDDR5X RAM and 256GB of UFS 4.1 storage.

In daily use, the Edge 70 Pro is snappy. App launches are instant, multitasking is seamless even with heavier apps like Google Maps, Instagram, and Google Chrome running in the background. The jump to UFS 4.1 makes a noticeable difference in file transfers and app installations. It’s also good to see more and more mid-range phone starting to feature UFS 4.1 storage as standard, which makes it really hard to justify a flagship phone these days, especially in terms of raw performance. 

As for the benchmarks, the Motorola Edge 70 Pro showed great numbers. In Antutu, it scored 2.17 million. Geekbench scores are 1,739 in single-core and 6,864 in multi-core, which is pretty decent for the price. The 3DMark Wildlife Extreme test showed good results with an average score of 4,462. And finally, in the CPU throttling test, the CPU was throttled to 84 per cent.

The solid benchmarks performance reflects in gaming too. Of course, the Motorola Edge 70 Pro is not a gaming phone, in my test, it could run BGMI with ultimate ease. I was seeing a stable 120fps performance. Same goes with COD: Mobile. In this game as well, you can play up to 120fps with consistent frame rates.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Cameras

Up until this point, I have told you how Motorola has upgraded everything on the Edge 70 Pro from design to performance to battery, but not the camera. 

The Edge 70 Pro has a triple camera setup, featuring a 50MP main Sony LYTIA 710, a 50MP Ultra-wide lens and a 3-in-1 light sensor.

As expected from Motorola’s image processing, images from the main camera have more contrast, green looks greener, and blue has more blue in it. However, the photos exhibit good details. HDR also works great, for the most part, as in tricky lighting, if the phone is not able to process correctly, shadows or the dark areas in the scene look crushed.

Portrait mode relies on the main sensor since there’s no dedicated telephoto lens. The results are actually quite good, with nice background blur and reliable edge detection. However, the camera does tend to brighten up the scene sometimes.

The ultra-wide camera is genuinely impressive. It’s one of the best in this segment. Images are detailed, colours are mostly accurate, and the field of view is noticeably wide.

On the front, there’s a 50MP AF selfie camera that clicks sharp photos with accurate colour tones. Even portrait selfies come out well.

In terms of video, the Edge 70 Pro can shoot up to 4K at 30fps, and the output is decent. There is one cool feature, called ‘Horizon Lock’, where you can rotate your phone 360 degrees and the video output will remain stable throughout.

For those who don’t know, while the Horizon Lock video feature has gone mainstream thanks to the Galaxy S26 series, it’s been a mainstay on Motorola phones for a while.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Software

Software has always been a strong point for Motorola and that legacy continues with the Edge 70 Pro as well. The device runs on Android 16 with a clean Hello UI, giving you a near-stock Android experience. There is also no Bloatware except for one Adobe scan app that comes pre-loaded. If you don’t need it, you can always uninstall.

Motorola still gives you the Moto AI button on the left side of the phone, but again it is not customisable. You can press and hold to open Moto AI, and you can double-press it to ‘Update me’ or ‘Take notes’.

In terms of UI, it is very fluid, the animations look clean and polished, and this is one of the neatest UI implementations out there in the market.

In terms of software updates, Motorola is promising 3 years of Android updates and 5 years of security patches. I wish they could give users at least 4 years of Android updates, but it is what it is.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Battery

The Motorola Edge 70 Pro has a 6,500mAh silicon carbon battery, a slight upgrade over the 6,000mAh unit in the previous generation without adding extra bulk, and it shows.

I didn’t charge this phone for an entire day, under normal usage, including Instagram, Spotify, Chrome, and watching content on YouTube, with the screen set to Hyper smooth (144Hz) all day. By the end of the day, the phone still had juice left to last throughout the night, and then some more, the next day.

In terms of charging, the Edge 70 Pro supports 90W fast charging, and it goes from 0 to 100 per cent in 65 minutes. Unlike its predecessor, there is no Wireless charging here.

Motorola Edge 70 Pro review: Verdict

The Motorola Edge 70 Pro gets almost everything right, and this time, there’s really just one clear compromise or two, if you also factor in the omission of wireless charging.

The Edge 70 Pro brings a stunning design that feels premium in every sense, one of the best displays in the segment, strong and reliable performance, clean near-stock software, and excellent battery life that genuinely lasts. This is a very well-rounded, polished smartphone that delivers in almost every department.

The only real downgrade comes in the camera department, especially when you compare it to the Motorola Edge 60 Pro. While the cameras are still good and usable, they don’t quite match the expectations set by its predecessor.

So the decision is straightforward, if cameras are not your absolute top priority, the Edge 70 Pro is an easy recommendation. Apart from that, this is easily one of the most complete phones you can buy right now, especially considering that it doesn’t cost a bomb.

It is not every day that you get to see a laptop that blends style with substance. There are plenty of options in the market that look good. And then there are plenty of options that perform beyond expectations but don’t focus much on looks. But the Asus Zenbook S14 hits the sweet spot in both respects. The laptop is just 11.9 mm thick and weighs only 1.2 kilograms. But don’t let the size fool you, as the machine is also powered by the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H chipset. 

I have been using the Asus Zenbook S14 as my daily driver for more than a week, and with that huge price tag, it might not be for everyone. But, for those who are looking for a top-tier design, a gorgeous display and great performance, this could bring a lot to the table. 

Without further ado, let’s find out what exactly the Asus Zenbook S14 has in store. Here’s my full review.

Asus Zenbook S14: Design and build

When you’re spending this kind of money on a laptop, design isn’t just something that you can ignore. It is expected to impress, and the Asus Zenbook S14 gets that right from the start.

Even before you see the laptop, the packaging sets the tone. It’s clean, compact, and a reflection of what lies inside. And when you finally lift the lid of this box, the real deal appears. 

The Asus Zenbook S14 is one of those devices that makes you go wow the moment you take it out of the box. My first words when I looked at the laptop were ‘Hello, gorgeous.’ Because honestly, it really is. The overall look is refined, the texture on the lid is subtle yet noticeable, and the Antrim Grey colour gives it a very business-like look. Nothing about the laptop is loud or flashy, yet it will definitely turn heads when you walk into a business meeting. 

And then there’s the Asus Zenbook branding. It sits firmly right in the centre and doesn’t try too hard to get noticed. Which honestly fits the whole vibe of this laptop perfectly. After all, less is more, right?

The build quality here is top-notch, which is again something you would expect from a Rs 2.5 lakh laptop. Asus is using what it calls a Ceraluminum chassis here, which aims to combine the lightness of aluminium with the durability of ceramic. What you get as a result is a surface that is resistant to scratches and smudges. During my usage, I didn’t see any fingerprints form upon the chassis even when I was typing continuously for hours. I also remember accidentally placing the laptop in the same pocket as my home keys in my bag. But when I took it out, there were no scratches found. 

And one of the major highlights here is the weight and slim form factor. The laptop is just about 1.1 cm thin and weighs roughly 1.2 kilos. You can just slip this into your bag and forget it’s even there. I certainly did. 

The only complaint, and I am really nitpicking here, is that when you open the laptop hurriedly with one finger, in a hurry, the bottom part lifts. So, most times, I did need to use both my hands to open the machine. Either it’s the problem of the hinge here, or it has to do something with the weight distribution, but this is kind of annoying. 

Asus Zenbook S14: Display 

Lifting the lid, you get a beautiful 14-inch 3K OLED panel all set to display your content. I watched videos, played some casual games, and the display didn't disappoint at any point. And for my day to day tasks, the 120Hz refresh rate kept things snappy and smooth. 

In terms of colour accuracy as well, the display is spot on as it comes with 100 per cent sRGB and DCI P3 colour space coverage. So, if you’re someone who deals with visual content a lot, this is a reliable display. 

It is also quite bright at a peak brightness of 1,100 nits. I used the laptop in various light settings without any major hiccups. However, one thing that did bother me was the reflections, which are a common issue in glossy OLED displays. Also, this is a touchscreen display on the Zenbook S14, which is something I didn’t find myself using much. And since the display gathers fingerprints and smudges quite easily, I just stuck to using the trackpad and keyboard most of the time. 

Asus Zenbook S14: Keyboard, trackpad and speakers 

Now, once you actually start using any laptop, the keyboard is something you interact with a lot. And the Zenbook S14 comes with a keyboard that checks all boxes. The keys are well spaced, have a decent amount of travel, and are super comfortable to type on. However, I do feel a fingerprint sensor should’ve made the cut. For a laptop, at this price point, it’s not only a nice addition but also a necessary one. 

As for the feel and build of the keyboard, the keys here come quite close to what you get on a MacBook, even though the design itself is different. You also get a clean backlight here, which helps if you’re working late at night. And it’s actually quite bright. I could clearly see it even while sitting at my desk during the day. 

Below the keyboard is the trackpad, which is just the right size for casual use. Coming from a MacBook Air 15, I definitely am used to a much larger trackpad, but the one on the Zenbook S14 also didn’t feel adequate. However, the clicks here feel fine, but not premium, as this isn’t a haptic trackpad. 

Coming to the speakers, you get a quad setup with Dolby Atmos. They do get loud, no doubt about that. But the clarity is not quite there. The sound feels a bit flat, especially when you’re watching movies or gaming. Basically, if you really care about audio quality, you’ll probably end up using headphones most of the time.

Asus Zenbook S14: Ports and other features

For a laptop this thin, the port selection is actually quite solid on the Asus Zenbook S14.

You get a USB Type-A port, two Thunderbolt 4 ports, an HDMI 2.1 port, and a headphone jack. In my usage, these ports were just enough. You also get Windows facial recognition, and this works really well. It’s fast, accurate, and unlocks the laptop almost instantly. 

The front camera is just about decent and gets the job done for video calls. But at this price, I expected better. When I turned on background blur, the edge detection wasn’t perfect. My hair kept blending into the background. Moreover, there is some noise that you see in the picture quality the moment you turn the camera on. 

Asus Zenbook S14: Everyday performance and benchmarks 

On to perhaps the most important factor in any laptop: performance.

My unit of the Asus Zenbook S14 is powered by the Intel Core Ultra 9 386H processor, paired with 32GB RAM. And simply put, this combination is fast. Really fast. 

There are instant app launches, multitasking is smooth, and even with multiple apps running together, the laptop doesn’t slow down.

And this real-world performance is backed by some strong benchmarking numbers.

Now this is not a gaming laptop. But being an avid gamer, I did try some gaming on this, and I wasn’t disappointed. Lighter titles like Overcooked 2 and Phasmophobia ran smoothly without any issues. I even tried pushing it with heavier games like Forza Horizon 5 and Doom: The Dark Ages. And surprisingly, with slightly lower graphics settings, they were playable. 

But of course, if you absolutely give it the beans, the integrated GPU starts showing its limits. So yes, you can game on this laptop. But it’s more of a bonus, not the main purpose.

Asus Zenbook S14: Battery and thermals

As it is with Zenbooks, the strongest point here is once again, the battery life. In the PC Mark battery test, the laptop lasted for a whopping 14 hours. And this is when it was set to the best performance mode. When I set the laptop to the best power efficiency mode, it lasted a full 18 hours, which is again commendable. 

So, the battery life here is not just reliable, but excellent. You don’t need to panic if you forget your charger on one of those crazy Monday mornings. 

Thermals are also well managed here. There are vents along the chassis that help push heat out, and they seem to be doing their job well. The fans do kick in, but you won’t hear any noise out of them. 

During normal usage, the laptop stays cool. And even when I pushed it with benchmarks and heavier tasks, it only got slightly warm, nothing uncomfortable.

Asus Zenbook S14: Should you buy?

So, the Asus Zenbook S14 is a laptop that gets a lot of things right. It looks like it was built for business, is super convenient to carry around, and comes with a strong performance. The battery life and display are top-notch, and the overall experience is extremely polished. But at this price point, you do start noticing the small things.

There is no haptic touchpad, no fingerprint sensor, and the speakers and camera are average. 

That said, if you have the budget and want a sleek and powerful laptop that can run a few games as well, the Asus Zenbook S14 is a great choice. 

Also read: Asus launches the Expertbook Ultra laptop in India: All details

Status quo works in the tech industry, but sometimes a brand comes that dares to break the norm. Right from its debut last year, Lumio was that for the Indian TV market. It had a strong, well-thought-out product with reliable performance and several fresh ideas. Its Mini LED offering won the best buy award at the Digit Zero 1 awards 2025. So, when the brand sent us the successor, named the same, Lumio Vision 9, there was genuine curiosity, obviously. This year’s model brings several iterative but meaningful upgrades. You get a bigger 65-inch QD Mini LED panel, a big jump in gaming capability with native 4K 144Hz refresh rate and 240Hz at 1080P, a stronger focus on software usability with features like TLDR 2.0 and Project Neo (still in development), and a bump in audio with dual subwoofers and a lot more. 

The Lumio Vision 9 price in India is set at Rs 72,999 for the 65-inch variant, effectively around Rs 64,999 with offers, and a 55-inch model is expected to sit lower in the range. We received the former for review, and on paper, it looks like Lumio has addressed most of the gaps from last year. The real question I will answer here is whether those changes show up in actual use.

I began testing the Lumio Vision 9 with intrigue and interest. That stayed through most of the experience, and the title already gives away the direction, but a TV is more than what a line can hold.

Lumio Vision 9 review: Verdict

The Lumio Vision 9 (2026) improves where it matters: better contrast, smoother gaming, and fast Google TV performance. It is easy to use and well-rounded for daily viewing. However, HDR, especially blacks and colour tuning, still needs refinement, and some software features are still to be released. For the asking price, it offers solid value, but it is not the most polished option yet.

Lumio Vision 9: Audiovisual experience

This year, Lumio offers the Vision 9 in a 65-inch screen that is large and immersive with sharp and detailed 4K visuals. The underlying technology is an EVA (enhanced VA) panel with QD Mini LED backlighting, and the brand claims a deeper native contrast of 7000:1, more controlled local dimming and a wider colour gamut than last year’s IPS screen.

The panel is decently bright with discernible highlights. In our tests with Vivid mode on, the typical brightness came in at around 451 nits, which is strong for most everyday viewing, even in decently lit rooms. In scenes from Mission Impossible: The Final Reckoning with mixed lighting, the TV does a good job of retaining detail across the frame. In the same movie, while Tom Cruise is inside the submarine, there are a lot of flashing lights, reflections and water splashes, all of which were clear and comprehensible.

On the other hand, the black levels ranged around 0.03 nits. So, blacks look inky. However, the HDR performance was a little hit and miss. In the night scenes of The Revenant, the black levels were agreeable. A little too dark, but no artefacts. The light torches didn't bloom a lot, and Leonardo DiCaprio's transition from a pitch-dark forest to light looked fine.

Meantime, in the extremely dark scenes involving the submarine in Mission Impossible: The Final Reckoning, there was no noticeable separation between dark and bright elements. I was watching this in movie HDR mode with the preset picture settings. Manually tweaking some of these settings, like HDR, Gamma and local dimming, can make things more legible.

In the same movie, the underwater blues weren't the same as our reference device. Well, it was a different shade of blue and didn't spoil the overall immersiveness.

The Lumio Vision 9 is capable of covering 94.5% of UHDA-P3 HDR gamut, and for SDR, there is 99% coverage of BT709 gamut. In other words, the panel can reproduce both standard and high dynamic range content without obvious limitations in colour space. So, it's a matter of processing and tweaking. Skin tones can help me make the point: Lumio leans slightly pink. Not accurate, but pleasing, which is acceptable at this price.

Rest, I didn't have any problem with viewing angles. I did notice reflections in some cases, but manageable. Motion handling is acceptable in sports and games. As always, I keep motion smoothing off.

In terms of gaming, the Lumio Vision 9 is a clear upgrade over the 2025 edition, which was limited to a 60Hz panel. This time, you get a full 144Hz panel with support for up to 240Hz at 1080p, along with HDMI 2.1, VRR, and ALLM. Input lag is around 9.7ms, which is low enough to feel instant. While this is promising and an improvement in responsiveness is noticeable, my complaint with the colours continues. We played titles like Ghost of Yotei, and found the colours were dull, and the details weren't enough.

Audio is also an area that sees a clear upgrade. From a 24W system last year, the Vision 9 (2026) moves to a 50W hexa-driver setup with dual subwoofers, 10x larger enclosure, Dolby Atmos support and a claimed bass extension up to 38Hz at 70dB. In effect, this means dialogues come out clearly, the bass has ample presence, and the overall sound is loud and feels fuller. I find it to be sufficient for everyday use.

Also Read: Lumio Vision 9 (2025) review

Software is still fast, now more interesting

Software was already a strength for Lumio, and that continues. The Vision 9 runs Google TV based on Android 14, and under the hood, you get a MediaTek Pentonic 700 chipset with 3GB of RAM and 64GB of flash storage. The latter is said to be 50% faster than what was in the predecessor. In daily use, the experience is decently smooth in terms of boot, app opening times, and overall navigation. No major hiccup or lag.

But what got my attention is the updated TLDR app with new Movies and Shows tabs, and an experimental and yet-to-be-launched feature called Project Neo. You can read what I think about these software goodies here, but simply put, they help in content discovery. And if anything helps me quickly find what to watch before I start having my dinner daily, it gets my love.

With Project Neo, the ambition is to use everyday messaging apps like WhatsApp or Instagram as a connecting interface between your phone and TV. For example, you send a link, a reel, or even a normal text query through the TLDR bot in these messaging apps, and the TV surfaces that or related content, including where to watch the full version.

I witnessed the closed-room demo, wherein it worked with negligible friction. It removed the need to type on a TV keyboard, which is still one of the most frustrating parts of using a smart TV. But I hold off my excitement till the time I try it myself.

All in all, I appreciate what Lumio is doing in the software space.

Neat and practical design

The design remains clean and functional. I had some trouble installing its feet, which stand diagonally. The Lumio Vision 9 is rather light. So, setting it up is easy.

Mounted on a table, it looks neat. The bezels are slim, the build is mostly polycarbonate, feels solid enough, and the metal stand provides good stability.

On the back, it has a practical selection of ports: three HDMI ports (two of which are full-bandwidth 2.1 ones, and one has eARC support), USB 3.0 ports (with ExFAT support), a Satellite port to connect DD Free Dish and standard connectivity options. The ability to connect to the Doordarshan dish TV and access up to 540 free channels. So, some thoughtful additions on the back of the TV. Also, that side-facing layout makes the TV's wall mounting easier. Again, a small but important detail.

The remote is longer than the one that came in with Lumio Vision 7 (2025), but still comfortable to use. The button layout is logical, and the dedicated TLDR button is a useful addition. There are common OTT apps, except for JioHotstar. But that's okay.

Lumio Vision 9: Should you buy it?

At its current effective price of around Rs 65,000 for the 65-inch model, the Lumio Vision 9 (2026) makes a strong case for itself, but it is not a ‘one-size-fits-all’ recommendation.

Compared to the 2025 model, this Vision 9 has several meaningful improvements. The shift to a QD-Mini LED-based enhanced VA panel brings better blacks and depth. Gaming sees a major upgrade with 144Hz support, VRR, and low input lag. Audio is noticeably fuller and more usable out of the box. Software remains fast, and features like TLDR and Project Neo show that Lumio is thinking beyond just hardware.

Lumio claims this to be the fastest Google TV, and in daily use, it largely holds up. Navigation is smooth, apps open quickly, and most features work with minimal friction. For most users, this matters in their daily TV consumption.

At the same time, there are some inconsistencies with HDR performance and colour tuning. Even on the software side, while the direction is promising, features like Project Neo are not fully available yet.

So, if you want a TV that is easy to live with, handles a mix of movies, gaming, and daily content without much lag or hiccups, and offers good overall value at around Rs 70,000, the Lumio Vision 9 (2026) is a sensible choice. It gets the basics right and has improved on last year in several areas that matter. And I figure it could have been of more value with another round of refinement in HDR and colours.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Hisense U7Q Mini LED TV review: Practical option under Rs 70,000 with fair trade-offs

The AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 is an unusual halo desktop CPU, not because it adds more cores, but because it doubles down on what has made AMD’s X3D chips so interesting in the first place: stacked cache. Thanks to CoWoS! This is the first desktop processor to place second-generation 3D V-Cache on both Zen 5 CCDs, giving it 16 cores, 32 threads, and 208 MB of total cache on the AM5 platform. With the previous X3D SKUs, the story was all about gaming, but this time around AMD is talking about the processor more as a top-end chip for developers, creators, and other latency-sensitive workloads that can benefit from a very large on-chip memory pool. Is there a tradeoff? Well, of course there is. Compared with the standard Ryzen 9 9950X3D, the 9950X3D2 carries more cache and a higher 200W TDP, but a slightly lower maximum boost clock of 5.6 GHz. That’s just 100 MHz lower. While AMD hasn’t disclosed the price, we’re seeing market prices of approximately Rs 98,499 which is quite ridiculous when you know that the AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D goes for Rs 71,500. So, is it worth it? Does the extra cache make that much of a difference? Let’s find out.

AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 Specifications

The Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 is built around AMD’s Zen 5 architecture and arrives with 16 cores and 32 threads, a 4.3 GHz base clock, and boost speeds of up to 5.6 GHz. Its hero feature is cache capacity: 16 MB of L2 cache and 192 MB of L3 cache, for a total of 208 MB. That is substantially higher than the standard Ryzen 9 9950X3D, which carries 144 MB total cache, which in itself is ridiculously higher than the Ryzen 9 9950 with 80 MB of L2 and L3 combined cache. AMD’s second-generation 3D V-Cache design now sits below the cores rather than above them, which the company says improves thermal resistance by allowing the cores more direct contact with the cooler.
Power limits are also pushed up. The chip carries a 200 W TDP, a 270 W default socket power limit (PPT), 250 A EDC, and 180 A TDC, with a maximum junction temperature of 95 degrees Celsius. AMD recommends a 360 mm liquid cooler, and that feels entirely appropriate for a processor operating in this class. The platform remains familiar otherwise: Socket AM5 support, DDR5 memory, EXPO readiness, and a claimed drop-in upgrade path for existing AM5 users with the right BIOS. One important nuance is that this part is not really chasing higher gaming clocks than the regular 9950X3D. Instead, it is using its dual stacked-cache layout to widen its appeal in rendering, simulation, compilation, and creator workloads where extra on-chip memory can reduce latency penalties and improve throughput in specific applications.

Test Rig

The test bench pairs the Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 with NVIDIA’s GeForce RTX 5090, ensuring the graphics card is not the limiting factor in most CPU-focused tests. Supporting hardware includes MSI’s MEG X870E ACE MAX motherboard, 32 GB of G.Skill Trident Z5 Neo DDR5-6000 memory in a 2x 16 GB configuration, and Samsung’s 9100 Pro NVMe SSD. Cooling is handled by the NZXT Kraken Elite 360 RGB, while a Seasonic Focus Gold 850W PSU powers the system.
This is a suitably high-end platform for a processor of this class, and it also aligns closely with AMD’s own recommendation of DDR5-6000 memory and a 360 mm liquid cooler for best results and stable behaviour.

AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D Performance

Cinebench 2024

Cinebench 2024 is based on Maxon's Cinema 4D software, designed to evaluate a processor's performance in rendering complex 3D scenes. It tests both single-core and multi-core capabilities, highlighting how efficiently a CPU handles multi-threaded tasks common in professional rendering workflows. The benchmark utilizes modern instruction sets and large datasets, providing an up-to-date assessment of CPU performance in contemporary applications.

Cinebench R23

Cinebench R23 is the older version based on the same Cinema 4D engine and it too measures a processor's ability to render photorealistic 3D scenes. Though replaced by Cinebench 2024, we retain it to compare against processors launched a few years prior. It also focuses on both single-threaded and multi-threaded performance, simulating real-world tasks relevant to content creators and professionals in 3D rendering.

Blender

The Blender Benchmark assesses a processor's performance by rendering scenes using Blender, a popular open-source 3D creation suite. It evaluates both CPU and GPU capabilities in handling complex rendering tasks. This benchmark provides insights into how well a processor performs in real-world 3D modeling, animation, and rendering scenarios. An interesting aspect is that it highlights the efficiency of different CPU architectures in multi-threaded workloads, as Blender can effectively utilize multiple cores. It's particularly useful for professionals and enthusiasts relying on Blender, indicating how hardware upgrades might impact workflow efficiency and rendering times.

V-Ray

V-Ray is another benchmark that measures a processor's performance in rendering but it uses the V-Ray engine, widely used in visual effects, architecture, and design industries. It tests both CPU and GPU rendering capabilities, focusing on multi-threaded performance and handling complex calculations involved in ray tracing. CPUs with higher core counts and multi-threading technology tend to excel here as V-Ray efficiently utilises available threads.

WinRAR

WinRAR Benchmark evaluates a processor's performance in data compression and decompression tasks, common in file archiving and management. It tests single-threaded performance, memory bandwidth, and latency, as these factors influence compression speed. While WinRAR isn't fully optimized for multi-core CPUs, processors with higher Instructions Per Cycle (IPC) and clock speeds perform better. For more modern algorithms, we use 7-Zip.

AIDA64

AIDA64 Memory Benchmark measures the memory bandwidth and latency of a system, highlighting how quickly data transfers between the CPU and RAM. It tests read, write, and copy speeds, providing insights into the efficiency of the memory subsystem, including RAM speed, timings, and memory controller performance. AIDA64 also has benchmarks to evaluate how well a processor can handle AES, ZLib and SHA3 encryption and decryption tasks.

y-cruncher

The y-cruncher benchmark computes mathematical constants like Pi to a high number of digits—in this case, 2.5 billion—testing a processor's multi-threaded performance and memory subsystem under heavy computational load. It stresses the CPU's integer and floating-point units, cache hierarchy, and memory bandwidth. It's particularly useful for evaluating system stability under sustained heavy workloads, making it valuable for users who are overclocking their systems.

Procyon Office

The Procyon Office Benchmark measures a processor's performance in real-world office applications like the Microsoft Office suite, testing tasks such as document editing, spreadsheet calculations, and presentation creation. It focuses on both single-threaded and multi-threaded performance, providing insights into how a CPU handles everyday productivity tasks.

Mozilla Kraken

Mozilla Kraken is a JavaScript benchmarks evaluating a processor's performance in executing complex web-based scripts, reflecting real-world web application usage. It tests single-threaded performance and the efficiency of a CPU's instruction pipelines in handling dynamic scripting languages.

Procyon AI Computer Vision

The UL Procyon AI Computer Vision benchmark measures the performance of AI inference engines to understand how well processors can handle machine-vision tasks using popular neural networks.

3DMark Time Spy (iGPU)

3DMark Time Spy is a DirectX 12 benchmark evaluating graphics performance. We use it primarily to test the relative performance of the iGPU to discrete GPUs and where iGPUs stand amongst their peers. With both companies improving their integrated graphics stack, it allows us to measure how well the iGPU performs and if it can handle popular eSports titles.

7 Game Average

While 3DMark is an excellent synthetic benchmark, it's not really indicative of real-world gaming performance and that's why we have to rely on popular AAA video games to assess how well the processor deals with contemporary video game engines. We revise the video games once every two years based on what's most popular as per Steam and we also maintain a mix between different game engines.

Core to Core Latency - AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D

Core-to-Core Latency measures the time it takes for data to transfer between different cores within a CPU. It highlights the efficiency of the processor's inter-core communication pathways and cache coherency mechanisms. An interesting insight is that lower core-to-core latency can improve performance in multi-threaded applications where threads need to synchronize or share data frequently. It can reveal architectural differences between CPUs, such as the impact of chiplet designs versus monolithic die layouts, affecting inter-core communication efficiency.

The AMD Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 has the same 16 Cores with two CCDs as the older 9950X3D and we can see that within the CCD, the latency for core-to-core communication is around 18-25 nanoseconds. And when switching to cores on the other CCD, the latency climbs into the range of 85-91 nanoseconds. This is slight drop compared to the 9950X3D. The Median latency was 81 nanoseconds with the 9950X3D and that's increased to 86 nanoseconds. It's still an improvement over the older gen processors wherein the communication between CCDs would incur a larger penalty.

Thermals and power

For such a cache-heavy, high-power desktop CPU, the Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 appears surprisingly well-behaved in this configuration. The recorded average CPU package temperature of 36 degrees Celsius suggests that the NZXT 360 mm cooler is doing its job comfortably under sustained mixed load conditions. Even the peak temperature of 90 degrees Celsius remains well within AMD’s specified thermal ceiling of 95 degrees Celsius, leaving some headroom rather than pushing the silicon to the brink.

That matters, because this is a 200 W-class processor designed for serious all-core work, not just short gaming bursts. Power draw tells the more revealing story. An average package power of 230 W and a peak of 250 W make it clear that this chip is happy to consume substantial power when fully unleashed, which tracks with AMD’s 270 W PPT figure. In practical terms, the 9950X3D2 is not pretending to be an efficiency-first flagship.

It is a performance-first desktop processor that asks for strong cooling, a solid motherboard VRM, and a properly specced PSU. The good news is that, in return, thermal behaviour appears controlled rather than unruly, which is exactly what one would hope for from a top-end AM5 part.

Verdict

The Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 looks like AMD taking the X3D idea to its logical extreme on AM5. By putting second-generation 3D V-Cache on both CCDs, AMD has created a part that is clearly aimed at buyers who want more than just top-tier gaming. This processor is meant for serious desktop users working across rendering, compiling, simulation, AI-adjacent workloads, and content creation, while still retaining the strong gaming DNA associated with the X3D family. On paper, the gains over the existing 9950X3D are not universal, but the expanded cache and more aggressive power envelope do give it a more specialised and more ambitious identity.
That said, this is also a CPU that needs the right context. Its 200 W TDP and high package power figures mean it belongs in an uncompromising desktop build, not in a value-focused or modestly cooled setup. The slight dip in maximum boost clock versus the regular 9950X3D also makes it clear that AMD is prioritising cache-rich workload behaviour over headline frequency. Taken as a whole, the Ryzen 9 9950X3D2 feels less like a mainstream recommendation and more like a statement product. For the right workload mix, it could be one of AM5’s most interesting processors yet.

Is it just me, or is it the fact that the mid-range smartphone market in India is getting more competitive by each passing day? Despite the rising costs of components, demand for new phones is high, but picking the right one can feel overwhelming. For all it matters, every few weeks, there is a new device that shows up promising the best camera, the longest battery life or the smoothest performance, all under an attractive budget. Vivo has been a consistent player in this space, and its latest offering, the V70 FE, is looking to make a strong case for itself. It comes with a 200MP camera, a massive 7,000mAh battery, and a unique glowing back that gives it a personality of its own.

But does it actually deliver where it matters? I used the Vivo V70 FE as my daily driver for a few weeks to find out. Here is my full review.

Vivo V70 FE: Build and design

Pick up the Vivo V70 FE, and it may shrug you off as a regular mid-range phone. However, look closely, and you see the subtle glowing lines on the back panel that become more visible in the dark. There’s a caveat though, because this only happens after the phone is exposed to a strong light source. The effect feels similar to the glow-in-the-dark stickers many of us had in childhood. So, basically, you charge them under light, and they light up once the lights go off. It’s a playful touch that adds character without feeling overdone.

The Vivo V70 FE comes in two colour options: Northern Lights Purple and Monsoon Blue, both featuring matte finishes. I got the Northern Lights Purple variant for the review, and this is the colour that comes with all the bells and whistles I just mentioned. 

Overall, the V70 FE follows a minimalist design language with a flat frame. It is comfortable to hold, with flat edges that provide a secure grip during daily use. That said, the use of a plastic back and frame means it does not quite feel as premium as some competitors, even though the finish does a good job of masking that.

The back panel houses a vertically aligned camera module that looks clean but does introduce a slight wobble when placed on a flat surface. But I don't think that would be a problem.

So, while the materials are fairly standard for the segment, the Vivo V70 FE manages to stand out with its glowing lines effect.

Vivo V70 FE: Display

The Vivo V70 FE comes with a 6.83-inch 1.5K OLED panel with a 120Hz refresh rate, 2800 × 1260 resolution and a claimed peak brightness of up to 1,900 nits.

I tested the V70 FE’s display using Calman and the SpectraCal C6 Colourimeter, and it is tuned for 100 per cent sRGB gamut coverage. In simple terms, this means the screen can show all the colours it is supposed to. The colour accuracy is good, but not perfect, as the display recorded an average DeltaE of 2.7. This is close to the point where colour differences start becoming noticeable. To the average viewer, colours will look mostly correct, but a trained eye will spot that colours are a bit off. That said, for everyday use like scrolling through social media, watching videos, or viewing photos, the display holds up well and colours look natural enough for most people.

In our lux meter test, the display reached 1,956 nits in high brightness mode (HBM). This is very close to the company’s claim and ensures good visibility even under bright sunlight.

So, while the Vivo V70 FE’s display might not top the charts for absolute technical perfection, it remains a good panel that will satisfy almost any user.

Vivo V70 FE: Performance

The Vivo V70 FE is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 7360 Turbo chip based on 4nm architecture and is paired with up to 12GB LPDDR5 RAM and 256GB UFS 3.1 storage. We received the mid-variant for testing, with 8GB RAM and 256GB storage, priced at Rs 40,999.

In day-to-day use, the V70 FE holds up quite well. Routine tasks such as texting, scrolling through Instagram, watching YouTube videos and switching between apps feel smooth and responsive. I did not encounter any noticeable lag during regular usage, and the overall experience remains consistent for most everyday scenarios.

For those interested in benchmarks, the V70 FE does fall behind some competitors in its price range. It scored 9,61,227 on Antutu, along with 976 in Geekbench’s single-core test and 2,953 in the multi-core test. For context, the OnePlus Nord 6 (review), which was recently launched in a similar price bracket, achieved really high scores, with 24,35,837 on Antutu, 2,087 in Geekbench single-core, and 6,689 in multi-core tests.

On the software front, the Vivo V70 FE runs OriginOS 6 based on Android 16. The company has promised up to four years of OS updates along with six years of security patches.

In short, the Vivo V70 FE delivers a reliable performance experience that should meet the needs of everyday users. However, it may not compete with the top performers in its segment when it comes to raw benchmark numbers.

Vivo V70 FE: Camera

The Vivo V70 FE sports a dual camera setup on the back, which is led by a 200MP main camera. It supports features like AI 30x SuperZoom, multifocal portrait modes, and motion capture enhancements. The main camera is accompanied by an 8MP ultra-wide camera. On the front, there is a 50MP camera for selfies and video calls.

In bright daylight, the main camera delivers sharp and detailed images with pleasing colours. The dynamic range is well handled, maintaining a good balance between highlights and shadows. There is a slight boost in contrast, but it does not feel overdone and instead gives photos a punchy, social media-friendly look. 

Portrait shots are generally good. However, edge detection is not always consistent, especially around hair and finer details, making it a bit of a hit or miss in some scenarios. On the front, the 50MP selfie camera performs well, capturing sharp images with good skin tones and detail. 

Low-light performance is a pleasant surprise. Images turn out bright and fairly clean, with noise kept under control. Colours remain natural even in challenging lighting conditions.

Overall, the Vivo V70 FE delivers a good camera experience. While there are some inconsistencies, especially with edge detection, the overall output should be more than satisfactory for most users.

Vivo V70 FE: Battery

The Vivo V70 FE packs a massive 7,000mAh battery and supports 90W fast wired charging. With a battery this large, endurance is easily one of the phone’s top strengths. On a full charge, the phone can comfortably last over two days with light to moderate usage. Even with heavy use, it easily gets through a full day without making you worry about plugging it in.

In the PCMark battery test, the device managed to last around 27 hours, which is an impressive result for this segment. Using the bundled 90W charger, the phone takes roughly 1 hour and 13 minutes to go from 0 to 100 per cent, which feels reasonable given the battery size.

In real-world usage, the efficiency is just as noticeable. The battery dropped by only about 3 per cent after 30 minutes of video streaming. Even with more demanding tasks like using Google Maps for navigation, the drain remains minimal, with around a 3 per cent drop after an hour.

So, the Vivo V70 FE stands out as a battery powerhouse. If long-lasting battery life is a priority, this is easily one of the most dependable options in its segment.

Vivo V70 FE: Verdict

The Vivo V70 FE is a phone built for users who want a reliable everyday experience without overthinking it. Its biggest strength is easily the battery life. A 7,000mAh unit that lasts over two days and still charges to full in just over an hour is hard to argue with. The display is bright and smooth, and the camera setup does a good job in most situations. The glowing lines on the back also give it a fun, distinctive look that helps it stand out from the crowd.

That said, the phone is not without its shortcomings. The Dimensity 7360 Turbo chip lags behind some competitors in raw performance, and edge detection in portrait mode photos can be hit or miss.

But if long battery life, a vibrant display, a design that turns heads and an overall capable camera for the price, are what you are after, the Vivo V70 FE makes quite a strong case for itself.

There is a certain pattern you begin to notice when you use enough phones in the sub Rs 35,000 segment. On paper, almost everything looks similar and sorted, as almost each one of them comes with bigger batteries, high refresh rate displays, multiple cameras, and numbers that try to sound impressive. However, the real story begins when you take the phone out of that controlled setup and start living with it. Not testing it just for a few hours, but actually using it as your own phone through the day. That is exactly what I did with the Realme 16 5G, which is priced in India starting at Rs 31,999. 

I’ve been using the Realme 16 as my primary device for a few weeks now. I’ve used it for everything. I use it for Instagram, for watching YouTube and OTT, taking voice/video calls, gaming, and clicking photos. Basically, I have used it the way most people would, with no switching back to a secondary phone and no avoiding weak areas, just regular day-to-day usage. While the Realme 16 5G tries hard to present itself as a well-rounded device, the longer I spent with it, the more its compromises began to show in ways that are hard to ignore. 

Here’s my full review of the Realme 16 5G. 

Realme 16 5G design: Looks that try too hard

While everything may look good on paper, the first thing you notice when unboxing a device is its design and build, and that was exactly my experience. As soon as I took the Realme 16 out of the box and held it in my hand, it felt light, easy to grip, and not bulky at all. In those first few minutes, it gave me the impression that Realme has done a decent job here, with an intent to deliver a slightly premium feel the moment you pick up the phone.

However, as you continue using the device, small issues begin to surface. The back panel, which appears to be made of polycarbonate with a matte finish, does a good job of resisting fingerprints, which is a plus. It does not pick up smudges easily, and that helps it look clean at a glance. But dust is a completely different story.

I tested the black variant of the Realme 16, and the area around the camera module is where things start to fall apart. It attracts dust almost instantly, and the dust is quite stubborn. No matter how many times you wipe it, it starts looking messy again within minutes. Over time, this becomes frustrating because the phone never really appears clean, especially around the camera section.

From a durability standpoint, the phone feels decent but not reassuring. The lightweight build helps with comfort, but it does not give that solid confidence you expect at this price. There is no strong sense of toughness here, as the edges and the back panel do not feel like they can handle rough usage without picking up marks over time.

Moreover, the camera module itself presents another problem. There is a noticeable bulge, and when placed on a flat surface, the phone does not sit evenly and tends to wobble. While using a case can fix this, that is not really the point. Without one, the experience feels somewhat unfinished.

On the positive side, the buttons are well done. They are tactile and responsive, which adds a sense of confidence during everyday use.

Realme 16 5G display: Bright and clear

The Realme 16 comes with a 6.57-inch AMOLED display that, at first glance, feels well-balanced and easy to like. It is sharp, smooth and bright enough for most situations. The 120Hz refresh rate keeps scrolling fluid, and animations feel clean without any stutter. 

The Realme 16 comes with a claimed peak brightness of 4,200 nits. That said, we all know how peak brightness works. Where it all matters, in our testing, the phone achieved 1,631 nits in High Brightness mode (HBM). The phone is rated to hit 1,400 nits in HBM, so getting this sort of result is actually fantastic, though not the brightest in the segment. However, for what it’s worth, the screen is still good enough for comfortable use under sunlight. The text remains readable, and colours do not wash out easily while using the device outdoors.

I also tested the display using Calman, and the results are quite reassuring. Colours appear accurate and balanced in the Natural mode, which is also the most calibrated mode available in the device. The average DeltaE came out to 1.8, and the maximum DeltaE was 3.6. Whites look clean, Blacks are deep, and the contrast is strong. The measured white luminance was around 592 cd/m², while black luminance stayed close to zero, which helps with that punchy look.

What this means in daily use is simple. The content looks natural, the skin tones do not look off, landscapes have the right colours, and even simple things like reading documents feel easy on the eyes. The display does not try too hard to boost colours, and that actually works in its favour.

Realme also offers multiple colour modes, and the Natural mode is clearly the one to use if you care about accuracy, as it is properly calibrated. On the other hand, the Cinematic mode is not calibrated and leans more towards boosted colours for a more dramatic look.

Overall, after spending time watching YouTube, Netflix and some IPL matches, the screen feels reliable and consistent. But again, in this similar price bracket, as I mentioned, there are brighter options than the Realme 16. 

Realme 16 5G performance: Decent build, but the performance is...

The Realme 16 5G is powered by MediaTek’s Dimensity 6400 Turbo chipset, paired with a Mali G57 MC2 GPU. On paper, the brand tries to sell it as a 'Turbo' chip with stable performance and efficient multitasking, along with a large 6050mm² vapour chamber cooling system for thermal management. But let’s be honest, calling this a 'Turbo' chip already feels like an overstatement. This is an entry-level to lower-midrange processor being stretched into a price segment where expectations are clearly higher. Granted, the prices of components are rising, and so are the phone prices. Having said this, I still think Realme could have done a better job with the choice of chipset here.

Anyway, in general everyday usage, the phone manages to stay usable, as basic tasks like calling, messaging, scrolling through social media, and light multitasking work fine. However, the moment you push it slightly harder, the cracks start showing, as the app opening speeds are not the fastest, animations occasionally feel delayed, and there are random hiccups that you simply cannot ignore. 

Moreover, gaming performance is also not the strongest in the segment. While the casual games like Subway Surfer, Temple Run, Cards and more run fine, the moment you move to something like BGMI or heavier titles with the high-end settings, the device starts to show its weakness. You'll find the frame dropping frequently, and maintaining stable performance becomes a challenge. Fortunately, the device does not heat aggressively, but that is mainly because it is not pushing enough performance in the first place.

Benchmark numbers make things even clearer. On Antutu, the device scored 5,70,064, which is honestly underwhelming for a phone priced at Rs 31,999. Geekbench 6 results show a single-core score of 752 and a multi-core score of 2,027, which again puts it far behind what competitors are offering in this segment.

GPU performance is where things really start to fall apart. In Geekbench’s GPU test, the device scores just 1,423, while in 3DMark Wild Life Extreme it manages a mere 382, averaging only 2.29 FPS. That figure alone says a lot. It becomes immediately clear that this is not a gaming phone, and these numbers confirm that it does not even come close to earning that label.

Storage performance is decent, but nothing exceptional. Sequential read speeds hover around 552 MB/s, while write speeds reach about 451 MB/s. These are acceptable figures, but once again, there is nothing here that justifies the asking price.

While Realme had a chance to balance this device properly, it instead feels like the company focused too heavily on battery and design, treating performance as an afterthought. 

Realme 16 5G battery and charging: Reliable companion

The Realme 16 5G 5G is backed by a massive 7,000mAh battery, which is easily one of its biggest highlights. Realme pairs this with 60W charging, along with features like AI battery management and optimised power efficiency aimed at extending long-term battery health.

Whether it’s continuous social media scrolling, photography, video streaming, navigation, or even occasional gaming, the battery holds up effortlessly. For most of you out there, this is easily your full day's or half-day's usage. Moreover, even if you have a heavier usage pattern than that, I feel like getting through a full day without worrying about charging is very realistic with the Realme 16.

What also works in its favour is consistency, as the battery drain feels controlled and predictable, rather than erratic. Realme’s optimisation features, including AI-based power management, seem to be doing their job well in balancing performance and efficiency behind the scenes.

During our testing, the Realme 16 5G went from 0 to 100 per cent in about 1 hour and 40 minutes with the included charger. I know, it is not the fastest, but as mentioned, the solid battery life more than makes up for the slow charging. 

Realme 16 5G camera: Versatile or a marketing gimmick?

On paper, the Realme 16 5G tries very hard to sell you a story and stick with me on this. You get a 50MP Sony IMX852 primary camera, paired with what looks like a multi-sensor setup and backed by a long list of features like LumaColor imaging, Vibe Master mode, AI Edit Genie, and even a so-called selfie mirror. It all sounds impressive. Yes? But once you start using the device, reality kicks in, and you realise this is not a versatile camera system at all.

Despite the triple-cutout design at the back trying its best to mimic a flagship-style setup, what you actually get is just a single usable 50MP camera and a 2MP monochrome sensor. That’s it. No ultra-wide, no telephoto, nothing meaningful beyond the basics.

Moreover, the extra sensor cutouts just feel like pure cosmetic fillers designed to trick buyers into thinking they’re getting more hardware than they actually are. This can be quite misleading.

As for the performance, in daylight, the main camera manages to stay fine as the colours are fairly natural, and the detail level is acceptable for casual shots. However, when it comes to capturing images in low light, the expectations go downhill. The output is soft, noisy, and inconsistent. Furthermore, there is visible grain, a weak dynamic range, and poor handling of highlights. The processing doesn’t save the situation either, as it just struggles. Instead of enhancing detail, it often ends up making images look flatter and less usable.

Adding icing to the cake is the so-called 'selfie mirror', which is nothing more than a gimmick that sounds clever but delivers a full bowl of nothing. It can neither be used to fix your makeup nor help with selfies (which is typically its actual use). The biggest issue, I feel, is the placement, as when you try to click a selfie using the mirror, your eyes are locked onto the mirror, and that's pretty much evident in the results.

Even the software additions like AI editing tools and portrait enhancements feel more like checkbox features rather than genuinely useful tools. Yes, the phone pushes things like LumaColor processing and AI portrait tuning, but when the core hardware itself is this limited, no amount of software polish can truly compensate.

Realme 16 5G: Verdict

The Realme 16 5G looks like a solid option at first, but the longer you use it, the more its weaknesses start to show. In a price range where balance matters the most, this phone feels uneven.

Undoubtedly, the standout feature of this phone is its battery. With a capacity of 7000mAh, it performs well and is capable of lasting over a full day with extensive usage. Design-wise too, the phone can get a pass for its looks and nimble feel. However, aside from this, I was really expecting the performance to be better than what we actually got. The Dimensity 6400 isn’t the fastest in this segment with app speeds, multitasking, and gaming. It feels slow at times and simply does not match what competitors are offering. The camera too, while it does a decent job in good light, delivers average results when the light gets dim.

I’ve been reviewing the Vivo T series for many years. They keep improving with every generation, like giving better cameras and even better batteries, along with having solid performance in the segment. Speaking of which, performance is one of the key areas that the Vivo T series is known for, and this time around, things look to be a bit changed because of the chipset situation going on around the world. We all know RAM prices have significantly increased, and this time around, Vivo is trying to give their customers the best they can do, so they come up with the Vivo T5 Pro. 

The Vivo T5 Pro price in India is set at Rs 29,999 for the 8GB RAM + 128GB storage. The 8GB + 256GB is priced at Rs 33,999, while the top-end 12GB + 256GB version costs Rs 39,999. Do note that the phone uses ‘LPDDR4X’ RAM type paired with UFS 3.1 storage.

And I’ve been using the Vivo T5 Pro for more than a week now, and the question in my mind isn’t how big the battery is; it is whether everything else suffers because of it, or whether Vivo has actually managed to balance things out. Here’s my full review.

Vivo T5 Pro: Design and build

Over the years, the Vivo T series has shared quite a bit of resemblance with the V series. However, this time, the company has tried to give the T series, the T5 Pro, a distinct look.

Vivo sent me the Glacire Blue colour variant, and it has some patterns on the back that look great. It also has a matte finish, so it resists fingerprints easily. You could also get the T5 Pro in Cosmic Black colour as well.

Now, coming to the most surprising part of the design, the fact that Vivo has managed to fit a 9,020mAh battery inside a body that is just 8.25mm thick is genuinely impressive. On paper, that combination doesn’t sound possible, but in hand, it works better than expected.

Yes, the weight has gone up to 213 grams, and you will notice that if you are coming from a lighter phone. However, the weight distribution is handled well enough that it never feels uncomfortable or awkward. It doesn’t feel top-heavy, and during extended use, it remains manageable. Also, it is very comfortable to hold and has a great in-hand feel thanks to its rounded corners.

Overall, the build quality is great; it comes with an IP68 and IP69 ratings, meaning the phone can withstand high-pressure jets as well. I like the camera module design, giving it a distinctive look in Vivo’s lineup.

Vivo T5 Pro: Display

I genuinely love the display of the Vivo T5 Pro. It features a 6.83-inch 1.5K LTPS AMOLED Display with a 144Hz refresh rate. The bezels of the display are so slim, and it enhances the overall experience. The display produces amazing colours and contrast. In day to day usage, the screen is very fluid, the animations look crisp, and I didn’t feel any stutter, thanks to the 144Hz refresh rate.

Just like any other device, the device went through our Digit Test Labs, where I tested its colour accuracy and brightness.

In the Calman colour test, I put the display on the ‘Professional mode’, and it got an average delta E of 2.3, which is okay. In the Colour Gamut test, it measured 99.5%.

The display looks easily visible outside. Vivo claims that it can go up to 5,000 nits of peak brightness. Although, where it really matters, in our lux metre test, it reached up to 3,320 nits in high brightness mode (HBM), which is fantastic. 

In simple words, all of this really means that the T5 Pro has a brilliant display. Watching content on it is a solid experience. For instance, I watched ‘The Boys’ on Amazon Prime, which looked quite nice overall. But especially in the darker scenes, the display is able to exhibit those deep blacks. As a result, the contrast is pretty great here. 

Vivo T5 Pro: Performance

The Vivo T5 Pro is powered by the Snapdragon 7s Gen 4 SoC. Our unit comes with 12GB of LPDDR4X RAM (should’ve been at least LPDDR5 if not ‘5x’) and 256GB of UFS 3.1 storage.

In everyday use, the Snapdragon 7s Gen 4 handles things just fine. As I mentioned, I have used this phone for watching content, but along with it, I have also been using it for browsing, some casual gaming, and it has stayed with me throughout. Because of the ample RAM, while multitasking, the apps remain open in the background, mostly. But there are some instances where it has to reload the app entirely.

Gaming-wise, I played BGMI and CODM, and in BGMI, it supports 90fps with great gameplay and almost consistent fps. In CODM as well, it runs well at around 90fps, providing a smooth experience for casual gaming sessions. But after an extended period of time, you can notice the frame drops. However, the good part about the Vivo T5 Pro is its thermal performance. The phone manages heat very well, staying cool while gaming. So, even after you’d use it for an hour session, it only becomes a bit warm rather than being uncomfortably hot.

I also ran benchmarks for those who care about numbers. So, in Antutu, the Vivo T5 Pro scored about 1.18 million. In Geekbench, it scored 1,245 in single-core and 3,196 in multi-core. In the 3DMark Wildlife test, it scored 1,108, and in the CPU throttling test, the CPU wasn’t throttled at all. Although I will mention that I ran the test at the default settings for 15 minutes with 20 threads.

In a nutshell, I’d say, the Vivo T5 Pro is not designed for hardcore gamers who want the highest frame rates or let’s say, the performance enthusiast crowd. However, for most folks, it delivers a stable and reliable experience.

Vivo T5 Pro: Cameras

This is the area where the Vivo T5 Pro's compromises are most noticeable. Because on paper, the shift from a triple camera setup we saw on the Vivo T4 Pro to a dual camera setup feels like a downgrade, especially without a telephoto lens. The Vivo T5 Pro comes with a 50MP Sony IMX882 main camera paired with a 2MP depth sensor. For selfies, you get a 32MP camera.

Having said that, the main sensor performs well in good lighting conditions. Photos come out sharp, with a good amount of details, and have well-controlled highlights. You can definitely see Vivo’s camera tuning prowess on display here. The colour science in photos is more of a warmer side. You can also click pictures in the Natural mode to avoid that contrasty look. But I clicked pictures in the ‘Vivid mode’, which I feel the images from that mode are more social-media-ready.

Portrait mode is also an area where this device performs reliably. Edge detection is mostly decent, and the background blur looks natural, not overly processed. 

The 32MP front camera delivers solid results with sharp and natural-looking images. I also didn’t find any sort of aggressive skin smoothing happening here. The camera also manages to retain the facial details.

As for the video recording, the Vivo T5 Pro can shoot footage at up to 4K at 30fps. The output is decent for casual use, and the stabilisation is also pretty decent.

Vivo T5 Pro: Software and user experience

The Vivo T5 Pro runs on OriginOS 6 based on Android 16, and the software feels polished and fluid as expected. Animations are smooth, transitions are crisp, and the interface has a modern, refined look. Although the device does come with some pre-installed bloatware, which may ruin the otherwise clean user experience. The good thing is that most of it can be uninstalled.

OriginOS 6 also comes with its fair share of AI features. Like, there is AI transcription and AI content editing, which are useful and add practical value rather than feeling like a gimmick. AI Retouch in the gallery app also works fine.

In terms of software support, Vivo is committing 3 years of Android updates and 5 years of security patches. This is good, but its predecessor, the T4 Pro, did it better with its 4 + 6 years software update policy.

Vivo T5 Pro: Battery and charging

Alright, the main KSP of the Vivo T5 Pro is its humongous 9,020mAh battery, and in terms of endurance, it absolutely shines, being one of the longest-lasting smartphones in this segment.

To put things into perspective, in real-world usage, the Vivo T5 Pro comfortably lasts for more than 2 days on a single charge, and I’m not exaggerating here. I was doing a mix of content watching, gaming and regular usage; this device used to consistently stay with me for 2 days without dying.

In terms of charging, Vivo T5 Pro supports 90W of fast wired charging and the charger is included in the box. I charged the device from 0 to 100 per cent in around 1 hour and 10 minutes. It also supports reverse wired charging, so you can charge your accessories on the go.

Vivo T5 Pro: Verdict

Overall, given the current landscape in 2026, the Vivo T5 Pro is a decent smartphone, which is a practical choice, and performs reliably. Of course, the key highlight of the Vivo T5 Pro has to be its 9,020mAh battery, which genuinely changes how you use the phone, removing the constant need to worry about charging. Combined with a solid display, stable performance and a great design, the Vivo T5 Pro offers a well-rounded experience for most users.

That said, it does come with its fair share of shortcomings when you compare it to the outgoing T4 Pro, particularly in the camera department and performance. However, I won’t exactly call these tradeoffs, and would rather see them as intentional choices. Considering the rising price of components and, henceforth, the rising cost of smartphones, Vivo has done a pretty fine job with the T5 Pro. Still, the pricing could’ve been tighter. Anyway, it is what it is.

Long story short, if your priority is a smartphone that performs consistently and can handle daily tasks without any stress, then the Vivo T5 Pro stands out as one of the most sensible choices in its price range right now. Especially if you are looking for a phone that’s also probably one of the longest lasting in the segment as well.

In the last couple of years, I’ve come across gaming laptops of all shapes and sizes. From the compact 14-inch devices to the 18-inch beasts, there’s something for every kind of gamer out there. But for the last few days, I’ve been using the most compact 18-inch device that I’ve ever come across. And I have been quite impressed. The device that I’m talking about is the Razer Blade 18, powered by an Intel Core Ultra 9 chipset and an Nvidia 5090 GPU. The moment I unboxed the laptop, the first thing that I could say was ‘This doesn’t feel like an 18-inch gaming beast’. But, well, it is. 

Before the Razer Blade, the other 18-inch gaming laptop that I used was the Dell 18 Area 51, a couple of months back. It had similar specs to the Razer Blade 18, but it also came with a heavy build and didn’t even try to be backpack-friendly. Now, there isn’t a lot of difference in the two devices in terms of weight on paper, but the Razer Blade 18 definitely feels easier to carry around. 

But does this slim form factor come at the cost of compromised performance? Let’s find out. 

Also read: Nvidia GeForce Now comes to India: How to register

Razer Blade 18: Design and build

With an 18-inch screen size, the Razer Blade 18 is a large laptop, and there is no other way to say this. The huge form factor immediately makes its presence felt the moment you take it out of the box. But this is the case with every 18-inch gaming beast out there. 

As said already, despite its large size, the Razer Blade 18 remains quite easy (at least, relatively) to carry around in your backpack, and I faced no issues in carrying it to work every single day for the last two weeks. All it took was a bigger backpack than usual, which had good cushioning on its straps. 

In fact, when I first held the laptop, I estimated it to be around 2.5 kg. I was surprised to later find out that it actually weighs around 3 kg. There were even times when I did not feel the need to use both shoulder straps, which is not something I usually say about large gaming laptops. 

Of course, this does not mean it is ultra-portable. It is still a big machine, and you will feel its presence. But compared to other laptops in this category, it is surprisingly manageable.

In terms of aesthetics, the Razer Blade 18 isn’t your typical RGB-heavy device. It maintains a sleeker appearance and can even masquerade as a serious working device if you turn the keyboard RGB lights off and just let it sit on your work desk. The lid comes with the Razer Blade logo that can glow if you toggle the setting in the Razer Synapse app. 

While I liked the glowing logo, what didn’t really feel appealing was the glowing stickers on the chassis that glare at you the moment you lift the lid. In my opinion, the stickers take away from what could have been a much cleaner aesthetic. I would have preferred removing them entirely if this were not a review unit.

Talking about the build, the Razer Blade 18 checks a lot of boxes, but it is not perfect. The laptop has a solid feel overall, and the hinge is sturdy enough to hold the display in place during regular use. However, there is some flex when you press the lid, which is something you do not expect at this price point.

In addition to this, the laptop comes with a matte finish across the body that looks premium at first glance. But when you use it for a while, you begin to see that it attracts smudges very easily. Within a few hours of use, you will start seeing fingerprints. This isn’t a dealbreaker, but something worth mentioning. 

At the same time, Razer has done an impressive job keeping the chassis relatively slim despite the hardware inside. Considering the kind of cooling system this device uses, including multiple fans and a large vapour chamber, the overall build still feels well-engineered.

Razer Blade 18: Display

Now, let’s talk about the display, which is easily one of the highlights of this device. The Razer Blade 18 comes with a large dual-mode panel that can switch between 4K at 240Hz and Full HD at 440Hz. 

During my time with the device, I found myself sticking to the 4K mode most of the time. The 440Hz mode is for competitive gamers who want more frame rates, even if it comes at the cost of graphic quality. However, switching between these two modes is not as seamless as it should be. You have to go into the software, change the settings, and restart the system. That makes it less practical for frequent switching, so most users will likely stick to one mode (just like I did).

At a glance, the display looks sharp, vibrant, and bright enough, making it great for both gaming and watching content indoors. Outdoors too, the display is bright enough to handle most of your tasks. But let’s be honest here, how many gamers actually use their laptops outdoors? (Hint: Not a lot of them) 

Coming to the colours, they are well balanced, and the overall viewing experience feels justified for the price. The panel also covers a wide colour gamut, which shows how accurate the colours are. During my testing, I found that the laptop covers the sRGB as well as the DCI P3 colour spaces quite well. 

Razer Blade 18: Keyboard and trackpad

The keyboard on the Razer Blade 18 is one of the best ones I have used on a gaming laptop. It offers deep key travel, which makes typing feel comfortable and satisfying. But unlike most gaming laptops that come with keyboards that scream attention, this one masquerades as one meant for typing. It isn’t until the RGB lights kick off that you realise that this is a gaming laptop’s keyboard. And in all honesty, I just loved how discreet the keyboard looks. Now I prefer minimal aesthetics, but for those who actually like their laptop’s keyboards to be OTT, this might be slightly underwhelming. 

The keyboard also has some programmable macro keys that can be customised based on your needs. And this is a big deal for those who are into setting their keys as per their preference. 

The laptop comes with a large trackpad. And I mean, really large. It covers almost 50% of the chassis, and I didn’t find myself having to use the mouse while working. But the placement is where things get slightly awry. I often found my palm brushing against the trackpad while typing around the IJKL keys. Now this is most likely intentional, as gamers mostly use WASD keys, and in that case, the trackpad won’t interfere at all. However, if you are going to type a lot on this device, this issue will certainly be felt. 

Razer Blade 18: Audio and webcam

The Razer Blade 18 features a six-speaker setup, which includes tweeters and woofers powered by smart amplifiers. In terms of loudness, the speakers perform well. I could hear the audio clearly even in a busy office environment.

However, the sound quality itself is not exceptional. The highs feel slightly suppressed, and the lows do not have as much depth as you would expect. The bass sits somewhere in the middle. Overall, it is good enough for casual use, but if you care about audio quality, you will still want to use headphones. Which is something you’ll probably be doing anyway.

The laptop also comes with a 5MP webcam that supports 1440p recording and includes a privacy shutter, which is always a welcome addition.

Razer Blade 18: Everyday performance and benchmarks

Let’s now come to the aspect that matters the most in any device: performance. And the Razer Blade 18, powered by the Intel Core Ultra 9 275HX, delivers exactly what you would expect from a flagship HX-series chip. Now on paper, the chipset brings a mix of performance and efficiency cores, along with an upgraded NPU and better thread scheduling. 

And in practice, this means the laptop is able to juggle heavy workloads without slowing down as the machine can prioritise demanding tasks while keeping background processes in check. I was not only able to run modern-day AAA games easily, but also multitask on the laptop without any noticeable dips in performance

On a busy Monday morning, I did what most gamers would do to beat those morning blues - I fired up Resident Evil Requiem. But soon after, an email needed my attention, and I easily answered it, keeping the game running in the background. Then, I started working on an article that had to go live urgently, completely forgetting that the game was still running in the background. So, needless to say, the laptop can multitask without breaking a sweat.

And this is because the chipset intelligently distributes workloads between performance and efficiency cores, ensuring that background tasks do not eat into foreground performance. Hence, even with a heavy AAA title like Resident Evil Requiem running, the laptop remained responsive with no slowdowns while switching between tasks.

Another thing I noticed during extended use is how stable the performance remains over time. With gaming laptops that try to balance performance with a relatively slim chassis, you often see fluctuations once thermals kick in. But here, the drop-off is far less noticeable. The chip is able to sustain its performance for longer durations, which makes a huge difference during those long gaming sessions or work hours.

Coming to gaming specifically, I tested out many titles ranging from Cyberpunk 2077 to Forza Horizon 5 and more. Now, this is a machine built to be pushed. And after doing exactly that, I wasn’t disappointed with the results. 

At 4K resolution with graphic settings maxed out, games like Cyberpunk 2077, Doom: The Dark Ages were easily playable and getting stable 100+ FPS. The Nvidia DLSS 4 played a major role in boosting the frame rates here and ensuring a hassle-free experience. When I switched the resolution to 1440p, the laptop hit a sweet spot, offering 150+ frame rates without compromising too much on visual quality. And taking the resolution down to 1080p gave the absolute best experience.

So, if you’re a competitive gamer, there is all the performance you need here. Other demanding titles like Dragon Age: The Veilguard, Silent Hill f, and Forza Horizon 5 also ran smoothly across different settings. 

This strong performance is backed by the benchmark testing scores. In tests like Cinebench, Geekbench, and PCMark, the laptop holds its ground quite well.

Its performance is at par with, and in some cases, even exceeds that of the Alienware 18 Area 51, which costs over Rs 5 lakh. 

Overall, the performance here is not just about brute force. It is about stability, consistency, and smart workload handling. And that is exactly what makes the Razer Blade 18 feel as fast and dependable as it does in everyday use. 

Razer Blade 18: Ports and connectivity

The Razer Blade 18 offers a wide range of ports, which is great to see. You get Thunderbolt 5 and Thunderbolt 4 ports, multiple USB Type-A ports, HDMI 2.1, Ethernet, an SD card reader, and a headphone jack.

This means you can connect pretty much everything you need, which is especially important for a machine that is meant to handle both gaming and productivity tasks. 

Now, you won’t really need a dongle or a hub with this device in most cases. But if you are someone who connects external displays, SSDs, and pretty much everything else there is, you will likely need a hub. Let’s talk about it briefly. 

The hub that made everything possible

The Razer Blade 18 is a powerful laptop, but once you start adding an external display, SSD, keyboard, and mouse, you will need some extra power. In all honesty, I did not expect a hub to make this much of a difference to my Razer Blade setup. But the CalDigit Element 5 proved me wrong. This hub fixes that without adding any friction to the experience.

In my setup, I had everything routed through the hub, including the OWC Envoy Ultra SSD that I used for storing and moving large video files. With a single cable going into the laptop, my entire desk setup was ready to go in seconds. The performance felt consistent and hassle-free. Even when I was working with heavy files like 4K videos, transfers were quick and reliable.

The SSD itself is incredibly fast and pairs really well with a setup like this. Whether I was moving game footage or large project files, it handled everything without slowing me down. More importantly, the entire setup felt stable. There were no random disconnects or lag. What was there was just a clean, dependable workflow. Over time, this hub started feeling less like an accessory and more like a natural extension of the Razer Blade.

Razer Blade 18: Battery life and thermals

Coming back to the laptop, let’s now talk about the battery life. Now, gaming laptops, especially those that come with such immense power, aren’t really known for their battery lives. And that is fine since the target audience here usually keeps their laptops plugged in at all times. In the case of the Razer Blade 18, the laptop lasted a little over an hour while gaming with full brightness and keyboard lighting enabled. One thing to note is how the performance here remained stable throughout, which is a good sign. I played Forza Horizon 5 on battery and was getting a stable and smooth experience. 

When I used the laptop for regular office work at 50 per cent brightness, and RGB lighting turned off, the battery lasted around 5 hours. Again, considering the size of this machine, this is a respectable result. 

Coming to thermals, the laptop does get hot, but never too much to handle. You will feel the keyboard keys (especially the IJKL area) get warm after intense gaming sessions, but that is normal. Surface temps hovered around 39 degrees Celcius while the CPU temps touched a whopping 120 degrees Celcius during benchmark tests. Now, considering how slim (relatively) the laptop is, these temps are justified. 

Razer Blade 18: Verdict

The Razer Blade 18 hasn’t been launched for the Indian market yet. In the US, the unit that reached Digit Test Labs for review costs 4,899 USD, which is roughly Rs 4,75,000. 

Now, if the laptop does come to India, should you buy it? The answer is a resounding yes.

The Razer Blade 18 is a powerful gaming laptop that delivers where it matters the most to its targeted customers. It offers strong performance, a great display, and a surprisingly manageable design for its size. 

Yes, there are some minor flaws, but those are usually expected in huge gaming laptops. 

So, if you are someone who wants a desktop-level experience in a laptop form factor and are willing to accept these trade-offs, the Razer Blade 18 is worth a serious look. That is, if it officially comes to India. Fingers crossed!

Also read: Intel Core 3 series processors launched: Availability and other details

I am a speedcuber. I wear a ring on my finger. These two facts are, occasionally, in conflict. But more on that later. Three weeks ago I started wearing the Oura Ring 4 on my left ring finger, and somewhere between the first sleep report and the third readiness score, I realised I had been thinking about health tracking completely wrong. I had been obsessed with the output: steps, calories, workout duration. The more interesting story, it turned out, was happening while I was doing absolutely nothing. While I was asleep.

Also read: Gabit smart ring review: Good habits take time, not a timepiece

First impressions

The ring arrives in a small, considered box alongside a magnetic charging puck and a USB-C cable. The puck is compact, grey in colour, and takes up almost no space on a night stand. Setup is straightforward. Download the app, tap the ring to your phone, done.

The hardware feels premium in a quiet way. All-titanium construction, inside and out, with sensors that sit flush against your finger rather than pressing into it.

That said, the ring is noticeably thick. If you have never worn a ring before, or are used to a slim band, it will feel a little foreign for the first few days. It is not uncomfortable exactly, just present in a way that takes some adjustment. By the end of the first week I had largely stopped noticing it.

For context, I use a Samsung Galaxy Watch 6 Classic as my daily driver. I like it. It does a lot. But I have never fully gotten used to wearing a watch all the time, and I almost never sleep with it on. The strap is not particularly breathable and in Mumbai's humidity, you start sweating faster than you would expect. Mid-workout, the watch sometimes feels like it needs to come off. The ring never once gave me that urge.

The sleep gap that changed my mind

I want to lead with the most important thing this ring did in three weeks of testing, because it is the argument the rest of this review builds around.

On one particular night, my Galaxy Watch logged my sleep at 5 hours 36 minutes. The Oura Ring logged 6 hours 45 minutes. That is over an hour of sleep the watch simply did not register. For a device that is supposed to tell you how recovered you are, that is not a rounding error. It is a fundamentally different picture of your night.

Now, I can tell you which device was closer to the truth on that particular night because the watch's own app shows a straight hour of no data recorded around 1:30 am. I was asleep. I would know if I wasn’t asleep. The watch just was not paying attention. Ring-based optical sensing has a stronger research track record for sleep staging than wrist-based tracking regardless, largely because the finger has cleaner blood flow signal and is less prone to movement artefacts. But on this night the case made itself. The ring was there. The watch was not.

The practical consequence of this matters more than the spec difference. A health tracker that gives you incomplete sleep data is quietly giving you a distorted readiness score every single morning. You are making decisions about how hard to push in a workout, or whether to have that third coffee, based on numbers that do not fully reflect what your body went through the night before. The ring fixed that for me. It also got me in the habit of trying to get a better sleep score that has caused me to be the most well-rested I have been in a long time

The actual cost

The ring starts at Rs. 28,900 for the silver and black variants, going up to Rs. 39,900 for the premium finishes. Add the subscription at Rs. 599 per month after the first free month, and you are looking at roughly Rs. 35,000 in year one for the base model. Without the subscription you only get three days of data history and the three headline scores, which strips out most of what makes the ring worth owning. Budget for it from the start.

One practical note for Indian buyers: get the sizing kit first. It costs Rs. 999 and will save you from the considerably worse situation of getting the wrong size on a Rs. 28,900 purchase and that cost also get adjusted in the final price of the ring.

The app is genuinely beautiful

Built around three scores you see every morning: Readiness, Sleep, and Activity. Readiness is the one I became slightly obsessed with. It pulls together resting heart rate, HRV balance, body temperature, sleep quality, sleep regularity, previous day activity, and respiratory rate to tell you how ready your body is to take on the day. Each contributing factor is tappable so you can understand exactly why your score landed where it did. It is not a number you can easily manufacture by just sleeping more or working out harder, which means when it moves, you pay attention.

The sleep breakdown sits underneath that. You get your sleep stages charted across the night: REM, light, deep, and awake, alongside body movement, breathing regularity, disturbance timestamps, and HRV tracked across the full night. After two weeks of consistent use, longer-term patterns start appearing like sleep debt over the past 14 days and stress resilience trends.

Also read: Sennheiser HD 500 BAM microphone review ft. HD 560s headphone: Clear, convenient, and modular upgrade

After two weeks it also surfaces your cardiovascular age, which estimates arterial stiffness relative to your actual age. Mine came in 3.5 years older than I am, sitting within the ideal range. I will be honest, I do not fully know how much weight to give that number. Oura derives it from HRV and resting heart rate patterns over time, so it is not arbitrary, but it is also not a cardiology report. I found it useful as a directional signal rather than a hard verdict, something to watch trend over months rather than act on immediately.

There is a meal logging feature where you photograph your food and the app breaks down protein, fibre, added sugars, fats, and carbs. It is a nice addition and, more often than not, it detects the food accurately but is peripheral to what the ring does best. 

Oura also has an AI advisor that reads your data and offers personalised suggestions. It works, it is fine, and I would not miss it if it were not there. The data itself is the interesting part. The chatbot layer on top of it felt like it was trying a little too hard.

Where it falls short

The Oura Ring 4 is not trying to be a sports watch and should not be judged like one. But the gaps are worth knowing about clearly.

Step counting is noticeably less accurate than the Galaxy Watch. It tends to overcount or undercount depending on the activity. For workouts, the watch gives you pace, distance, and cadence. The ring gives you none of that. If you run, cycle, or swim and care about performance metrics, you will still need a watch. The ring sits firmly in the wellness category: sleep, recovery, stress, and fatigue. Outside that lane it does not pretend to compete.

The ring also has no vibration motor and no LED display, so there are no notifications, no alarms, no glanceable stats. Entirely passive. Some people will find this freeing. Others will find it limiting. Know which one you are before buying.

And then there is the speedcubing problem. I solve cubes competitively and wearing the ring on my left ring finger means it rubs against my middle and index fingers during solves, which messes with my grip and affects my times. I now take it off before sitting down to cube. A minor inconvenience in the grand scheme, but worth knowing if any of your hobbies involve precise finger movement.

Battery life

Rated at eight days. In three weeks of real use I consistently hit seven days per charge, with the charger taking about an hour to top it back up. Compact puck, USB-C, no complaints. It is one of the better battery experiences in wearables and one of the least interesting things to write about, which is exactly how battery life should be.

So, who is it for?

The Oura Ring 4 is not a fitness tracker that also does sleep. It is a recovery and wellness tracker that also logs your workouts. That distinction sounds small but it reframes everything about how you use it. You stop asking what you burned and start asking whether you were ready to burn it in the first place.

If you want a smartwatch replacement, look elsewhere. If you want pace and cadence and GPS routes, look elsewhere. But if you want to understand what your body is actually doing when you are not watching it, and you want a device comfortable enough to wear through every workout, every night of sleep, and every sweaty Mumbai afternoon without once wanting to take it off, this ring makes a serious case for itself.

Also read: Somebody recorded 40 years of concert audio and put it all online for free

Buying a good smartphone under Rs 20,000 is not as simple as it sounds, especially in 2026 when smartphone prices are getting hiked left, right and centre. Still, there are many options available in the market with good features, which makes it really difficult to choose the right one. With every new release, brands are trying to offer better displays, good cameras and big batteries. With that, iQOO is placing its latest bet in this segment with the Z11x 5G, priced starting at Rs 18,999. At first glance, the iQOO Z11x looks simple and clean, and its large 7,200mAh battery quickly stands out. But a good first impression doesn’t always tell the full story.

I used the iQOO Z11x 5G for a few weeks to see how it performs in real life. Here’s my full review, covering design, display, performance, camera and battery.

iQOO Z11x: Build and design 

The iQOO Z11x comes in two colour options: Prasmic Green and Titan Black. I got the latter option for the review. It features a clean, simple look with a matte finish that doesn’t attract fingerprints.

On the back, there is a squoval-shaped camera module that houses the dual-lenses and flash, along with a small Dynamic Light ring. This light glows for notifications, incoming calls, etc. One thing you’ll notice right away is the size. The iQOO Z11x is a slightly big and heavy phone. Maybe for some users, one-handed usage for long periods could be a problem. That said, the curved edges and flat sides help with grip. In terms of build, the phone uses plastic for both the back and the frame, which is expected in this price range. But it doesn’t feel cheap.

Overall, the iQOO Z11x keeps things practical. It doesn’t impress you with a bold design, but it offers a clean look, a comfortable grip and a sturdy build that gets the job done.

iQOO Z11x: Display

The iQOO Z11x comes with a 6.76-inch FHD+ (2344 × 1080) LCD panel with a 120Hz refresh rate and a resolution. The company claims the display can go up to 1,200 nits of brightness.

Using Calman and the Spectracal C6 Colourimeter, we tested the colour accuracy of the display. The phone achieved an average Delta E of 1.2, suggesting the panel is quite colour accurate. I also found the display, despite being an LCD, to be vibrant. YouTube videos and OTT content look very good on the screen, offering an enjoyable experience. The display also covers around 98.8 per cent of the colour gamut and maintains a good balance between red, green and blue tones.

In our lux meter test, the screen reached a peak brightness of 1,320 nits in auto mode, which is slightly higher than the company’s claim. In daily use, it does its job fine. It is not the brightest out there on a harsh sunny day, but for the price, it offers adequate brightness. The 120Hz refresh rate adds to the smoothness, so general animations, scrolling and the times you interact with the screen feel fluid. 

Overall, for under Rs 20,000, the iQOO Z11x offers a good viewing experience, and there’s not really much to complain about here.

iQOO Z11x: Performance

The iQOO Z11x is powered by the MediaTek Dimensity 7400 Turbo and comes with up to 8GB LPDDR4X RAM and 256GB storage. Do note that the storage is non-expandable. But, on the bright side, it’s UFS 3.1 storage you are getting here, which is a solid deal.

Which brings me to the actual performance of the iQOO Z11x, and in day-to-day use, it performs quite well. I didn’t notice any lag while doing the general stuff like texting, scrolling through Instagram, watching YouTube videos, or switching between apps. Everything feels smooth and responsive for the most part.

For those who care about benchmarks, the Z11x puts up strong numbers as well for a phone in its price range. It scored 9,68,962 on Antutu, which is higher than some phones in this price range. For comparison, the Poco M8 5G, which was launched recently in a similar price segment, scored 8,52,479. On Geekbench 6, the phone managed 1,057 in the single-core test and 2,790 in the multi-core test.

On the software side, the iQOO Z11x runs on OriginOS 6.0 based on Android 16. iQOO promises two years of major Android updates and four years of security updates. While this isn’t the best compared to some rivals, it’s still decent for a phone at this price.

iQOO Z11x: Camera

Now, let’s talk about the cameras. The iQOO Z11x comes with a dual rear camera setup, featuring a 50MP main sensor and a 2MP bokeh sensor. On the front, there’s a 32MP camera for selfies. What I would say is that the camera setup is not perfect, but it does a fairly solid job for the price.

Starting with the main camera, it captures good detail in daylight. Images look sharp enough, and colours are generally pleasing. However, I did notice that the phone tends to push deeper blacks, which adds a bit more contrast to photos. Some people might like this punchy look, but if you prefer more natural or balanced tones, it’s something you’ll notice.

Low-light performance is better than expected for a phone in this segment. The camera manages to retain decent detail, and colours don’t completely fall apart. There is some noise, but the results are satisfying and good enough for social media.

Selfies are handled by the 32MP front camera, and it does a satisfactory job. Photos come out with decent detail, and skin tones look natural without going overboard on beautification. It’s reliable for video calls and social media posts.

Overall, the iQOO Z11x delivers a camera experience that’s quite dependable for its price. It may not impress in every situation, but for everyday photography, it gets the job done well.

iQOO Z11x: Battery

The iQOO Z11x packs a massive 7,200mAh battery and supports 44W wired charging. With such a large battery, endurance is easily one of the phone’s biggest strengths. In everyday use, the battery life is excellent, no questions asked. On a full charge, the phone can comfortably last over two days with casual usage. Even with slightly heavier use, you won’t find yourself reaching for the charger by the end of the day.

In the PCMark battery test, the phone lasted for more than 29 hours, which is seriously impressive for this segment. However, charging is not as fast as you might expect. Using the bundled 44W charger, the phone takes around 1 hour and 30 minutes to go from 0 to 100 per cent. Considering the battery size, it’s understandable, but it still feels a bit slow in 2026.

To give you a better idea of real-world usage, the phone dropped just 3 per cent after 30 minutes of video streaming. Even while using power-hungry apps like Google Maps, the battery drain is minimal as the phone loses only about 4 per cent after an hour of navigation.

iQOO Z11x: Verdict

The iQOO Z11x is a phone that focuses on what really matters for most users. Its biggest strength is the battery life, which easily lasts up to two days on normal use. Performance is smooth, and the display is vibrant, even though it’s not an AMOLED panel. That said, the phone is not perfect. The camera is decent but not outstanding, and the charging speed feels a bit slow given the phone’s humongous battery.

That said, in this day and age, with the component prices rising and phones getting more expensive, there’s not much to complain about here, given the iQOO Z11x is a sub-Rs 20,000 device. 

So, if you want a phone with long battery life, smooth performance and a reliable everyday experience, the iQOO Z11x makes quite a strong case for itself. 

If the Nord 5 (review) was OnePlus putting its foot down, the Nord 6 is the company kicking the door wide open. The OnePlus Nord 6 with the Snapdragon 8s Gen 4, a colossal 9,000 mAh battery, a 165Hz display and durability credentials that rival rugged phones, is no longer a mid-range phone pretending to be something more. It is something more. Starting in the Rs 35,000–45,000 segment, the Nord 6 feels like OnePlus declaring war on any price bracket that tries to contain it. But does the experience match the claims? Let's find out.

OnePlus Nord 6 Review: Build and Design

The Nord 6 takes the design aesthetics of the Nord 5 and pushes it into flagship territory. Where the Nord 5 traded the Nord 4's metal design for a sleeker silhouette, the Nord 6 draws clear inspiration from OnePlus' own number series.

At 8.5mm thick and 217g, the Nord 6 is marginally thicker than the Nord 5's 8.1mm profile, but that's entirely justified by the enormous 9,000 mAh battery it houses. The frame and the rear panel is crafted out of plastic while the camera deco housing is made from aluminum. The weight distribution remains well-balanced and the phone sits comfortably in hand without feeling unwieldy.

There are three colour options in the lineup: Fresh Mint, Quick Silver and Pitch Black. I’ve been using the Fresh Mint colour which looks vibrant without being loud. The Quick Silver has a metallic sheen with two lines running along the periphery, while Pitch Black is understated, clean and fingerprint-friendly.

The Plus Key returns on the left side, continuing its role as a dedicated Mind Space AI shortcut button. It's still not the beloved alert slider of old, but the utility it offers including quick access to Mind Space, AI Search and Gemini makes it more than a worthy replacement, especially as OxygenOS 16's AI features grow more capable.

In terms of durability, the Nord 6 carries IP66, IP68, IP69 and IP69K ratings. That's protection against dust, water immersion and even high-pressure, high-temperature water jets. OnePlus has also thrown in MIL-STD-810H military-grade certification and Crystal Guard display protection (which OnePlus claims is on par with Corning Gorilla Glass Victus Plus). There's also a Sandstone Magnetic Case (bought seperately) for those who want OnePlus' iconic tactile finish with magnetic accessory compatibility, including the optional 27W Ice-Cooled Magnetic Back Clip for extended gaming sessions.

OnePlus Nord 6 Review: Display

The Nord 6 has a 6.78-inch 1.5K AMOLED running at up to 165Hz with support for 10-bit colour, 100% sRGB and DCI-P3 coverage and a peak brightness of 3,600 nits.

In our brightness testing, the Nord 6 peaked at 2,770 nits in auto mode and hit 1,920 nits with manual brightness maxed out, with SDR content peaking at 915 nits. That's a significant step up from the Nord 5's 1,560 nits (auto) and 1,280 nits (manual) and it translates directly into tangible outdoor visibility improvements.

We put the Nord 6's Natural display profile through rigorous Calman testing with a SpectaCal C6 HDR2000 colorimeter and the results speak for themselves.

In the ColorChecker Analysis, the Nord 6 delivered an average deltaE of just 1.3 with a maximum deltaE of 2.5 (at the white point). For context, a deltaE below 1 is considered indistinguishable to the human eye and anything under 3 is considered excellent. This means the colours you see on screen, whether you're editing photos for Instagram, colour-grading video or just browsing, are remarkably faithful to their source.

The Grayscale Multi analysis returned an average dE2000 of 1.7, an average CCT of 6863K (very close to the D65 standard of 6500K, with only a slight cool bias), a contrast ratio of 138,968:1 and an average gamma of 2.26 which is nearly textbook for the 2.2 target. The black luminance registered at a vanishingly low 0.005 cd/m², delivering the kind of inky blacks and punchy contrast that makes OLED technology shine.

Compared to the Nord 5, which scored an average deltaE of 0.5 (max 1.9) in its Natural profile, the Nord 6's numbers are slightly higher but still firmly in the "excellent" bracket. The real-world difference is negligible and the Nord 6 more than compensates with its dramatically higher brightness, the bump to 165Hz and the addition of Sunburst HDR technology for enhanced outdoor readability.

Touch response is rated at 3,200Hz with a dedicated Touch Reflex chip and Aqua Touch 2.0 ensures the screen responds accurately with wet, sweaty, or oily fingers. There's also 3,840Hz PWM dimming for reduced eye strain during extended late-night sessions.

In short, this is one of the best displays you'll find anywhere near this price and honestly, it's competitive with panels costing twice as much.

OnePlus Nord 6 Review: Performance & Software

The Nord 6 takes another meaningful leap in raw performance, powered by the Qualcomm Snapdragon 8s Gen 4 and OnePlus has paired it with LPDDR5X RAM (8GB or 12GB) and UFS 4.1 storage (256GB only, no 512GB option), creating a hardware package that punches well above its price.

Here's how it stacks up in benchmarks:

The 85% CPU throttling score indicates the Nord 6 maintains excellent sustained performance, edging out the Nord 5's 84% and suggesting OnePlus' massive 33,147 mm² heat dissipation area (up from the Nord 5's 7,300 mm² vapour chamber) is doing serious work behind the scenes.

In daily use, the Nord 6 is blisteringly fast. App launches are instantaneous, multitasking between heavy apps like Google Maps, Instagram, Chrome and the camera is seamless and the UFS 4.1 storage (a jump from the Nord 5's UFS 3.1) makes file transfers and app installs noticeably snappier.

Gaming Performance

The Nord 6 is the segment's first phone to deliver steady 165 FPS gameplay on AAA titles and our testing confirms the claim holds up:

These numbers are exceptional. The near-perfect smoothness scores across titles like BGMI and COD Mobile mean you're getting a visually fluid, stutter-free experience that genuinely rivals flagship gaming phones. OnePlus also supports 165 FPS in Free Fire, Free Fire MAX, Mobile Legends: Bang Bang, Brawl Stars, Clash of Clans and Clash Royale, among others.

The gaming experience is further enhanced by the dedicated 6-axis gyroscope (±4,000 DPS) for precision aiming, a Spatial Audio Booster for directional audio cues and the aforementioned optional 27W Ice-Cooled Magnetic Back Clip for sustained thermal management during marathon sessions.

The G2 Wi-Fi chip, shared with the OnePlus 15, deserves a mention here too. It delivers stronger reception through walls and congested networks, with up to 1.6x reduced latency in gaming scenarios which is a tangible advantage for competitive online play.

Software

The Nord 6 runs on OxygenOS 16, based on Android 16 and is clean, fast and thoughtfully designed. The animations are fluid, the interface is bloat-free (save for a few removable pre-installs) and the AI integration via Mind Space and Gemini feels more natural and useful than ever. The 4+6 year update commitment (four Android OS upgrades, six years of security patches) continues to set the standard for the segment, with the system rated 'A' for fluency through 72 months.

OnePlus Nord 6 Review: Battery Life

If the Nord 5's 6,800 mAh battery was impressive, the Nord 6's 9,000 mAh silicon-carbon cell is outright ridiculous in the best possible way. OnePlus claims 2.5+ days of moderate use, with up to 26.9 hours of YouTube streaming and 16.6 hours of Google Maps navigation on a single charge.

In our PCMark Work 3.0 battery test, the Nord 6 recorded a staggering 33 hours and 26 minutes, more than double the Nord 5's already excellent 15 hours and 35 minutes. This is power bank territory crammed into an 8.5mm phone.

In real-world use, battery anxiety simply doesn't exist with this phone. A heavy day of social media, camera use, navigation and streaming will still leave you with charge to spare at bedtime. For lighter users, three days between charges is entirely achievable.

Charging remains at 80W SUPERVOOC, same as the Nord 5 and takes the larger battery from 0 to 100% in roughly 60–65 minutes. It's not the fastest charging in the segment, but OnePlus has made a clear trade-off: endurance over speed and it's the right call. A quick 5-minute top-up delivers about 2.5 hours of YouTube streaming.

Bypass Charging returns with upgrades for 2026, routing power directly to the chipset during gaming to keep thermals low and extend long-term battery health. What’s new with this generation is 27W wired reverse charging and for good reason. With a 9,000 mAh cell, the Nord 6 can genuinely serve as an emergency power bank for your earbuds, smartwatch or even another phone.

OnePlus Nord 6 Review: Cameras

• Main Camera: 50MP Sony LYTIA-600, f/1.8, 1/1.953" sensor, 0.8μm pixels, 26mm equivalent, dual-axis OIS + dual-axis EIS, PDAF, 5P lens
• Ultra-wide: 8MP OmniVision OV08F, f/2.2, 1/4" sensor, 1.12μm pixels, 16mm equivalent, 112° FoV, 5P lens
• Front: 32MP Samsung Galaxy Core sensor, autofocus, 4K 60fps video

The Nord 6's main camera sensor shifts from the Nord 5's Sony LYT-700 (1/1.56") to the Sony LYTIA-600 (1/1.953"), which is a smaller sensor on paper. However, the dual-axis OIS (up from the Nord 5's triple-axis) and OnePlus' refined HDR and natural-colour algorithms help maintain and in some scenarios, improve image quality. The daylight shots remain sharp, well-exposed and colour-accurate, with good dynamic range that preserves highlights and pulls detail from shadows.

The low-light performance benefits from the improved stabilisation system. Static scenes are rendered with impressive clarity and controlled noise, though complex mixed-lighting situations with moving subjects can still produce some softness which is a limitation shared by most phones in this segment.

The 2x in-sensor zoom continues to deliver clean, usable crops and the digital zoom range extends to 20x (up from the Nord 5), though results beyond 4x remain best suited for casual use.

The selfie camera takes an interesting turn: it drops from the Nord 5's 50MP Samsung ISOCELL JN5 to a 32MP Samsung Galaxy Core sensor. On paper, that sounds like a downgrade, but the addition of autofocus and 4K 60fps video recording on the front camera, features the Nord 5 lacked, makes this a net positive for content creators and video callers.

The ultra-wide remains an 8MP affair with a slightly narrower 112° field of view (down from the Nord 5's 116°). It's functional in good light but continues to be the weakest link in the camera system, especially after dark.

Verdict

The OnePlus Nord 6 is the most complete mid-range phone OnePlus has ever built. It doesn't just incrementally improve over the Nord 5, it leaps forward in nearly every meaningful department. The 9,000 mAh battery is segment-redefining, the Snapdragon 8s Gen 4 with 165 FPS gaming makes the benchmark debate moot for everyday users, the display is flagship-grade along with its durability credentials make it the heavyweight in this category.

The absence of a 512GB storage option is a missed opportunity, the ultra-wide camera still feels like an afterthought and the selfie camera's downgrade, while offset by autofocus and 4K video, may raise eyebrows.

But these are footnotes in what is otherwise a dominant performance. The Nord 6 doesn't just compete in the Rs35,000–45,000 segment, it sets the terms of competition. If you want raw benchmark bragging rights, there may still be alternatives. But if you want the phone that does everything well, lasts for days, games like a flagship and is built to survive years of daily use, the Nord 6 is the phone to beat. OnePlus hasn't just raised the bar for the Nord series, it's raised it for the entire mid-range category.

The Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus might have come out of the blue, but it feels like the desktop Arrow Lake part that should have arrived first. It’s not exactly the clean-sheet rethink of Intel’s mainstream performance formula but it certainly does come across as a more assertive version of it. The Core Ultra 7 270K Plus brings the core count up to 24 with an 8-Performance plus 16-Efficiency core layout, keeps boost clocks high, and leans on platform refinements such as faster die-to-die communication and Intel’s new Binary Optimization Tool to shore up gaming and responsiveness. From our testing, the 270K Plus is clearly competitive in productivity, and far more convincing than the first wave of desktop Core Ultra chips, even if it still does not flatten AMD’s best X3D parts in every gaming scenario. However, when you put the pricing and performance together, you’ve got an underdog in the making.

Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus Specifications

The Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus is part of the desktop Arrow Lake refresh part launched on 23, March 2026. It packs 24 cores and 24 threads, split between 8 Performance cores and 16 Efficient cores, with a maximum turbo frequency of 5.5 GHz. The P-cores top out at 5.4 GHz, while the E-cores reach 4.7 GHz. Cache allocation is healthy too, with 36 MB of Intel Smart Cache and 40 MB of total L2 cache. Base power is rated at 125 W, while maximum turbo power reaches 250 W, which immediately tells you this is not a timid mid-range part.

Memory support goes up to DDR5-7200, the CPU exposes 24 PCIe lanes across PCIe 5.0 and 4.0, and it continues to use the LGA1851 platform. There is integrated graphics on board, plus a 13 TOPS Intel AI Boost NPU, while total platform AI throughput is rated at 36 TOPS. On sheer specification density, this is closer to an enthusiast chip wearing a slightly more sensible price tag.

Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus Test Rig

The review unit was tested on Gigabyte’s Z890 AORUS PRO ICE motherboard with 64GB of G.Skill Trident Z5 memory running at 7200 MT/s in a 2x 32 GB configuration. Storage duties were handled by a Kingston Renegade PCIe Gen 4.0 SSD, while cooling came from the Corsair iCUE Link Titan X360 RX LCD, which is a sensible pairing for a desktop processor that can pull up to 250W at full tilt. Power was supplied by the Cooler Master MWE Gold 850 V2. It is a well-balanced, modern test platform that gives the 270K Plus the kind of memory bandwidth and thermal headroom it needs to show what it can do without obvious platform bottlenecks getting in the way. Here’s the full specs:

• CPU: Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus
• Motherboard: Z890 AORUS PRO ICE
• RAM: 2x G.Skill Trident Z5 32 GB 7200 MT/s
• SSD: Kingston Renegade PCIe Gen 4.0 SSD
• Cooler: Corsair iCUE Link Titan X360 RX LCD
• PSU: Cooler Master MWE Gold 850 V2

Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus Performance

Cinebench 2024

Cinebench 2024 is based on Maxon's Cinema 4D software, designed to evaluate a processor's performance in rendering complex 3D scenes. It tests both single-core and multi-core capabilities, highlighting how efficiently a CPU handles multi-threaded tasks common in professional rendering workflows. The benchmark utilizes modern instruction sets and large datasets, providing an up-to-date assessment of CPU performance in contemporary applications.

Cinebench R23

Cinebench R23 is the older version based on the same Cinema 4D engine and it too measures a processor's ability to render photorealistic 3D scenes. Though replaced by Cinebench 2024, we retain it to compare against processors launched a few years prior. It also focuses on both single-threaded and multi-threaded performance, simulating real-world tasks relevant to content creators and professionals in 3D rendering.

Blender

The Blender Benchmark assesses a processor's performance by rendering scenes using Blender, a popular open-source 3D creation suite. It evaluates both CPU and GPU capabilities in handling complex rendering tasks. This benchmark provides insights into how well a processor performs in real-world 3D modeling, animation, and rendering scenarios. An interesting aspect is that it highlights the efficiency of different CPU architectures in multi-threaded workloads, as Blender can effectively utilize multiple cores. It's particularly useful for professionals and enthusiasts relying on Blender, indicating how hardware upgrades might impact workflow efficiency and rendering times.

V-Ray

V-Ray is another benchmark that measures a processor's performance in rendering but it uses the V-Ray engine, widely used in visual effects, architecture, and design industries. It tests both CPU and GPU rendering capabilities, focusing on multi-threaded performance and handling complex calculations involved in ray tracing. CPUs with higher core counts and multi-threading technology tend to excel here as V-Ray efficiently utilises available threads.

WinRAR

WinRAR Benchmark evaluates a processor's performance in data compression and decompression tasks, common in file archiving and management. It tests single-threaded performance, memory bandwidth, and latency, as these factors influence compression speed. While WinRAR isn't fully optimized for multi-core CPUs, processors with higher Instructions Per Cycle (IPC) and clock speeds perform better. For more modern algorithms, we use 7-Zip.

AIDA64

AIDA64 Memory Benchmark measures the memory bandwidth and latency of a system, highlighting how quickly data transfers between the CPU and RAM. It tests read, write, and copy speeds, providing insights into the efficiency of the memory subsystem, including RAM speed, timings, and memory controller performance. AIDA64 also has benchmarks to evaluate how well a processor can handle AES, ZLib and SHA3 encryption and decryption tasks.

y-cruncher

The y-cruncher benchmark computes mathematical constants like Pi to a high number of digits—in this case, 2.5 billion—testing a processor's multi-threaded performance and memory subsystem under heavy computational load. It stresses the CPU's integer and floating-point units, cache hierarchy, and memory bandwidth. It's particularly useful for evaluating system stability under sustained heavy workloads, making it valuable for users who are overclocking their systems.

Procyon Office

The Procyon Office Benchmark measures a processor's performance in real-world office applications like the Microsoft Office suite, testing tasks such as document editing, spreadsheet calculations, and presentation creation. It focuses on both single-threaded and multi-threaded performance, providing insights into how a CPU handles everyday productivity tasks.

Mozilla Kraken & Google Octane

Mozilla Kraken and Google Octane are JavaScript benchmarks evaluating a processor's performance in executing complex web-based scripts, reflecting real-world web application usage. It tests single-threaded performance and the efficiency of a CPU's instruction pipelines in handling dynamic scripting languages.

Procyon AI Computer Vision

The UL Procyon AI Computer Vision benchmark measures the performance of AI inference engines to understand how well processors can handle machine-vision tasks using popular neural networks.

3DMark Time Spy (iGPU)

3DMark Time Spy is a DirectX 12 benchmark evaluating graphics performance. We use it primarily to test the relative performance of the iGPU to discrete GPUs and where iGPUs stand amongst their peers. With both companies improving their integrated graphics stack, it allows us to measure how well the iGPU performs and if it can handle popular eSports titles.

Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus Thermals and Power

Thermally, the Core Ultra 7 270K Plus behaved better than its power envelope might suggest. In this setup, CPU package temperature averaged 57°C and peaked at 80°C, which is a tidy result for a desktop chip rated to turbo up to 250W.
Power figures were more revealing. Average package power came in at 230W, with a peak of 250W, effectively brushing right up against Intel’s official turbo ceiling. That tells the story of this processor rather neatly. The 270K Plus is willing to spend power to hold performance, and it expects the rest of the platform to keep up. The upside is that thermals remain manageable with a competent 360 mm liquid cooler. The downside is obvious too: this is not a chip for bargain cooling or casual airflow planning. It runs under control, but it absolutely likes to eat. Intel officially rates the part at 125 W base and 250 W maximum turbo power, and these readings line up very closely with that behaviour.

Verdict

The Intel Core Ultra 7 270K Plus lands as a much more convincing desktop Core Ultra processor than the 265K ever was. It looks stronger on paper, feels better balanced in the current desktop market, and brings the sort of multi-threaded weight and platform features that make sense in a premium mainstream build. It fixes several of the earlier chip’s weak spots, especially in productivity and in gaming uplift versus the original Arrow Lake desktop parts, though AMD’s X3D lineup still keeps a grip on the outright gaming crown in a fair number of titles. That said, this test unit’s thermal and power behaviour shows that Intel has achieved its gains by letting the chip run hard and demanding proper cooling. For builders who want a modern Intel desktop processor with high core counts, fast DDR5 support, integrated graphics, NPU capability and plenty of headroom for serious work, the 270K Plus is easy to take seriously. It is not flawless, but it is finally compelling.

I live in a typical DDA LIG flat. The living room TV is almost always occupied, mostly playing regional shows, news, or devotional content. If I wanted to watch something else, I had to rely on my laptop. It works, but it never feels as immersive as watching it on a big screen. That got me thinking: what if I could get a bigger screen for my bedroom? A TV was the obvious option, but then another question came up: what if I try a projector instead? There may be many of you in the same or a similar situation, considering or curious about a projector. Well, I spent time researching the category and also spoke with Rajeev Singh, Managing Director at BenQ. 

Around the same time, the company sent over the BenQ TK705STi, a premium 4K HDR short-throw projector priced at Rs 2,25,000. This is not an impulse buy for most people. But it represents what a high-end projector experience looks like today. So even if you are exploring cheaper options, this should give you a benchmark.

The BenQ projector came in for a few weeks, and here's my experience with it. Read on to find out if it made sense for me.

Design, setup, and connectivity

The BenQ TK705STi has a compact boxy cube form factor with 229.2 x 168.2 x 249.7 mm dimensions. It is made of a premium polycarbonate shell that looks and feels like metal. Also, possibly because of the plastic build, the thing weighs only 3.8 kg and can be moved between rooms without much effort. The power adapter is bulky and one more thing to carry along with the main machine.

The projector has built-in stands on top and bottom. On the base, there are three legs which can be rotated to lengthen their height. If you take them out completely, you can use the holes to mount it on a ceiling. You'll have to buy the ceiling mount separately. Neat! Meanwhile, to eject the top stand, you have to hold the projector upside down and press the oblong button on the back of the projector. At first, I didn't understand that these were cleverly stashed in. I followed BenQ's guides on YouTube to know how they work. Well, you can also refer to the videos on the company's official channel in case you have any doubts.

Prop it opposite a vacant wall or screen, connect it to a power source and use the remote to turn it on and manage the rest of the controls. The light and slim black controller resembles TV remotes. It has the buttons to control the projection's zoom, orientation, volume, and navigation. You also get Google Assistant and hotkeys for streaming platforms like Netflix, YouTube, Prime Video and Live TV. BenQ also allows remote control via a smartphone app. More on that later.

On the left side of the projector, you get the basic controls to use the projector. On the back side, you will see pores for heat dissipation. This silver colour, metallic finish and pores give it a very Apple Mac Pro-like industrial design. It looks very upstate.

Also Read: Hisense U7Q Mini LED TV review: Practical option under Rs 70,000 with fair trade-offs

On the back of the device, below the grille, there is a small cavity, where all of its ports are situated. You get the power port, 12V trigger, two HDMI 2.1 ports (one of which supports eARC 7.1 channel for soundbar), a 3.5mm audio output jack, USB-A 2.0 port for media sticks, and a USB-C (DP/PD charging at 30W) port. You can connect a laptop or handheld console like Nintendo Switch through this port for both display and charging purposes.

For wireless connectivity, it has dual-band Wi-Fi 6 (802.11ax) and Bluetooth 5.2. There is also support for Apple AirPlay and Google Cast, if you plan to cast something from your phone to this projection.

Software and performance

In regular use, I would just plug it in and play some content on YouTube or any of the streaming apps I subscribe to. The projector takes a few seconds to boot and reach the main Google TV homescreen. This is a familiar and simple UI. During the course of my usage, the projector received a 1.13GB system OTA update with some bug fixes and also a recent Android security patch.

I didn't encounter any major bug or hiccup. The UI and navigation felt smooth. I found the MediaTek MT9676 quad-core chipset paired with 2GB of RAM and 16GB of internal storage, fine. On a high-end TV that costs this much, I would expect stronger hardware, but this is the most you get on projectors around the Rs 200,000 price range.

As soon as we start the BenQ projector, the orientation is corrected. You can manually adjust it, but the auto keystone correction is fine if the machine is set flat on a surface. You can use the built-in stands to better angle the projection. TK705STi uses a ToF sensor and a built-in camera to understand how far it is placed from the wall, and corrects the orientation and focus.

Once that's all set, you can watch the content you like. Over long-term use, I didn't hear any noise. If you touch around the ventilation area, you'd find it a little warm. So, it handles heat and noise quite well. So, you can comfortably watch movies, series or even play games at 4K 60 fps. The rated input lag is 5ms, which should feel instant and ideal for fast-paced games. You also get ALLM (Auto Low Latency Mode) to prioritise speed over graphics. Overall, this should be suitable for casual console gamers.

Audiovisual quality

The BenQ TK705STi is branded as a 4K short-throw projector. It uses a 0.47-inch DLP projection chip/system and possibly pixel shifting to achieve a UHD (3840×2160) resolution. It can project up to a 150-inch image from a range of 2 meters (about 6 feet). You can zoom out for a smaller-sized image, too. At smaller sizes, the picture looks sharper. The larger sizes, like 100 or 150 inches, are immersive, but sharpness and contrast fall slightly short of a good 4K TV.

It supports brightness of 3,000 ANSI lumens, and in a well-lit room, projected on an off-white wall, the image looks washed out. It is visible, but for something worth enjoying, you'll have to turn off the light in the room.

There is out-of-the-box support for 4K HDR playback on Netflix. You can watch HDR content on formats like HDR10, HDR10+ and HLG. The sharpness, details and contrast don't match the 4K TV I have, but it is still respectable. I had a fine experience bingeing the last few episodes of Fallout S02 on Amazon Prime Video. This was an HDR10+ content, and the difference was noticeable. But in the underwater scene in Mission: Impossible- Final Reckoning, where Tom Cruise’s character tries to escape from the falling submarine, the colours look fine, but I could not clearly make out the edges of the submarine, and there were some instances of banding in a few areas.

I was watching all content in Cinema mode, which has close-to-natural colours, among the available presets. This BenQ projector features 98% coverage of the Rec 709 gamut, which is the standard colour space for most streaming content.

Like in TVs, here too, I had MEMC turned off as I don't like the TV-serial-like smoothness in movies and other content I watch. But, if you like that, you can enable it in the expert display settings.

As for audio, the dual 8W speakers are loud enough for room use, and dialogue comes through clearly. The bass, however, is only average. If you have a soundbar, it is better to connect it via HDMI to get fuller, uncompressed audio. Like picture modes, here too, I preferred the Cinema mode.

Should you buy the BenQ TK705STi?

The BenQ TK705STi projector is not trying to replace every TV. It is trying to solve a specific problem, getting a very large screen in a space where a traditional setup is not practical. Whether it makes sense depends on how you plan to use it.

If your situation is similar to mine, wherein you need a personal screen in the bedroom, but don't want to dedicate a space for a TV, a projector starts to make sense. You can place the BenQ projector on a table, project a 100-inch screen from a short distance, and have a private viewing setup without installing a large TV on the wall. When you don't want to use it, you can easily move it to a different spot.

While using the TK705STi, its Google TV interface, native Netflix support, and smooth day-to-day performance make it easy to use. You get 4K visuals with natural colours, good brightness for its class, and decent detail at typical viewing distances. It also works well if you are a console gamer. The low input lag and stable 4K 60 performance make gameplay feel responsive.

However, it is not built for competitive high refresh rate gaming. And for watching anything, the lighting conditions in the room matter a lot. For the best experience, you'll need to use it in a dark environment, which may not be something you always prefer. Also, if you are used to a good 4K TV, you will notice that sharpness, contrast, and black levels are not at the same level, especially at larger screen sizes. The audio output from its built-in speaker may also leave you wanting more. Well, the ports choice is plenty to plug in accessories or auxiliary devices like a speaker.

So, the BenQ TK705STi is a loaded projector and the best you can get for the asking price of Rs 2,25,000. It is worth considering if you understand what it is designed for. It doesn't beat a TV on all fronts. Instead, it offers a kind of convenience; a large, immersive screen in spaces where that would otherwise be difficult to achieve.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar review.

Also Read: BenQ EW270Q gaming monitor review: 2K at 200Hz under Rs 20,000

Samsung has come a long way with its flagship lineup. I still remember the time when choosing between Samsung phones was difficult and often a debate between the Note series and the S series. The Note stood out for its big and phablet-like design and the S Pen, while the S series always had an image of being an all-rounder, something which could do everything without leaning too much in one direction. Of course, things were not always this clean. We have seen Samsung experiment a lot in the past with Minis, Edge variants and even Duos.

But for me, things started to make more sense around 2017, when Samsung brought the ‘Galaxy S8 Plus’. The idea was simple: a bigger screen, better battery, but without the extra baggage. I ended up buying that phone and I still remember how smooth it felt and honestly, I would not mind seeing that curved display making a comeback.

Since then, I have used many Plus models as my primary devices, including the Galaxy S20 Plus and now the S23 Plus. And one thing that is consistent is how these phones manage to deliver a flagship experience without needing the Ultra tag and additional features.

Cut short to 2026, Samsung has introduced the Galaxy S26 series. The lineup looks familiar, but expectations are higher this time, specifically with claimed upgrades across performance, camera, design and of course, the higher price tag. Given my history with the Plus models, I decided to stick with the middle variant again and see how it holds up this time around and here is my take.

Galaxy S26 Plus: Design

Starting with the obvious, Samsung seems to be in no hurry to change its design formula. You get the same familiar glass-and-metal sandwich design, with Gorilla Glass Victus 2 on both the front and back, paired with an Armor Aluminium frame. The dimensions and 190-gram weight keep it firmly in line with previous Plus models. This means it is a large phone, but one that remains relatively slim and easy to carry. Adding on, it also carries an IP68 rating, so it is well protected against dust and can handle the occasional splash or accidental dip in water.

In everyday use, the Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus feels exactly how a flagship should. The in-hand feel is premium, the weight distribution is balanced and the slim profile makes it comfortable to hold for long periods. That said, if you have used the Galaxy S24 Plus or S25 Plus, this one will feel familiar, because in many ways, it is.

This time, Samsung has made a small visual tweak. The rear now has a new oval camera island that houses the triple camera setup, with flash sitting off the right side. It is not a big design change, but if you look with focus, you will notice the difference. But one practical downside, however, is a slight wobble when the phone is placed on a table or flat surface.

The finish, especially in colours like Cobalt Violet, looks premium and stands out without being too loud, but does attract smudges fairly easily, so you will likely end up using a case most of the time.

Galaxy S26 Plus: Display

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus has a big and, obviously, beautiful 6.7-inch screen that is hard to fault. It is sharp, bright and smooth, the kind of display that makes everything from casual scrolling to binge-watching feel fun. The 120Hz refresh rate keeps things fluid and the screen is smart enough to dial that down automatically to save battery when you do not need it.

Outdoors, the display holds up well. Samsung claims 2,600 nits of peak brightness and in real use, glare and harsh sunlight rarely pose a problem.

We also ran the Calman test using the SpectraCal C6 colorimeter and the results easily back up the claims I made above. Colours were accurate, whites are natural and blacks are deep. For most users, this means photos look true to life and videos look exactly as the creator intended. Speaking of the numbers, Average DeltaE 2000 was 2, Max DeltaE was 4.8, Gamut Coverage: 100% sRGB, Peak Brightness was 707 cd/m² (measured) and Black Luminance was 0 cd/m².

This means that what you will see on this screen is pretty much what is real. Skin tones, landscapes, documents, all rendered cleanly without any tint or colour push. In simple words, the display does not try to impress with oversaturated colours and just looks correct. I can say this because I spent some time watching YouTube, Netflix and a few matches of IPL 2026.

Galaxy S26 Plus: Performance

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus comes with the company’s in-house chip, but as has been the case with Samsung for a while now, the experience depends on where you are using the device. In India and most global markets, the phone offers an Exynos 2600 chipset built on 2nm fabrication, while regions like the US and China get the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5. Both are flagship-grade chips and are paired with modern CPU architecture and capable GPUs. It runs Android 16 with One UI 8.5, backed by an impressive promise of up to seven major Android updates.

Coming to day-to-day usage, the device feels like a proper flagship. Scrolling through Instagram, navigating through apps, or clicking photos while on the go, the device does not disappoint. Animations are also fluid, app launches are fast, and a general sense of polish makes the phone feel snappy.

Gaming performance is also reliable. The phone handles titles like BGMI without major frame drops. However, thermal management is an area where the device shows its limits under heavy load. During our testing, the slim aluminum frame became noticeably warm during extended sessions. This is something power users and gamers will notice when the hardware is pushed to its peak for long periods.

The Galaxy S26 Plus also posted steady numbers in a range of benchmarks. In Antutu, the device scored 31,57,198, along with 2,777 in Geekbench single-core and 9,718 in multi-core tests. In GPU-heavy workloads, it managed 6,810 in 3DMark Wildlife Extreme, while PCMark Work 3.0 returned a score of 20,367. Again, these are solid numbers, keeping it competitive within this price bracket.

However, sustained performance is where the Galaxy S26 Plus finds its ceiling. In our CPU throttling test, the device retained around 63 per cent of its peak performance. This indicates the system is prioritising stability by dialing back performance under extended load to manage the thermals, which is a common trade-off in thin and modern flagships.

Galaxy S26 Plus: Battery

Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus sticks with a familiar battery. It packs a 4,900mAh battery, paired with 45W wired charging, 20W wireless charging and 4.5W reverse wireless charging. On paper, this is identical to what we saw in the previous generation, which means expectations are more about consistency than improvement.

In real-world use, the battery performance is reliable. In our PCMark Battery Life test, the device lasted 19 hours and 40 minutes. With a typical mix of social media, camera use, streaming and some gaming, the phone lasts well without requiring a mid-day top-up.

Charging speeds remain decent, but again, unchanged. Using Samsung’s 45W charger, the Galaxy S26 Plus takes around 72 minutes to go from 0 to 100 per cent. Wireless charging support adds convenience and reverse wireless charging can still come in handy for topping up accessories like earbuds or smartwatches.

Galaxy S26 Plus: Camera

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus carries forward a camera setup that feels very familiar on paper. You get a triple-camera system headlined by a 50MP primary sensor, supported by a 10MP telephoto lens with 3x optical zoom and a 12MP ultra-wide camera. Features like OIS across key lenses, Super Steady video and support for up to 8K video recording with HDR10+ ensure that this is still a flagship-grade imaging system, at least in terms of capability.

In real-world use, the main camera continues to be the most reliable of the three. Daylight shots come out sharp, with good detail and balanced colours that do not feel overly processed. It’s the kind of camera you can trust for everyday photography without needing to tweak settings.

Low-light performance has also seen some improvement compared to previous generations. Images are brighter, cleaner and often capture more detail than what your eyes might pick up in darker scenes, which makes night photography more usable than before.

The 3x telephoto lens remains a strong point. It delivers natural-looking colours, decent subject separation and fairly clean edge detection. For casual portrait photography, you can expect a good job.

On the video side, Samsung continues to impress with its feature-rich experience. The features like Horizon Lock are genuinely useful, especially for handheld or on-the-move shooting, helping keep footage stable and level. The ability to shoot in 8K gives users flexibility, although these modes are still more niche than everyday features.

The selfie camera is also decent for everyday use. You may see the portrait edge detection occasionally appearing a bit soft. But, overall, it gets the job done.

Samsung’s AI-powered editing tools are also quite useful. Features like object removal and generative edits are fun to use and work reasonably well for casual edits, but results can be inconsistent and sometimes lean towards looking slightly unnatural.

Galaxy S26 Plus: Verdict

The Samsung Galaxy S26 Plus feels like a phone that’s confident in what it is, sticking to a formula that works. It delivers a well-rounded flagship experience, focusing on reliability and balance in an increasingly competitive segment.

On one hand, there is a lot to like here. The design remains premium and durable, maintaining a classic aesthetic that has aged well. The display continues to be one of Samsung’s strongest assets: accurate, bright and consistently reliable across different use cases. In day-to-day usage, the phone performs exactly as you would expect from a flagship, with smooth navigation, stable gaming performance and a software experience that feels polished and long-term ready, especially with the promise of 7 years of software updates.

However, you also need to see that the Galaxy S26 Plus prioritises refinement over some drastic and radical change. Performance, while strong, is tuned for efficiency, and the slim chassis means the device manages sustained loads by balancing output. The camera system, despite being reliable and capable, stays true to the hardware seen in previous generations. It delivers good results, providing a familiar experience for users upgrading from older Plus models. Battery life is also dependable, maintaining the standard set by its predecessors.

Ultimately, the Galaxy S26 Plus is a safe, dependable flagship. It doesn’t try to reinvent the formula, and for many users, that consistency will be a strength. It may come across as a device that is perfecting its current ground, making it a solid choice for those who value a predictable, high-quality experience over experimental features.

Delhi is finally starting to warm up, and I don't say this in a happy mood. Currently, in early April, the temperature is around 32°C, and ceiling fans have begun to fall short. At the same time, switching on an AC for long hours still feels excessive. In my case, we use air coolers at our home. My relation with air coolers goes back a long way to my childhood and a time when we didn't have ACs. I’m sure many of you can also relate to this. While the old school coolers were big chunky metal boxes placed outside the windows, taking up a lot of space in our balconies sometimes, the new ones are lighter and more portable. They come in different sizes, shapes and colours to match our indoor space and ambience. 

I already have a 90L and a 43L cooler for two of our rooms. And I recently got this Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 desert cooler from the brand, which, as the name suggests, is also a 90L cooler. I used it in two rooms, sized about 14x10 ft and 18x12 ft, for several days and nights. So, in case you are wondering if it makes sense to buy a room cooler this big this summer, let me take you through my experience.

Design and first-time setup

As I have already mentioned, the Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 is a big 90L cooler. But at 24kg (without water inside) it is not too heavy. I unpacked it with my brother's help. The side panels with the honeycomb filter came in pre-installed. I only had to screw in its trolley stand. That's it. Simply move it towards a power socket and plug it in. With the four sturdy wheels at the bottom, the cooler is very portable.

Filling the 90-litre tank took about 7 minutes using a continuous water source. Well, based on the force of the water, this could change a bit. There is a long, roughly 10-inch translucent water level indicator on the front of the tank area. It is legible, and you also get an 'Overflow' sticker as a marking to avoid overfilling in a hurry. Instead of a sticker, if it had been an engraving, that would have been better.

Another minor qualm is with how tightly the refill inlet and side panels are fitted. This small tray in front of the cooler, through which you insert a pipe to fill the tank, is tough to pull out. Similarly, when I tried pulling out the back panel, it was very tight. These things may loosen up with time, but it's just something you ought to know. The first time you try to open them, in case they feel jammed, just apply some force, and they will open.

But, overall, the Kenstar cooler's build quality is solid. As mentioned already, the wheels can handle the weight of the filled cooler well. A lean guy like me could also move it around with a tinge of effort. Still, while moving it around, be careful of its stature. You don't want to hit and damage the corners of your wall or anything. In any case, if its placement is decided, you shall push down the wheel brake/lock/stopper. The stopper is metallic with angular edges, and you don't want to accidentally scrape your leg on it.

Back to the cooler design, the Maha Kool HC 90 comes in this cool, slate grey colour, which has a very muted and industrial feel to it. This is less likely to appear dirty compared to a white or some bright coloured coolers. Whether it suits your indoor decor is a different question. I leave that decision to you.

The honeycomb pads are of a turquoise blue shade and blend well with the grey-toned chassis. Rest everything from the 45cm fan, and the vertically movable flaps match the aesthetic. You only have the Maha Kool 90 branding, 5-star BEE rating sticker and the Kenstar logo around the three rotary knobs. These knobs situated on its forehead are for: Power (On/Off), Function (Swing, Cool-Swing, Cool, Off) and Speed (High, Medium, Low, Off), respectively. Nothing fancy. They just work reliably. No remote included, and honestly, I don't feel the need.

Kenstar Maha Kool 90: Cooling experience

Since it isn't that hot in Delhi now, I was using the Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 at its lowest settings. But that gives an idea of the bare minimum experience we can expect. So, I ran it in Cool-Swing settings and sometimes Cool with the speed at low mode. Sometimes, for testing, I had it on simple Swing and also ran it on higher speeds.

Regardless of the speed, cooling starts quickly. It does its job of cooling the air in the room within a few minutes. You feel it more if you are sitting adjacent to the cooler and facing the direct airflow. I am used to speed as I already have a 90L model from a competing brand. But this one's size is bigger, and the performance is slightly better. My brother, who has the smaller 43L cooler, noticed the difference the first time we switched it on.

Kenstar has equipped this biggie with its proprietary ProForce cooling technology. That, with the double-bearing motor and the 18-inch fan, claims a 50ft throw. That's peak figure, possibly achievable in lab conditions, and in a real-world closed room, at about 15 ft, you feel the force of the air the most. If you move further, say at around 20ft, you'll need to turn on the Medium mode, and if you move past that, you'll need the High mode. The max, I could feel the cool air up to 22ft.

If you are in proximity, the higher speeds feel aggressive for this temperature. But, I am sure, they will come in handy soon. Oh, well, most of India is going to have sizzling hot and humid months ahead.

You can adjust the direction of the wind to some extent using the vertical and horizontal louvres (the flaps). The horizontal louvres have two halves. The one facing the user is fixed, and its other interior half is movable. This design choice may be for the durability of the flap, but it may bounce off some of the air. But since the cooler's big opening on the front, the airflow should still be plenty.

Speaking of airflow, the honeycomb pads on the three sides are said to be better than regular aspen pads. The latter are the pads made out of wood shavings, which you may have seen on older coolers.

In case it is your first time using a cooler, know that ventilation matters a lot for its operation. With windows closed, the room could feel humid during heavy summers. Keep a door or window open, so that the cooling stays effective and you feel more comfortable.

Also Read: Haier 1.6 Ton Kinouchi 5 Star Intelli Smart Split AC Review – A reliable performer with smart convenience

Other usage aspects

One thing that stood out was water consumption. Remember, the Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 is a 90L cooler, and I have been using it in mildly warm weather. Say, I use it for an afternoon nap, taking about 4 hours, the water level would drop by less than an inch on the indicator. A full night's sleep would mean the water level dips by an inch. So, it can easily last multiple days and nights of use. The cooler isn't very aggressive with water usage in these conditions. But its mileage may vary over time.

Still and all, its size is an advantage over smaller coolers.

The big cooler with higher speeds also means louder noise. The 'brrr' sound, which is typical of a cooler, gets stronger as you move from low to medium to high. Unlike an AC, there is a constant presence with the sound of the fan and water circulation. Again, it is common with coolers, and despite it, your sleep won't be affected.

It is just that if you are using a light blanket, it will likely get pushed around. But that's also my fight with physics and not this particular cooler's fault.

What it is missing, though, is an ice chamber on the top, a mosquito net, and humidity control. My other cooler has an ice holder, but I hardly use it and don't think it makes a major difference in extreme summers. I haven't experienced a humidity controller yet. So, can't comment on its effectiveness or the lack of it here. Finally, I doubt whether the external filters and nets impact the air throw. All in all, I don't really miss these absent features.

Last but not least, the Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 is rated to consume 230W of power, and it is compatible with an inverter, in case you live in an area with frequent power cuts or fluctuations. The BEE 5-star rating is assuring for its power efficiency and long-term savings due to this. Speaking of this, the 5-year warranty on the motor and pump is good to have. But you will be eligible for it only if you register for it within the first three months of purchase. Something to keep in mind!

Should you buy Kenstar Maha Kool 90?

The merits are clear. The Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 is a high-capacity cooler with strong airflow, good air circulation, a large 90L tank that lasts long, and simple, reliable controls. It cools very well, runs on low power, and is easy to move around despite its size. The sturdy wheels and water level indicator are practical features.

So, in regular use, it delivers where it matters. For larger rooms or spaces with good ventilation, it should fit well. If you don’t have an AC or don’t want to run one, you can use such a cooler for spot cooling in a dry, low-humidity climate. 

There are a few things to be aware of, though. The airflow can feel strong in smaller rooms, especially if you are close to it. While it's working, there is some noise, especially as you go higher in speed. It doesn't have bells and whistles like an ice chamber or a mosquito net. And the water inlet tray is a little hard to pull out, at least in my unit.

However, these do not take away from the core experience, i.e., cooling. As a cooler under Rs 15,000, the Kenstar Maha Kool HC 90 offers solid, dependable performance. If you want a big cooler for your domestic or commercial space, it is worth considering. And if you want something smaller, you may check out other models from the brand.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Best desert air coolers in 2026: Top picks for powerful summer cooling

The timing of the Samsung Galaxy A37 launch couldn’t have been more peculiar. For all we know, the Galaxy A3x devices have usually launched in the ballpark of around Rs 35,000. All of a sudden, in 2026, the top variant of the new A37 is priced at over Rs 50,000. You read that right. The Galaxy A37 5G price in India starts at Rs 41,999 for the base 8GB RAM + 128GB storage, while the 8GB + 256GB option costs Rs 47,499. The top-end 12GB RAM + 256GB storage is priced in India at Rs 52,999. But, all of this isn’t simply a price hike; there’s more to it. Let me explain.

If you have been living under a rock, the prices of components have significantly risen because of the growing demand in AI. Processors, memory chips and the likes, cost a lot more in 2026, compared to last year. In fact, by the end of 2025, when news started coming that phone prices would be going up, I remember reading about what Xiaomi Group President, Lu Weibing, had to say. In his official statement from November 2025, he clearly warned that all phones would get expensive in 2026. Following this, when phones started releasing earlier this year, I also remember the Realme 16 Pro (currently priced starting at Rs 35,999) being called out for being overpriced. What followed was a flurry of devices that have been released in 2026 up until now, all of them attached with a good enough price hike that you just can’t ignore. None has been spared.

Which brings us back to the Galaxy A37. Yes, the prices have increased, but we also have to understand that, sadly, this is the new normal. Unless and until the component pricing situation is sorted, the prices will keep on going up. For instance, the phones, which used to cost around Rs 10,000, are suddenly priced at around Rs 15,000-16,000. The ones costing around Rs 30,000 now cost around Rs 40,000 and so on.

Yes, phone brands could also take a hit on their profits so that the consumer doesn’t have to bear the brunt of it. But that’s a conversation for another day.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy A57 in Digit Test Labs: Slimmer, smarter, but is it enough

For now, with the price hike situation out of the way, if you have a budget of around Rs 40,000 to Rs 50,000, and if you are planning to get the Galaxy A37, what exactly makes it special? There are quite a lot of things that I like about this phone, and some I don’t. Here’s my full review.

Galaxy A37: How good is the in-hand feel?

To straight away answer the question in the subhead, the in-hand feel is quite good. As I mentioned in my first impressions of the Galaxy A37 (read it here), I am quite impressed with the phone’s ergonomics and how it looks.

The design unification strategy is seen in full swing here. The Galaxy A37 got the looks of the flagship S26 series, but you can get this one at a relatively affordable price. I absolutely love the lavender purple finish here. I think the black colour is also quite cool. Unlike the flagship S series, which has a matte rear panel, the Galaxy A37 features a mirror-like glossy rear finish. The purple version, since it’s a light colour, does a very good job of hiding the smudges. I am not so sure about the black colour, though. You’ll have to slap a case on it.

The button placement is just where I want it, and they have good tactile feedback. The optical fingerprint sensor has the perfect placement. Of course, I would’ve loved it if it could be placed slightly above, as Samsung places its ultrasonic fingerprint readers in the S series phones. But this still works. Also, the haptics are pretty nice and crisp.

And, partly the reason why my experience is positive with this phone also lies in the fact that I am coming from the Galaxy A35. That changes it all. Because, while an A36 user may not be able to see a big difference here, folks who have older models will definitely appreciate the attention to detail. For instance, something I also mentioned in my first impressions (second shameless plug), the Galaxy A37 is quite slim, which totally adds to how the phone sits in the hand. The edges around the corners are soft. The glass back (protected by Gorilla Glass Victus+) adds to the premiumness. I also didn’t miss the metal rails here. Of course, that would’ve been a plus, but the polycarbonate frame is what I feel also helps in keeping the weight in check. At the same time, it feels dense, so definitely a good quality frame we are looking at here.

Overall, design-wise, there are no complaints. The Galaxy A37 looks good, the choice of materials is great, and the button placement also works. The dust and water resistance is also bumped to IP68.

Now, only if the chin at the bottom bezel were also uniform as the rest of the front profile, that would’ve sealed the deal. Which brings my attention to…

The display and the typical Samsung experience

One area where Samsung always excels is in the display and the overall multimedia experience. On the Galaxy A37, we are looking at this gorgeous 6.7-inch Full HD+ panel with a 120Hz refresh rate and Gorilla Glass Victus+ protection. And this is the kind of screen that doesn’t brag about having a crazy 5,000 nits brightness or some other fancy tech, which only sounds good in name. Instead, it simply delivers.

Is it sharp? Yes. Does it offer good colour and contrast? Well, the natural and vivid screen modes are calibrated for 100 per cent sRGB and DCI-P3 colour spaces, respectively. My point is, colours look fantastic on this panel, and by the way, you get all the extra goodies such as eye comfort and vision booster.

Also, when it comes to the brightness, I am not going to talk about the peak numbers. We all know, brands can always brag about having 4,000 nits, 5,000 nits, 6,000 nits and so on as peak brightness, but that’s only for a very small window of the screen or even just a pixel. In fact, I don’t even know what the peak brightness of the Galaxy A37 is or if Samsung even tells us that. What I know is that I tested the phone’s display in the Digit Test Labs, and it reached a solid 1,937 nits of HDR brightness. Yes, there’s support for HDR10+ as well, just in case you thought otherwise.

Basically, the Galaxy A37 offers a brilliant display experience. You’ll love it if you enjoy watching content on your phone. For that matter, the stereo speakers are also very solid and get quite loud without sounding shrill.

Galaxy A37: How’s the performance in day to day use?

Without beating around the bush, the Galaxy A37 performs reasonably well in day to day usage. But you also need to ask yourselves, what’s the definition of a solid performance? Because, let’s clear this out, this is a mass market device. While you do get devices in this price segment that offer stronger hardware, the question remains: which phone is the end consumer actually buying?

In recent years, the Galaxy A3x and A5x phones have generated good interest, and I say this in terms of actual sales numbers too. The primary reason for this is the reliability and the familiarity that come with a Galaxy smartphone.

In the case of the Galaxy A37, it is powered by the 4nm Exynos 1480 chip, paired with up to 12GB LPDDR5X RAM and 256GB UFS 3.1 storage. I would’ve loved to see UFS 4.0 storage here, but UFS 3.1 is also good enough, and with the LPDDR5X RAM combined, the speed and responsiveness, especially coming from the A35 or even the A36, is pretty noticeable. In my personal experience, I’ve never experienced an A3x phone being this fast and responsive.

In day-to-day use, app opening times, along with app switching, are fast. Animations and transitions are fluid and snappy. Basically, you just feel the smoothness whenever you’re interacting with the screen, hitting a menu, scrolling in the browser and so on.

There’s One UI 8.5 atop Android 16 here, with a promise of 6 years of software updates (main OS + security patches). It’s a familiar user experience for me, especially when my main phone is a Galaxy S26 Ultra. Of course, when I say a familiar user experience, it doesn’t mean all the features from the S26 series are present here. Think about it like this: the Galaxy A37 brings a lot of those essential features over from its flagship S26 siblings, especially when it comes to how the software looks and feels.

For instance, I use a lot of AI Select on the Galaxy S26 Ultra. For those who don’t know this feature, you can imagine it as Circle to Search (which is also here, by the way), but on steroids. Or the voice transcription feature in the recorder app. You don’t know how handy it becomes to record interviews and not rely on third-party apps for transcriptions. The Galaxy A37 does it for free. Then, there’s the new and improved Bixby, which understands natural language. And I know, it can’t match the finesse of a Gemini or ChatGPT, but it is not intended to. For on-device stuff like looking for a setting, or changing the alarm, or putting a reminder, the general stuff, Bixby now does it better and faster, by just giving a simple voice command. It’s quite convenient.

As for the gaming prowess, the AMD Xclipse 530 GPU offers decent mid-range gaming performance. I won’t call it the best in the segment; if you want that, you buy one of the Chinese gaming-focused phones. But, for its target consumer, who would mostly want their phone for casual gaming, the Galaxy A37 would suffice. In my testing, the Galaxy A37 was able to run games such as Asphalt: Legends, BGMI and Call of Duty: Mobile, at 60 fps, with minimal frame drops during long sessions. Do note that the GPU is capable of 90 fps gaming too, but that totally depends on the game updates and developer optimisation.

Galaxy A37: Primary and selfie cameras do the heavy lifting

The Galaxy A37 sticks with a triple-rear camera system: a 50MP primary sensor, an 8MP ultra-wide, and a 5MP macro snapper. For selfies, you get a 12MP front-facing camera. On the video front, both the front and rear setups support up to 4K at 30 fps.

On paper, this is essentially the same hardware we saw on last year’s Galaxy A36. However, the real magic happens behind the scenes with the improved ISP, thanks to that Exynos 1480 chip. Because of that extra brainpower, I found the performance from the main and selfie cameras to be quite reliable.

In good light, you really can’t complain. I found that the camera consistently nails it when it comes to preserving fine details and punchy colours. The dynamic range is also spot on; even when I was shooting directly against the sun, the sensor did a fine job of lifting the shadows so the darker areas didn't just turn into a black blob.

I’m also happy with how it handles people. Skin tones look natural and accurate, though I did notice the edge detection in portrait mode can sometimes be a bit aggressive with the sharpness. It’s not a deal-breaker, but it’s there if you look closely.

Low-light performance is surprisingly decent, too. I’m mostly talking about the main sensor here, but I love how it keeps things looking natural rather than over-processing the night into day.

That said, the ultra-wide camera is just ‘okay’. The plus side is that the colour science almost matches the main lens, as in you won't see a jarring shift in tones when you zoom out. It gets the job done in good light, but once the sun goes down, the images definitely start to look a bit soft.

As for the selfie camera, it’s a solid performer. My facial textures stayed intact without that weird, oversharpened ‘digital’ look, and skin tones remained true to life.

Why the 5,000mAh battery just works

I think with the battery capacity in phones, Samsung phones have hit a ceiling. The Galaxy A37 comes with a 5,000mAh unit under the hood, paired with 45W charging. First things first, this battery, paired with the optimisation that comes with the Exynos 1480 chip, makes it an easy one-day phone. And I am sure you may question, why doesn’t Samsung go with a higher capacity silicon-carbon battery like its competitors? For starters, the silicon-carbon tech is still in the nascent stage, and its long-term durability is still somewhat of a question. Instead, something that I also mentioned in my review of the Galaxy S26 Ultra is that Samsung’s lithium-ion solution is a proven one. We know it’ll hold up for three or four years without a massive drop-off.

Of course, as I just mentioned, this is easily a one-day phone. And that’s what really matters. Once fully charged in the morning, it can easily give you great mileage throughout the day without battery anxiety. Also, with 45W wired charging, it takes a little over an hour for the phone to fully charge, 67 minutes to be precise (as tested). But, even if you charge your phone for about 30 minutes, that too replenishes the tank from 0 to about 65 per cent, which is more than enough to last you a full work day.

Galaxy A37: Final verdict

Look, there is no getting around the fact that this is a massive price jump for an A3x device. But once you actually hold the thing, all of it starts making sense. For starters, the Galaxy A37 shares enough DNA with the S26 series that it doesn’t feel like an ‘affordable’ alternative anymore. Also, between the IP68 rating and a display that’s genuinely great for content consumption, the Galaxy A37 feels solid and premium in a way that many mid-rangers usually don't.

Of course, if raw benchmark scores are something that matters to you most, then you’ll find faster Chinese handsets that offer more ‘bang for your buck’ on paper. But for most of the folks out there, the Galaxy A37 is simply the reliable pick that won’t give you a headache. The One UI software experience is clean, the main camera is surprisingly consistent, and the battery life easily gets me through a full day.

In short, the Galaxy A37 is a polished, predictable daily driver that’s easy to live with, if your wallet can stomach the new normal.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro review: A strong premium pick, especially for Galaxy users

I have been a longtime Samsung Galaxy Buds 2 user, and it works great with my Galaxy S23. So, when I got the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro from the brand, I switched. I have been using the newcomer for a few weeks now, and although my first 24-hour impressions have been positive but incomplete, I now have a lot more to share. The new pair is priced at Rs 22,999, and Samsung is pitching it as its premium earbuds for the year with a dual-driver setup, enhanced ANC, and deeper integration with Galaxy devices through high-resolution audio support and easy software customisation. And so the test was to see how well it competes in this price range. 

The Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro have been my close companion for a week now, and here's my review of how they fare in sound quality, noise handling, battery life, connectivity, and overall usability in the real world.

Galaxy Buds 4 Pro: Design and comfort

As mentioned in my first impressions piece, the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro have a distinct design. That includes its squricle case with a transparent lid and the earbuds themselves with their flat stem and brushed metal finish. So far, the buds look just as new due to this finish and like I said in my impressions, the case has a jewellery-box-like aesthetic, which by the way, is a bit thick but won’t hamper everyday portability.

As for the earbuds, they are quite lightweight and stay securely in the ear. These are among the few earbuds I felt comfortable wearing while commuting or stepping out.

Samsung offers its premium earbuds in multiple colours: The black colour that we have, a white variant and a pink gold option for a warm and elegant look. You are not limited to one colour, like in the case of the AirPods.

Samsung's case has the brand logo and an LED indicator on the front, and the back has a USB-C port and a pairing/resetting button.

Although the case is not easy to open one-handed, the lid opening and closing action feels more premium and satisfying.

Besides looks and comfort, the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro pinch and swipe-based controls are easy to manoeuvre. I feel this approach is better than the tap/press-based controls, as you don't have to push the earbuds deeper into the ear.

And finally, for durability assurance, Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro are IP57 rated, which means they can take some rain, sweat, splash and even accidental submersion.

Galaxy Buds 4 Pro: Connectivity and performance

I paired the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro with my Galaxy S23, a Pixel 10, and my MacBook Air 13 (M1). No issues with the setup process. In everyday use, the general connectivity and range were stable over Bluetooth 6.1.

Once set up, on Samsung phones like the Galaxy S23, you can control the earbuds' settings through the Bluetooth menu itself. And on non-Samsung phones, you'll have to access the settings through the Wearables app and the Galaxy Buds module, both of which are available on the Google Play Store.

The Samsung phones also offer more features like 360 audio, loudness normalisation, Ultra High Quality (24-bit/96kHz audio via Samsung's codec), Adapt Sound, and app sound settings. This isn't a deal breaker though, as their absence doesn't spoil the Buds 4 Pro sound experience.

There are ample toggles and controls in the Wearables app. My only qualm is that the pinch and hold controls are limited to switching noise modes, triggering Google and opening Spotify. I would appreciate it if Samsung added an option to change volume or playback with this action. The pinch and swipe controls are intuitive enough, but I don't mind more options. Samsung software is known for an abundance of options.

But the one feature I miss the most is standard Bluetooth multipoint. Samsung allow auto switching, but it works between devices signed in the same Samsung account. This affects users who work across non-Samsung laptop and phone setups.

Other features, like in-ear detection, 360 Sound with head tracking, Auracast, the 9-band equaliser, and the different preset profiles, worked reliably. No problem. I appreciate Samsung for the Loudness Normalisation feature and the Adapt Sound option, as I'll take anything that saves my ear health. Stop using earbuds isn't an option for me. Lol.

Also Read: Noise Master Buds 2 review: Do they stand out in a competitive market?

Galaxy Buds 4 Pro: Sound quality

The Galaxy Buds 4 Pro come with a dual-driver or 2-way speaker setup. There is a woofer for handling bass and a tweeter for handling treble. Samsung phones get the proprietary codec-based UHQ sound, but if you stream on Spotify or YouTube, this won't make a notable difference.

What matters, though, is the engaging sound you get out of the box on the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro. It offers sharper detail and stronger separation than AirPods Pro 3 (review), but it can feel slightly aggressive at times.

Both earbuds handle high frequencies well, with a good amount of detail in the upper range. On the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro, highs come through sharper and more pronounced. In tracks like 'November' by Max Richter and 'Goshintai' by Radwimps, the violin reaches higher and feels more cutting, while in 'Dawn Of The Iconoclaust' by Dead Can Dance, the upper vocal layers feel more spread out and elevated.

In the low end, the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro deliver tighter and more impactful bass. In 'Bad Guy' by Billie Eilish, the hits feel sharper and more defined, and the claps in 'Rang De Lal' from Dhurandhar land with more force.

With complex tracks like 'Pull Me Under' by Dream Theater, the AirPods tend to blend elements together, where beats can slightly overpower vocals. The Galaxy Buds 4 Pro offer better separation, making it easier to pick apart instruments and notice finer details. Even distortion is well controlled on the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro in songs like 'Centuries' by Fall Out Boy.

In another dense track like 'Selkies' by Between the Buried and Me, the Galaxy Buds capture more instrument detail than the AirPods, but at times this can feel slightly overwhelming or a bit harsh on the ears.

Still, I'd say the tuning handles vocals well, and instruments carry ample details. The soundstage is spacious with good positioning. And if you are streaming videos or playing online games, the latency is also under check. I didn't face any syncing issues in my use.

Galaxy Buds 4 Pro: Noise cancellation and call clarity

This was one area I was most interested in testing, as I tend to use my earbuds a lot at the office, while commuting, etc. And I must say, the ANC performance on this buds is strong. I was listening at the max setting most of the time and occasionally dabbled around with the adaptive mode.

The Galaxy Buds 4 Pro dampen low-frequency noise very well, such as traffic, AC hum, and general background chatter. But, there is slight dark noise pressure, and some voices and sudden sounds can still come through. This is noticeable when you look for it with the music off. So, it shouldn't be a problem.

On the other hand, the Ambient Sound mode is also impressive. There is minimal hiss, but conversations and surrounding sounds come through pretty clearly. It is therefore highly usable.

As for calls, I again have good things to say. Samsung uses a 6-mic setup and AI-based voice isolation, which enables clear calls for both parties.

Galaxy Buds 4 Pro: Battery life and charging

Battery life is decent. In our internal test with AAC, 80 per cent volume and ANC off, we got around 6 hours 45 minutes of runtime. Since some people may listen to stuff at a lower volume, the Buds 4 Pro could even last longer up to the 7-hour mark, too. Likewise, the mileage may vary as ANC and other settings are changed. Anyways, it should be plenty for a workday.

And thanks to the charging case, you can get anywhere between 26 and 30 hours of total playback depending on the settings you choose. Again, this is longer than what Apple claims with the AirPods Pro 3.

You can use a USB-C charger to quickly top it up or use a wireless charger. So, again, you've got options.

Should you buy Galaxy Buds 4 Pro?

The Samsung Galaxy Buds 4 Pro are a solid upgrade and a well-rounded option in the premium segment. They offer a distinct and comfortable design, engaging and impactful sound, strong noise cancellation, great call quality, and a feature-rich app with meaningful customisation.

Well, some of these features work best or work at all with a Samsung device. Or you could say the full experience unlocks on Samsung phones. And overall, the restrictions are less limiting than Apple's. Also, I would have appreciated it if Samsung had given more control options.

But what you get here is more than enough for most users. You get granular EQ support and features like Auracast that something like the AirPods Pro 3 doesn't offer. So, if you want lively and enjoyable sound, a strong feature set, and dependable performance, you can consider the Galaxy Buds 4 Pro, and if you have a Samsung phone, that becomes an easy recommendation. 

Keep reading Digit.in for more audio reviews.

Also Read: OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro review: Well-balanced TWS earbuds under Rs 5,000?

For a decade, the Redmi Note was the easiest phone recommendation in India. You didn't need to think too hard about it because you got good specs at aggressive price. But in 2026, Xiaomi seems less interested in winning spec-sheet arguments and more focused on building a phone people actually keep for years. The Redmi Note 15 Pro+ is the clearest expression of that manifesto. It’s got a bigger battery, better durability, longer software support and a simplified camera system. It starts at Rs 37,999 and here’s why it should be on your radar.

Design and Build

The Redmi Note 15 Pro+ is a big phone. The 6.83-inch display makes it tall and wide and there's no getting around that. But despite packing a larger screen and a substantially bigger battery than last year's Note 14 Pro+, it's actually slimmer at 8.1mm compared to 8.8mm. That's a noticeable difference when you hold both back to back. It doesn't feel bulky or top-heavy, which is impressive given the 6,500mAh battery inside.

The quad-curved front gives it a more premium visual identity than any Redmi Note before it. The back panel is clean and modern and depending on the colour variant you choose, there is a matte finish design with Mirage Blue and Carbon Black and a textured back design with the Coffee Mocha model. The result is a phone that looks like it belongs at a higher price than it actually commands.

Durability is where Xiaomi has pushed hardest this generation. You get IP66, IP68, IP69 and IP69K ratings. In addition, there’s Gorilla Glass Victus 2 up front and improved internal reinforcement. This is a phone that's been designed with the understanding that people drop things, spill things and don't always treat their devices like museum pieces. If you're someone who keeps a phone for three or four years, this kind of build quality compounds in value over time in ways that a faster processor or an extra camera lens simply doesn't.

Display

The 6.83-inch AMOLED panel runs at 1.5K resolution with 120Hz refresh, HDR10+, Dolby Vision and 3840Hz PWM dimming. In testing, peak brightness hit around 2,800 nits in auto mode, which makes outdoor readability comfortable even under harsh sunlight. Contrast is, as expected from OLED, essentially infinite. The blacks are pitch perfect and the panel's gamma tracks at 2.24, almost dead on the 2.2 target. Shadows render smoothly without looking crushed or artificially lifted.

Colour gamut coverage sits at 99.1%, so content looks vivid and saturated. This is a display that makes movies, photos and even everyday UI elements feel alive. Pair that with the Dolby Atmos stereo speakers and you've got a largely enjoyable media consumption experience for the price.

The default colour temperature runs at 7,432K, which is meaningfully cooler than the 6,500K standard. You'll notice a blue tint in whites, greys and lighter UI elements. The average colour DeltaE is at 2.9, which is within the "good enough for most people" range, but the max error spikes to 7.2 at the white point, again correlating with that cool tint pulling lighter colours off target.

The fix is to switch to Original Colour Pro or a warmer colour profile in settings that reins in the blue cast significantly. But it's worth knowing that the out-of-the-box experience leans noticeably cool and if you care about accuracy, you'll want to spend a minute in display settings before you start using the phone in earnest.

Camera

This is where Xiaomi has made its most controversial decision. Where the Note 14 Pro+ gave you a 50MP main, 50MP telephoto and 50MP ultrawide, the Note 15 Pro+ ditches the telephoto and simplifies to a 200MP Samsung HPE main sensor paired with an 8MP ultrawide. Zoom duties are handled entirely through in-sensor crop. If you relied on optical zoom for portraits, street photography or any scenario where you need to reach into a scene, this is a real loss for those who used it.

Xiaomi's argument (and you can read more about it here) is that the 200MP sensor with advanced pixel binning and multi-focal processing can compensate and most people were not using the telephoto lens anyway.

Daylight performance is strong, where the colours are punchy and vibrant without tipping into the unnatural. Reds stay deeply saturated while retaining texture and surface detail. Dynamic range is a highlight as the camera handles high-contrast scenes with confidence, keeping bright skies in check while properly exposing subjects in shadow. The detail and sharpness across architectural shots, landscapes and street scenes are impressive, with clean edge-to-edge rendering and no visible chromatic aberration.

Indoors, noise control is excellent and dark backgrounds stay clean while subjects remain sharp. White balance handling under mixed artificial lighting is reliable, which is one of those things that sounds minor until you try to photograph something in a bookstore or a museum and the whole image turns orange or green.

In low light, the highlight roll-off is smooth and bright light sources don't blow out surrounding detail. Fine textures, like floral patterns on architecture or intricate metalwork, resolve clearly even in dim conditions. Night mode output is usable and sometimes genuinely impressive.

The zoom situation is better than expected. At 2x, the in-sensor crop produces sharp, detailed images with virtually no degradation. At 4x, there's a slight softening that's visible if you pixel-peep, but the output remains highly usable for social media and casual sharing. It holds up in low light better than you'd expect from a digital crop at this price. That said, it's still not a replacement for a dedicated telephoto lens. If zoom flexibility is important to your photography, phones like the Realme 16 Pro+ still offer that hardware advantage.

The portraits benefit from the f/1.7 aperture's natural bokeh. Subject isolation is good, skin tones are accurate and the fall-off from sharp focus to background blur looks gradual rather than computational. The 32MP selfie camera, upgraded from 20MP on the previous generation, handles daylight well.

Performance and Software

The Snapdragon 7s Gen 4 is not a flagship chip and it's not trying to be. What it delivers is stable, predictable performance that doesn't collapse under sustained load. Long gaming sessions, multitasking, video recording, the phone stays composed throughout. Xiaomi's new IceLoop liquid cooling system, replacing the vapour chamber from the Note 14 Pro+, does a credible job of keeping thermals in check. Even when pushed, the phone doesn't aggressively throttle or heat up in a way that affects usability.

If raw gaming performance is your absolute priority, other phones at this price will push harder in benchmarks. But for everyday use, this chipset does its job without drama.

The internal hardware LPDDR4X RAM and UFS 2.2 storage are functional and perfectly adequate today. But at Rs. 37,999, faster memory and storage would have added meaningful headroom for the years of software updates Xiaomi is promising.

HyperOS 2 feels cleaner and more refined than previous versions. AI features like transcription and call noise reduction are present without being intrusive. Xiaomi has committed to four years of Android updates and six years of security patches, up from three and four on the Note 14 Pro+. That's a meaningful improvement and it signals that Xiaomi is serious about the long-term ownership story. eSIM support has also been added this generation, which is a welcome addition.

Battery and Charging

Battery life is one of the strongest aspects of this phone. The 6,500mAh silicon-carbon cell, up from 6,200mAh on the Note 14 Pro+, delivers all-day endurance without any anxiety. In the PCMark Battery Life test, the phone ran for over 17 hours on a single charge. In daily use, casual users will comfortably stretch into a second day and heavy users won't need to think about a charger until evening.

The charging has been bumped to 100W wired, up from 90W last year, getting you from zero to full in about 55 minutes. Reverse wired charging is available for accessories or emergency top-ups for another device. There's no wireless charging, which is expected at this price and not really a miss in this segment.

Verdict

The Redmi Note 15 Pro+ isn't built to dazzle you and Xiaomi has made deliberate trade-offs here. Dropping the telephoto lens and sticking with older RAM and storage standards are real compromises that will matter to certain buyers.

But what this phone does well, it does with a consistency and maturity that previous Redmi Notes didn't always manage. The camera is reliable across conditions. The battery life is exceptional. The display is big, bright and enjoyable. The build quality is impressive for the segment. And the software support commitment gives you a realistic path to keeping this phone for three, four, maybe even five years.

At Rs 37,999, the Redmi Note 15 Pro+ wants to earn your trust over time. That's a different kind of value proposition than what Redmi Notes used to offer and for a lot of people, it might be exactly the right one.

For years, Samsung has been refining its Galaxy S series lineup, and with the standard Galaxy S26 model, that approach is even clearer. And this year, more than just refining, Samsung has also made a couple of changes. First, it has dropped the 128GB variant completely. Yes, the Galaxy S26 now starts at 256GB in the base variant, officially, which sounds great on paper. But do note it also brings a Rs 7,000 price jump compared to the Galaxy S25. Because I am not sure how many of you folks noticed, but last year, after the S25 went official, Samsung later introduced a 128GB variant specifically for India, so that it could be more accessible for buyers. 

To give you the exact cost, the Galaxy S26 price in India starts at Rs 87,999 for the base 12GB + 256GB option, while the 512GB storage variant is priced in India at Rs 1,07,999.

Personally speaking, getting the 256GB variant as the entry point on a flagship phone is always a good move. What’s even better is that I’m someone who loves compact phones. Something I can comfortably use with one hand, and that’s exactly where the Galaxy S26 fits perfectly into my daily lifestyle. 

I’ve been using the Galaxy S26 for a little over two weeks now, and here’s what I think about it.

Galaxy S26 Design: It’s familiar yet distinct

For me, Samsung has nailed the design this time. Don’t worry, I don’t mean to imply that the Galaxy S26 is dramatically different from its predecessors, as the device still carries that compact flagship feel. It's lightweight, slim and easy to use with one hand. At just 7.2mm thick, it looks and feels very sleek, and this time, Samsung managed to increase the battery size by 300mAh compared to the Galaxy S25.

Overall, the Galaxy S26 feels very premium in hand. It has an aluminium frame, and both the front and back glass are protected by the Gorilla Glass Victus 2. The matte finish on the black looks clean, although it still attracts fingerprints, so I had to wipe it quite often.

I’ve been using the Cobalt Violet colour of the phone, which looks absolutely fantastic. Samsung also offers the Galaxy S26 in multiple other colours, including Black, White, and Sky Blue. There’s also Silver Shadow and Pink Gold, which are Samsung exclusive.

Apart from the colours, the visual change this year is at the back. As I mentioned, the company has nailed the design with this phone. Seen that camera plateau on the S26 Ultra? Samsung has given it on the standard S26 and S26 Plus too, giving all three phones a unified look. Although I would admit, it looks similar to the camera module on the Galaxy Fold 7.

That said, because of the raised camera module, the Galaxy S26 wobbles quite a lot on a flat surface, so typing on this device while it rests on a desk would be tough.

You still get IP68 water and dust resistance, but not IP69, IP69K, which some competitors are starting to offer. The stereo speakers are loud and clear, the typing experience is good as you’d expect from a compact phone, and the ultrasonic fingerprint scanner remains fast and reliable.

Galaxy S26 Display: Samsung doing Samsung things

I can easily say, this is one department where Samsung never disappoints me, and the Galaxy S26 continues that streak.

You get a 6.3-inch FHD+ LTPO display with an adaptive 1-120Hz refresh rate. Samsung calls it the Dynamic AMOLED 2X panel. Compared to the S25’s 6.2-inch panel, this one is slightly larger. Also, right from the start, you can tell that this is a gorgeous screen. It is sharp, the colours pop and contrast levels are excellent.

I watched a couple of movies on this screen, and the experience felt cinematic in terms of the colour reproduction. The blacks are deep, and everything looks pleasing.

Outdoors visibility is also excellent. I have been using the Galaxy S26 in Delhi’s summer, and the display remained visible throughout. I never had to squint my eyes to see the display.

Of course, I have to test this display in our Digit Test Labs. In the brightness test, the display reached a peak brightness of 2650 nits, which is very impressive.

In the Calman colour test, it recorded an average Delta E of 2.2. Now, this is not class-leading because I’ve seen displays that got an average Delta E of as low as 0.6. But beyond the numbers, in real-world usage, the display looks bright and crisp, and that’s what really matters.

Also, in the Colour gamut test, it covers 99.9 per cent of the sRGB colour space, which again is excellent to say the least.

Galaxy S26 Performance: One of the strongest contenders in its class

The Samsung Galaxy S26 is the first phone in the world to come with a 2nm chipset, the Exynos 2600. In terms of raw power, this is a flagship processor without a doubt. It delivers strong benchmark numbers, and we’ll get to that in a moment. In everyday usage, too, it feels fast and responsive.

Now, in terms of managing the thermals, it does a pretty good job most of the time for most tasks. You see, while playing games on the Galaxy S26 for extended periods, the phone tends to warm up. For instance, after around 30 minutes of gaming, you can feel the rise in temperature on the back. And this is something that also showed up in the CPU throttling test, where the phone scored a 57 per cent stability. This suggests that, while the phone is capable of handling the load, it does so at the cost of performance consistency to keep the heat in check.

However, other benchmark scores were much better. In Antutu, it scored 3.1 million, which is great. In Geekbench 6, it scored 3,137 in single-core and crossed the 10,000 mark in multi-core score. In the 3DMark Wildlife Extreme test, it got an overall score of 7,201. Again, these are top-tier numbers that only a flagship phone in 2026 can achieve.

So, coming back to the gaming performance, it has been mostly amazing. For context, you can play BGMI at 120fps with stable performance. In Call of Duty Mobile, you can play at 120fps as well, with smooth gameplay and minor frame drops. However, in Genshin Impact, there are certain scenarios where you’ll notice frame drops, but hey, you can still expect stable gameplay with an average 55fps performance.

Galaxy S26 Cameras: Quite a reliable shooter

The Galaxy S26 comes with a triple camera setup, including a 50MP main sensor with OIS, a 12MP ultra-wide sensor, and a 10MP 3x telephoto lens. On the front, you get a 12MP selfie camera, which now offers a slightly wider field of view.

In daylight, the main camera performs very well. Images turn out detailed, sharp and vibrant. Speaking of colours, Samsung’s image processing makes them pop, giving photos a more social media ready look. The main sensor also handles dynamic range quite well.

In tricky lighting, though, images tend to look slightly soft, with a bit of brightness, especially when you’re trying to capture faces. 

I also tried capturing moving subjects, but even a slight movement often resulted in missed shots or blur.

The 3x telephoto lens takes great pictures, offering good edge detection and an ample amount of background blur. The ultra-wide lens, too, captures good outdoor shots with decent detail and strong contrast.

Selfies turn out well, with good details, sharpness, and proper exposure. I particularly like the selfie camera’s low-light performance, as the lens captures a good amount of detail in the output. For instance, in this photo, you can also see that it didn’t add any blue tint to the sky, giving a more natural result, as I would prefer.

In terms of video recording, the main camera can shoot up to 8K at 30fps with stable footage. The ultra-wide and telephoto lenses can record videos up to 4K at 60fps, and the front camera also supports 4K video at 60fps.

Galaxy S26 Software: Useful AI features

The Galaxy S26 runs on One UI 8.5 based on Android 16, and the overall experience is clean, smooth and optimised. As one would expect, Samsung continues to deliver the AI features, and once again, with the S26 series, they are actually useful.

One of the new additions is Now Nudge. While I’m texting using the Samsung keyboard, the feature understands what’s happening on my screen and suggests actions accordingly. I only wish the feature gets rolled over to other third-party keyboards too, like Gboard.

Then there’s Now Brief, which gives you a personalised summary throughout, including your schedule, news, YouTube videos and even weather-based outfit suggestions.

Google also updated its Circle to search for the S26 series. You can identify multiple things in a single frame, like you can identify the shirt, pants and shoes individually in one go. You don’t have to circle one thing at a time. 

The Gallery app also gets AI features, where you can change outfits, edit backgrounds, or even add new elements to the images. The feature is called Photo Assist, and if you thought Generative Edit was good. You have to try this one out.

Finally, if you buy the Samsung Galaxy S26, Samsung is promising 7 years of Android updates along with 7 years of Security patches. In terms of future-proofing, this phone is all covered.

Galaxy S26 Battery: It’s okay, but not the best

Alright, this is the department where the Galaxy S26 feels behind the competition. Credit where credit is due, Samsung has increased the battery capacity to 4,300mAh from 4,000mAh on the Galaxy S25. Also, there’s only so much you can do with a compact phone if you want to keep it as light and as slim as the S26 is.

In real-world usage, the Galaxy S26 lasts about a full day with moderate use. My typical usage involves a lot of doomscrolling on Instagram, watching YouTube videos, using other social media apps and all of that. I was mostly left with around 10% battery by the end of the day. So, the max you can expect out of this one is a full day of use on a single charge. Or you’ll have to charge it mid-day if you’re a heavy user. 

Granted, if you want better battery life, you can go for the S26 Plus, or even the Ultra, if you want to go all in. But, I guess, that’s the price of getting a compact one. 

For those who care about numbers, in the PCMark battery drain test, it performed surprisingly well and gave 16 hours and 30 minutes of screen on time.

In terms of charging, the phone supports 25W wired charging and takes around 1 hour and 16 minutes to go from 0 to 100 per cent. By the way, competitors are offering much faster charging at lower price points. The phone also supports 15W wireless charging.

Galaxy S26 Verdict: Polished, capable and dependable

The Galaxy S26 has not reinvented anything, but as I mentioned at the beginning, it is extremely refined. After using it for more than two weeks, I am happy to report that the Galaxy S26 offers a solid user experience and is quite dependable. It gets almost everything right without trying too hard. Of course, the phone’s greatest KSP has to be its compact form factor. But even the other things, like the display, are excellent, and the performance should be strong enough for most users.

Yes, there are compromises for sure, like the battery life may not be class leading, or the charging may not be the fastest. But if you want a compact flagship (mind you, there are only a handful of them) that delivers a premium experience without going into Ultra territory, the Galaxy S26 is a great option to consider. At Rs 87,999, it may not be perfect, but it is polished, capable and dependable in all the ways that actually matter.

People often ask me for the best truly wireless earbuds recommendation under Rs 5,000. To be frank, the sub-Rs 5,000 TWS space is one of the most competitive segments right now, where brands are actively trying to bring premium features down to mass-market pricing. OnePlus, for instance, has several options in this price range, and now, the company has launched yet another addition to the list, for Rs 3,999, or Rs 3,799 if you count in the introductory offer, the OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro. On paper, the new Buds 4 Pro tries to tick almost every box, including 55dB ANC, LHDC support, spatial audio, and Bluetooth 6.0. That, my friend, is an enticing bouquet of specs and features, but also something that can be found in its rivals like the Realme Buds Air 8. 

In this review of the OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro, you can find my experience with the earbuds in everyday use, and in the process, it may also help you decide whether it’s worth buying for the asking price. 

OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro: Quick verdict

The OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro offers a balanced, feature-rich experience under Rs 5,000. It gets the basics right with good sound, reliable call quality, strong battery life, and useful features like ANC and dual-device connectivity. While the Realme Buds Air 8 sounds more aggressive and offers stronger ANC, the OnePlus is more comfortable for long listening. It is a safe, well-rounded choice for everyday use.

Design and comfort

The OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro has a rounded rectangular case, almost pebble-like, with OnePlus branding and an LED indicator on the front. There's nothing on the back. But on the base, you get a USB-C port and a pairing/reset button. Our grey coloured review unit looks sober. I am sure the black one also shares the understated look.

The case is small, comfortable to hold and doesn't bulge much from my jeans pocket. With the buds inside, they weigh around 43 grams.

The earbuds themselves are only 4.4 grams, and along with the small stem and silicone ear tips, they stay put in my ears. I am usually wary of wearing earbuds on the move, but I didn't have that worry with these. They can be comfortably worn for hours at a stretch. For a week or so, they are constantly in my ear while working, commuting on the metro and at home. They weren't loosening during light workouts, too.

Speaking of workouts, the IP55 rating means the Nord Buds 4 Pro can take some sweat, light splashes while washing your face and even some dust and rain outside.

The stem's narrow dimple and the sliding gesture to volume control are a great touch.

Overall, there is nothing fancy about the design. It looks sober and is functional, which is what matters.

Connectivity and controls

The OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro carry audio via Bluetooth 6.0, and the connection has been stable. You can easily pair them with Google Fast Pair, and I had no difficulty pairing them with an iPhone and a MacBook Air. Thanks to dual-device connectivity, you can listen to two devices at the same time, and this worked reliably between my Android phone and MacBook.

The company claims low latency up to 47ms, and enabling Game Mode in the HeyMelody app, I faced no latency issues while casual gaming and video streaming.

On non OnePlus and Oppo phones, the HeyMelody app is where you can find and change ANC, Transparency mode, dual connection, OnePlus 3D Audio, EQ profiles, Spotify Tap, touch controls, AI Translate, upgrade firmware, and track earbuds if lost or misplaced. The interface is straightforward. So, I had no problem navigating.

As for navigating the earbuds' functions, the app offers ample choices. You get to tweak controls for single tap, double tap, triple tap, slide on, and touch-&-hold on both sides. As already mentioned, the sliding on the dimple to lower/raise volume works fine.

All good here.

OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro: Sound quality

At the core of the OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro is a 12mm dynamic driver, which is relatively large for this category. Its rival, the Realme Buds Air 8, comes with a dual driver setup, consisting of dedicated drivers for bass and treble.

Also Read: Noise Master Buds 2 review: Do they stand out in a competitive market?

It has an elevated bass tuning with punchy, warm low end, ample rumble, and, in fact, there's bass presence almost every time. But you can still make out vocals and instruments. Don't expect too much detail in the high notes. But, overall, it is a safe, fun, and engaging sound.

In comparison, the Realme Buds Air 8 is more expressive and impactful with more open soundstage and clearer instruments in a track like Sultans of the Swing by Dire Straits, and tighter and more controlled bass output in Main Aur Tu from Dhurandhar 2. Vocals of Arijit Singh in Phir Se, also from Dhurandhar 2, sound closer, more textured and a bit processed. In November by Max Richter, the Realme renders high-frequency details with better clarity and sharpness, giving the track a more atmospheric feel.

The OnePlus delivers these notes too, but they do not feel as defined or as close. It feels softer and more balanced.

There is support for LHDC 5.0 codec-based high-resolution sound, provided you have a compatible phone. We tried it on the OnePlus 15R, which supports this. In practice, the difference is slightly noticeable, even with high-quality local files like FLAC. It doesn't make a night-and-day difference if you stream via platforms like Spotify.

There is also EQ support, which lets you tweak the sound profile. You can choose between the given presets or create your own custom EQ. There wasn't a major difference between the Balanced and Serenade profiles to my ears. The Bass presets work.

The Nord Buds 4 Pro includes spatial audio support, too, which is called OnePlus 3D Audio. It creates a wider soundstage that feels engaging to use.

Overall, sound quality is tuned for mainstream users. It is engaging, slightly bass-heavy, and works well across genres.

Active noise cancellation and calls

OnePlus claims up to 55dB noise cancellation on the Nord Buds 4 Pro, which is among the highest numbers in this price range.

In everyday use, the noise cancellation does a good job of reducing common ambient sounds like conversations, construction noise, a running fan, or even an open tap. The Realme Buds Air 8 felt slightly more aggressive, but some may find that overbearing. The OnePlus implementation is more agreeable.

Now, among the ANC settings, the Moderate mode works best in most situations. The High mode uses real-time adaptive cancellation, which adjusts based on your surroundings. This can be useful, but in constantly changing environments, it may feel a little annoying. Some users may still prefer this dynamic approach.

Transparency mode also does its job well and does not sound artificial, which can be an issue on some earbuds. That said, it does not amplify ambient sound as clearly as higher-end options.

The OnePlus earbuds are very useful for calls. Thanks to the beamforming mics and noise reduction algorithm at work, the call quality is clear and audible, even outdoors.

Battery life and charging

The company claims up to 13 hours on the OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro (with AAC and ANC off at 80% volume). One of the earbuds died around the 13-hour mark, and the other lasted an hour more. While there is some inconsistency between them, I will still take it. Moreover, with the case, you can expect to get a total of around 54 hours of runtime.

With ANC on, you can expect lower numbers, but still enough to last a full day of mixed use.

Charging time is around 60 minutes for the earbuds and 90 minutes for the full case. There is fast charging support, and the claim is up to 13 hours of playback with just 10-minutes of refuel. These are impressive figures.

Should you buy OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro?

The OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro is a value-heavy pair of earbuds that offers a bit of everything. It doesn't particularly stand out, especially with the Realme Buds Air 8 also competing in the same space. But it is trying to be good at everything that matters, and mostly succeeds. That makes the Nord Buds 4 Pro an easy recommendation for anyone looking for a well-balanced TWS under Rs 5,000.

The Nord Buds 4 Pro gets the basics right. The sound is engaging without being messy, call quality is dependable, design is simple and comfortable, the Hey Melody app interface is user-friendly, and battery life is more than sufficient for daily use.

The ANC is very strong, but doesn't feel as aggressive as the Realme pair. That works in the Nord Buds' favour as it feels less fatiguing, especially for long listening. The same applies to the sound signature. Realme Buds Air 8 may be more dramatic and exciting, but OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro is easier to listen to for longer periods, which makes it the safer pick for most users.

Other features like Transparency mode, LHDC support, OnePlus 3D Audio, adaptive features, in-ear detection, and dual-device connectivity offer good utility and make the overall package feel more complete.

So, you shall consider the OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro if you want a fuss-free, feature-rich pair of earbuds that work well across music, calls and everyday use. However, you can skip it if you are chasing the most aggressive value for money or a more exciting sound signature.

Either way, there’s not much to complain about at Rs 4,000. The OnePlus Nord Buds 4 Pro are quite well-balanced in its segment.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar stories.

Also Read: OnePlus Nord Buds 3r review: Affordable TWS buds that don’t compromise on quality

What should you expect from a Rs 70,000 laptop in 2026? When I put that question to friends and family at a recent get-together, the answer was quite similar: reliable performance and dependable battery life. And it makes all the sense in the world as these two things matter most on a typical workday, when you are juggling between emails, calls, spreadsheets, and whatnot. But a good laptop in 2026 needs to go beyond just the essentials. Design and display, build quality, portability, and even how quietly it fits into your daily routine, all matter as well. And the Apple MacBook Neo, which I have been using as my daily driver for nearly a week, has ticked almost all of these boxes. 

So when I pulled out the NEO toy in town in front of my peers and mentioned that this has been my daily work machine, and I use it for some light gaming as well. And, it costs less than an iPhone 17; the reaction was major curiosity. How could a laptop this compact and relatively affordable keep up with a demanding routine such as mine? 

Over the next few hours, I walked my folks through exactly that. And now, let me do the same for you. Here’s a detailed look at the MacBook Neo and why it is one of the best laptops you can buy right now if you are looking forward to entering the Apple ecosystem for the very first time.

Also read: Apple MacBook Neo base variant with 1TB storage? A modder just made it possible

Premium design and non-backlit keyboard

For years, a MacBook has been synonymous with being a premium-looking laptop that is meant to be carried into any board meeting with confidence. But with the Neo, Apple is clearly hoping that the laptop isn’t just carried to board meetings, but classes as well. Yes, the relatively affordable MacBook Neo also has students as its target consumers and that is clear from the exciting colour options that we have. I have been testing out the Citrus colourway and the moment I unboxed the device, it stood out in the classiest way possible. There is a subtle shine all around the body, and the iconic Apple logo sits neatly in the centre on the lid. To no surprises, Apple deserves full marks for the Neo’s look and build. 

Now, one of the best things about the Neo is how compact it is. Compared to a 13-inch M1 MacBook Air, the Neo is slightly thicker, but also smaller. Despite that, both weigh the same. The result is a machine that feels solid, portable, and well-packed for its size. It also fits easily into most of my bags, and I have even swapped my large tote for a much smaller backpack I picked up from Disneyland two years ago. It may technically be a kids’ backpack, but it works perfectly here. 

Coming to the build quality, there is absolutely nothing to complain about. The new laptop maintains Apple’s reputation and will have you thinking how can this premium device cost less than Rs 70,000. 

When you flip open the Neo, you will be greeted with the keyboard and touchpad. The unit that I received is the base variant, which does not have a Touch ID button at the top right. Instead, there is a button to lock the laptop and unlock it by entering your password. Over the years, I have grown accustomed to Touch ID and not having it looks sort of incomplete. But then, if you are a first-time MacBook user, this ideally shouldn’t matter much.

Meanwhile, the keyboard is placed neatly on the chassis and I had no issues switching from my MacBook Air 15-inch to this one. In less than a day, I could type without having to look down at the keyboard. The keys are super responsive and have a tactile feel that results in a satisfactory experience. They are also silent, so even when you’re typing with full gusto, others at the workplace won’t hear you. 

Perhaps the only tradeoff that can be felt in terms of the keyboard is that it is not backlit. And when you work or study late at night, this can be an issue. In my case, buying a small mini USB LED light solved this problem. You can get one too from Amazon. There are plenty of options. But of course, having a backlit keyboard would still have been a huge win here. 

The touchpad is decently sized and utilises the chassis perfectly. However, it is also a physical one, not the one with haptic feedback. So the moment you press it to click, it moves. 

Finally, let’s talk about the port options. There are two USB-C ports on the left and either can be used for charging. However, if you want to connect an external display, you can use only one port. And this isn’t mentioned on the surface, but you will be notified of it once you insert the external display’s cable into the wrong port. Apart from this, there is a 3.5 mm headphone jack for connecting wired accessories. 

The iconic MacBook Display 

People all around the world trust MacBooks’ display when it comes to colour accuracy. Designers, photographers, video editors, and anyone working with visual elements will easily recommend a MacBook to their peers. But can you expect the same display quality in Apple’s most affordable laptop yet? Absolutely. 

The MacBook Neo’s display can show up to 1 billion colours and sticks to the sRGB colour space. It does not extend to wider gamuts like DCI P3. Now, will that really impact a student or someone using it for everyday work? In most cases, no. But for users dealing with colour-critical work, it could make a difference. 

So, for users who want to use this device to get through their workday, consume OTT content or even indulge in some light gaming, the display is fantastic. 

Great overall performance 

If the word gaming in the previous paragraph made you raise your eyebrow, you’re not alone. Since the MacBook Neo is powered by an A18 Pro chip, which is found on iPhone 16 Pro and has just 8 GB of RAM, you won’t really expect it to excel at gaming. But it does a pretty good job. Now, of course, you can’t expect heavy titles to work flawlessly here. There are better laptops for that kind of stuff, and the Neo doesn’t even come close, let alone being a proper competitor. But for light gaming and stuff, it holds up decently well. 

I played Shadow of the Tomb Raider, Overcooked 2 and Hollow Knight Silksong on the device and the overall experience was better than what I was expecting. 

Delving a bit into details, the laptop was able to run Shadow of the Tomb Raider at around 30 fps with medium graphics settings, motion blur turned off, and resolution set to 1440 x 900. There were a few minor stutters here and there, which is expected at these settings, but nothing that made the game unplayable. 

When I switched to the lowest graphics preset, it immediately made things smoother, with frame rates jumping to around 40 to 45 fps in the initial sequence before settling back to the 30 fps range. Moreover, pushing the settings back to medium again dropped performance closer to 20fps, which makes it clear that this is a game best enjoyed at lower settings on the Neo.

Despite the fluctuations in frame rates, which is acceptable considering how demanding the Shadow of the Tomb Raider is, what stood out to me was consistency. Even after around 25 minutes of gameplay, the frame rate briefly dipped to 19 fps but quickly recovered and stabilised between 30 and 40 fps. Cutscenes were flawless and overall, the experience remained surprisingly playable. 

Now switching to where the Neo is king: less demanding games. 

Hollow Knight: Silksong ran at a smooth 60 fps with no hiccups at all, and the same goes for Overcooked 2. These are the kinds of games that felt perfectly at home on this machine and kept me hooked for hours. The system also automatically switches to Game Mode the moment you launch a title, which helps optimise performance in the background. That said, due to the 8 GB RAM, some recent titles like Inzoi will simply be unplayable. So before you buy a game to play on this laptop, do check out its minimum requirements. 

I will put this again. The MacBook Neo is not a gaming laptop, nor is macOS designed in a way like the Windows platform to take advantage of high-end games. That said, for the light kind of stuff, the things that the laptop supports, a casual gamer will deal with this machine just fine.

Apart from this, in terms of the day to day performance, the A18 Pro chip holds up pretty well. For normal workloads, it does its job as expected.

In fact, at one point, I had around 20 Chrome tabs open alongside multiple apps, and the system showed no signs of slowing down. Moreover, I also switched from Steam to Google Chrome (with a game running in the background) and the MacBook Neo didn’t appear to be stressed at all. In addition to this, app launches are quick and switching between is a breeze.

In raw numbers too, the MacBook Neo does a decent job. In the Geekbench CPU benchmark, it outperformed the M3 MacBook Air 15-inch in the single-core test. The M3 MacBook Air scores 2980 points while the Neo scores 3406 points.

I also ran Cinebench R23, Cinebench 2024, 3D Mark Wild Life Extreme, Solar Bay and Blackmagic disk speed test on the device. And the results are as follows, reflecting a strong performance for a sub-Rs 70,000 laptop. 

Cinebench R23: 4981 (multi-core), 1571 (single core)

Cinebench 2024: 309 (multi-core), 134 (single core)

Geekbench CPU test: 7941 (multi-core), 3406 (single-core)

Blackmagic disk speed test: Read - 1584 MB/s, Write - 1385.2 MB/s

3D Mark Wild Life Extreme: 3729

Solar Bay: 6841

Two things that deserve special mention are the laptop’s speakers and webcam. For me, these two were the unexpected highlights. Talking about the webcam first, the laptop comes with a 1080p camera and it shines with all its glory during video calls. It made me look sharp and clear while I was attending virtual meetings and honestly, I loved the overall appeal. 

As for the audio, the MacBook Neo comes with dual side-firing speakers that do their job well.  Even while playing Hollow Knight in a busy office environment, I could easily hear in-game audio without feeling like the speakers were struggling. The sound quality was also crisp and clear, with the right amount of bass. In fact, when I played the opening cutscene of the game at full volume, it was enough to grab the attention of people around me, which says a lot about how well the speakers perform. 

Apart from gaming and my usual work, I also edited a birthday-special video for my sister on the device (which is what the gathering in my family was about). I edited the entire 15-minute video using Final Cut Pro and it was smooth sailing throughout. So you can also use the Neo for some light video editing on the go.

Impressive Battery and thermals 

Now, the whole purpose of a laptop as compact as the Neo is that it can be taken anywhere. This also means that it has to come with a strong battery life so that you don’t find yourself looking for a charging point everywhere. 

With the MacBook Neo, Apple promised a battery life of 11 hours of wireless web browsing. And it indeed is true. I logged in to work at 8 am sharp and used the MacBook Neo at 50 per cent brightness for 9 hours. When I was about to leave for home, the laptop still had 20 per cent battery left.

During this time, I used Google Docs, 10-15 Google Chrome tabs, and even watched a video or two. I never turned the laptop to low power mode and neither did I turn the brightness down. With these two enabled, the laptop will easily last beyond 10-11 hours as well. 

While gaming too, I noticed a 5 per cent battery drop after playing continuously for 20 minutes. This is better than what several budget gaming laptops offer.

When you talk about charging, it takes roughly 4 hours to charge the device, as it ships with a 20W adapter.

The Neo also comes with a fanless design like the MacBook Air. And yet, you won’t feel it getting too hot to handle. While I was running benchmark tests, the surface temperatures never rose above 29.2 degrees Celcius. The touchpad remained even cooler, at 27 degrees. Even while gaming, the surface temperatures stayed within limits. 

Apple Intelligence and other features

The laptop comes with all standard Apple Intelligence tools, including text summarisation and rewriting, smart reply and notification summaries, image generation, and even Siri with ChatGPT support. I set up Siri the moment I received the device and used it to brainstorm ideas, weekend plans and much more.

When I asked Siri to help me brainstorm ideas for a new gaming mouse, it asked if it could work with ChatGPT for the same. Once I enabled ChatGPT, I got a list of ideas right on my home screen. I can only think of students who can use this feature to research, create, and so on. 

Now I have been an avid member of the Apple ecosystem and also own an iPhone, AirPods, iPad and Apple Watch. And the Neo also works smoothly with every other device belonging to the Apple ecosystem.

For instance, you can Handoff a task from your MacBook Neo to an iPhone, copy/paste via Universal Clipboard, and even mirror or control your iPhone screen on the Mac. Settings, photos, files, and other data sync through iCloud just as on any Mac. At the time of writing this review, I am writing on my older M3 MacBook Air 15-inch while the Neo is sitting on my desk, showing me the option of opening the Google Chrome tab that is open on my MacBook Air. 

Should you buy the Apple MacBook Neo?

Now, coming to the question that might be on your mind: should you go ahead and spend Rs 69,900 on Apple’s latest MacBook? The answer depends on what you actually need from your laptop. 

The MacBook Neo delivers the core Mac experience at a price point that is new for Apple. Thus, it is the best way to experience macOS if you aren’t willing to spend around Rs 1 lakh on a new device. The laptop also boasts a relatively strong day to day performance, excellent battery life, reliable display, and a design that lives up to Apple’s reputation.  

With that being said, there are also certain compromises that include the non-backlit keyboard, absence of touch ID in the base variant and only having an 8 GB RAM option, raising a question in terms of future-proofing. However, for students, first-time Mac users, or anyone looking for a reliable laptop in this budget, the Neo makes a very solid case for itself. It gets the essentials right and comes with Apple’s reliability. And for some people, that’s enough.

Also read: Apple MacBook Neo in Digit Test Labs: For the first time Mac users

Ever since I started gaming, I have mostly been a console player. That changed about 2 years ago when I began playing on PC, and suddenly, I understood what all the hype was about. But that shift also meant getting used to a keyboard and mouse setup, especially for long gaming sessions. Over time, while testing different gaming mice, I realised that two things matter the most and those are battery life and weight. You do not want a mouse that constantly needs charging, and you definitely do not want one that starts hurting your hand after a few hours.

For the last two weeks, I have been using the EvoFox Banshee 2, a gaming mouse that promises a lot for under Rs 2,000. It brings features like tri-mode connectivity, a PixArt sensor, and even a built-in display. But does that all come together to give players a good overall experience? Read on to find out. 

Also read: Apple MacBook Neo in Digit Test Labs: For the first time Mac users

Design and build

The EvoFox Banshee 2 gets a lot right when it comes to design. The white colour stands out immediately and feels refreshing. Then there is the EvoFox branding sitting at the centre. And while the overall design is fairly clean, there are decals on the buttons, including a small “Play with power” text on the right button. I personally prefer a cleaner look, so this felt slightly unnecessary, but if you like louder aesthetics, you might like what you see here.

There is also a textured scroll wheel and two side buttons that protrude slightly, making them easy to access during gameplay. Finally, there is RGB lighting on the logo and the scroll wheel, which adds a bit of personality without being too distracting.

The best part about the design, in my opinion, is the built-in LCD display placed at the centre. It shows DPI levels, battery percentage, and connectivity mode in real time. This is genuinely useful as you do not have to rely on software or guess your settings while using the mouse.

Coming to build quality, this is where the Banshee 2 stays true to its price. It does not feel premium, but it also does not feel cheap. The materials feel sturdy enough for regular use, and there is no immediate sense of fragility. It sits in that middle ground where you are getting a product that feels reliable without paying a premium.

Battery and performance

Now let’s talk about one of the most important aspects - battery life. In my usage, which included around eight hours of daily use, the mouse lasted a full three days before I had to plug it in. By the end of the third day, I was actively looking for the charger. The good part is that it charges quickly as well, reaching about 50 percent in under an hour. So while the battery is not the best, it is far from a dealbreaker.

In terms of performance, the EvoFox Banshee 2 does a good job for its price. It uses the PixArt 3311 sensor, which promises reliable tracking and consistent performance. I tested it across games like Resident Evil, Red Dead Redemption 2, Doom, and Helldivers, and for casual gaming, it holds up well. I also gave the mouse to my brother, who regularly plays CS:GO, and even he was comfortable using it in his sessions.

Coming to the clicks, they are responsive and have a noticeable clicky sound, which you would expect. The scroll wheel also feels precise and easy to control.

The mouse supports up to 12,000 DPI, with five preset levels including 600, 1600, 3200, 6400, and 12000. I mostly stuck to the default 1600 DPI, which worked well for me.

But if there’s one thing that you will notice the moment you hold the mouse, it is weight. At around 96 grams, it is slightly on the heavier side, especially for esports players who are used to ultra-light mice. Now if you are into competitive gaming, this might affect your experience. But for casual gaming, the weight feels stable and manageable.

Ergonomics and connectivity

Ergonomics are important, especially if you are spending hours gaming, and the EvoFox Banshee 2 does a good job here as well. It fits comfortably in the hand, and there is a dedicated thumb rest on the side, which makes a noticeable difference during longer sessions. I did not experience any discomfort while using it for extended periods.

Connectivity is one of the strongest features of this mouse. It supports tri-mode connectivity, including wired, 2.4GHz wireless, and dual Bluetooth. This makes it easy to switch between multiple devices, whether you are gaming on a PC or working on a laptop.

The mouse also features smart polling rate management, offering up to 1000Hz in wired mode, 500Hz in 2.4GHz mode, and 133Hz in Bluetooth mode, balancing performance and battery life. You also get six programmable buttons with onboard memory, allowing you to store macros and settings directly on the mouse.

The software support lets you customise DPI levels, lighting, and button functions based on your preference. It also works across Windows, Mac, Linux, and ChromeOS without needing additional drivers, which adds to its overall convenience.

Should you buy it?

You should consider the EvoFox Banshee 2 if you are looking for a budget-friendly gaming mouse that offers a good mix of features and performance. It is not meant for hardcore esports players, and if you are into competitive gaming, you might want to look at lighter and more premium options.

However, for casual gamers and everyday users, this mouse delivers a solid experience for under Rs 2,000.

Also read: Asus TUF gaming laptops of 2026 announced: 5 things to know

I’ve been living with the Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra for a while now, and the ‘new phone’ smell has officially worn off. After my first 48 hours with the device, I was mostly charmed by the ergonomics and the slick Cobalt Violet finish of my review unit. But a premium flagship phone, especially the kind that starts at Rs 1.4 lakh, isn't defined by a weekend; it’s defined by the small wins and the annoyances that crop up over time in daily usage. Also, you read that right, the Galaxy S26 Ultra price in India starts at Rs 1,39,999 for the base 12GB + 256GB variant. The 12GB + 512GB and 16GB + 1TB options are priced in India at Rs 1,59,999 and Rs 1,89,999, respectively.

I’ve used the Galaxy S26 Ultra as my daily driver for work and play, and I’ve genuinely put it through the wringer to see if it actually deserves that ‘Ultra’ tag. Let’s dive into the full review.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra after 48 hours: First impressions and what stands out?

Risking it all for the Cobalt Violet finish

I’ll start with this: I haven't put a case on this phone. In fact, I am a believer in using phones without cases, always. I know, it sounds like a recipe for a heart attack. I remember dropping my Galaxy S23 Ultra on a concrete floor, only to turn it over and find that the back glass had cracked from the side. But despite that incident, even after the phone was repaired, I used it without a case. My point is, when I’ve spent a good amount of money on a thing of beauty, I want to flaunt it. And it isn't just about flaunting the looks; the Galaxy S26 Ultra has these subtle, rounded edges that make the 6.9-inch frame actually manageable. As I noted in my initial impressions, the phone doesn't dig into my palm when I’m scrolling through Instagram past midnight.

The Cobalt Violet finish is a masterstroke. Honestly, I wasn’t too impressed with it when I saw it in the leaks. But, after using the device for the past few weeks, the finish has certainly grown on me. It’s got this deep, metallic lustre that looks professional and industrial without being boring. Again, I believe the white one is the best finish, and I have seen it in person; it looks stunning. But the violet has a classy vibe that has grown on me. Also, because I’m not using a case, I also appreciate how slim this thing actually is.

However, there is a catch. Because it’s so slim and the camera island is so pronounced, the phone wobbles if you try to use it while it's lying on a desk. It’s a bit of a design trade-off. I’ve personally adapted by just… not using it on a table. If it’s in my hand, the weight distribution is perfect. If it’s on a flat surface, it’s annoying. Pick your poison.

The Privacy display: A true quality of life feature

The headline feature of the Galaxy S26 Ultra this year is the Privacy Display, and I’m just going to say it: I can’t go back to a normal phone screen now. For those still wondering whether Samsung just slapped a software filter on this, it’s a hardware-level implementation that controls light dispersion at the pixel level.

How do I use it? I’ve set it to trigger automatically for WhatsApp, Instagram, and my gallery. Since I am always surrounded by someone or the other, at work and in public spaces, the ‘zero peeking’ tech kicks in effortlessly. So, if someone is standing right next to me, they see a dark screen, while I can see my chats or photos clearly. And, if I need maximum protection, I simply enable the ‘Maximum privacy protection’ toggle for the full throttle mode, and it becomes virtually impossible for anyone to see what I’m doing from the sides. Now, that’s what you call innovation.

Now, in doing so, does the display take a hit? Yes. Are the viewing angles as wide as they used to be? Nope. And there’s also a slight drop in brightness when the privacy mode is active. But honestly, who uses their phone from an angle, like sideways? So, when you’re looking at it head-on, and that’s how a phone is supposed to be looked at, it’s still the best 10-bit panel in the game: vibrant, sharp, and gorgeous. For me, the trade-off for actual privacy is a price I’m more than willing to pay.

One UI 8.5 and the AI goodness

One UI 8.5 is, in my opinion, the most mature Android skin out there. Because it’s not just about the big features, they are all here. But it’s also about the aesthetics and the ‘feel’ of the OS. The animations and transitions in One UI 8.5 are buttery fluid, and little touches like being able to deeply customise the control centre or having a native time zone converter in the clock app are some of the small attention to detail that make a big difference.

Then there’s the AI. I’m still waiting for that ‘agentic’ future we saw in the demos. The stuff where I can just tell Gemini to book me an Uber or order my usual dinner while I’m doing three other things. But the tools we actually have right now have moved past being just party tricks.

Here are some of the things I found really useful.

• Samsung Voice Recorder: This is the best voice recorder app on any phone, period. I recently recorded an 18-minute interview on the S26 Ultra, and it transcribed the whole thing, separated the speakers perfectly, and allowed me to export the text in seconds. Basically, with this phone, I don’t need to create different Google accounts just to log in to Otter.ai for transcription purposes. Everything is sorted natively on this phone.

• Photo Assist: This is a much better implementation of Generative Edit. It’s faster, and the ‘Creative Studio’ mode can actually turn my rough S Pen doodles into usable art.

• AI Select: While I still mostly use Circle to Search to find information, I’ve also started to use AI Select a lot to take action on my screen content. In One UI 8.5, paired with the S Pen, AI Select is my one-stop tool to capture, edit and extract content for immediate use.

Which reminds me, the S Pen is also back in my daily routine. And not just for the AI Select stuff, but with the S26 Ultra, I’m back to signing PDFs and taking handwritten notes. It just feels natural.

My one major gripe with the software? Samsung, why is there still no native app locker? Secure Folder exists, and it’s a cool privacy feature to have. But it’s kind of an overkill for when I just want a simple fingerprint on my personal apps. It’s the one missing piece in an otherwise perfect software experience on any smartphone out there.

The Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5 powerhouse

The Galaxy S26 Ultra is a beast when it comes to performance. I’ve been putting it through some serious load, and the Snapdragon 8 Elite Gen 5, combined with the massive VC cooling system, is a dream. Sure, it gets warm when you’re pushing it, but it never gets hot. And that’s what really matters.

For testing purposes, I’ve been playing COD and BGMI at 120fps, and it’s very smooth. Wuthering Waves at 60fps looks incredible on this display. But the real fun I’ve been having on this phone is with the emulators. I have a bunch of PlayStation ports installed on the S26 Ultra, and on one instance, I spent four hours straight playing God of War: Ghost of Sparta (revisiting the classic), and the phone didn't even flinch. That session only took about 35% of the battery.

Also, here are some benchmark scores for those who care about numbers:

• Geekbench: 11,159 (multi-core), 3,658 (single-core)
• Antutu: 34,91,536
• 3D Mark Wildlife Extreme: 7,012 (Vulkan)
• 3D Mark Solarbay: 12,456 (Vulkan)
• 3D Mark SolarBay Extreme: 1,029 (Vulkan)

On top of this, the heat management is impressive. Even with the temperatures starting to climb here in the NCR region, the phone stays relatively cool during my typical day. I can spend hours on WhatsApp, Instagram, YouTube, X or jumping between Chrome and Keep without the back glass or the aluminium frame ever feeling uncomfortable.

Camera: Still the king of versatility

I’ve been genuinely impressed with how Samsung has handled the tuning on the Galaxy S26 Ultra. As for the hardware, we are looking at a 200MP main, 50MP ultra-wide, 50MP 5x telephoto and a 10MP 3x telephoto. For selfies, there’s a 12MP front camera.

Now, in the last year or two, we’ve seen brands like Vivo and Xiaomi really dial it in with their still photography, but there’s a consistency here with the Samsung. In fact, even with my iPhone 17 Pro Max. This consistency, I feel, still makes them the default, safe choice for most people.

I am putting up a few photos of similar scenes taken on both devices. On the iPhone, the images lean into that neutral, natural look with a slightly warmer white balance that I’ve always appreciated.

iPhone 17 Pro Max photo samples

But in typical Samsung fashion, the Galaxy S26 Ultra just hits differently for my taste. Below are the same scenes, but now from the S26 Ultra's camera. Which phone do you think did it better?

Galaxy S26 Ultra photo samples

Of course, it isn't that one is objectively ‘better’ than the other; it’s about what you prefer to look at. I personally love that punchy vibrancy Samsung brings to the table, along with a slightly cooler white balance that makes the images pop. I’ve been looking at comparison shots from both, and honestly, you can’t go wrong with either. It really just comes down to your personal aesthetic.

Galaxy S26 Ultra photo samples

That said, when you move past the ‘look’ and into the tech, the Galaxy S26 Ultra starts to pull away. The new f/1.4 aperture on the primary sensor performs quite well in all sorts of light. The shots are cleaner and have good amounts of detail and depth. Then there’s the zoom. Whether it’s 3x, 5x or 10x, Samsung is still the one to beat here. The versatility you get from those lenses is something you just don’t get on most phones out there.

Galaxy S26 Ultra photo samples

On the video front, it’s a bit of a split decision. Samsung’s Horizon Lock stabilisation is magical and it’s legitimately unlike anything I’ve seen on another phone. It stays level even when things get shaky. However, if I’m being honest, the iPhone 17 Pro Max is still my go-to for video in a general scenario. There’s just a gold standard feel to how iPhones handle overall video recording, especially the lens switching, that Android phones haven't quite mastered yet.

So, while the iPhone stays in my pocket for video, the Galaxy S26 Ultra is always my go-to primary camera for stills. For the way I see things, it just gets it right more often than not.

Efficiency over raw capacity

Samsung is playing it safe again with a 5,000mAh battery on the Galaxy S26 Ultra. I’ll be honest, I would’ve loved to see them finally jump on the silicon-carbon bandwagon. They could have made the phone even slimmer with the same capacity, or kept the current footprint and crammed in a much larger cell. But there is a flip side to that ‘safe’ play. While silicon-carbon is the trendy new tech, its long-term durability is still a bit of a question mark. Samsung’s lithium-ion solution is a proven one. We know it’ll hold up for three or four years without a massive drop-off.

I actually saw this play out with a friend recently. He’s been using a OnePlus 13s for about ten months, and that thing has a massive 5,850mAh silicon-carbon battery. Initially, he was quite pumped about it, but now he’s complaining that it’s struggling to even last a full day. He’s already looking to upgrade just to get his battery life back. And this definitely made me wonder if these newer high-capacity silicon-carbon batteries in phones these days can actually go the distance or not.

Coming back, in my experience, the Galaxy S26 Ultra remains a very comfortable one-day phone. The optimisation is so good that I can leave it unplugged overnight without worrying about it draining by morning. On my moderate days, I’m usually heading to bed with about 40% left in the tank. Even on heavy days, the kind where I’m leaning on gaming or watching Netflix for hours at night, I’m still seeing about 20% by the time I hit the charger.

And speaking of chargers, the jump to 60W is a huge win. I’ve been using my 65W Asus PD charger, and I can get a full top-up from nearly empty in under 40 minutes. Since I rarely let my phone actually die, a quick 15-minute charge in the morning is usually more than enough to get me through the entire day.

Samsung Galaxy S26 Ultra: Final Verdict

Some phones have all the raw hardware in the world and come with bold claims, yet buyers just settle into using a flagship for making calls and watching reels. The Galaxy S26 Ultra is not one of them. I feel it’s going to appeal to a lot of folks, especially those who want to get work done. In my case, I use this phone to sign documents, and I am literally playing PS2 games via an emulator on this thing. Then there’s the Privacy display, which makes sure that the things I want private on my screen, my chats, my photos, my notifications, are not visible to people peeking from the sides. When you talk about the AI stuff, the voice recording, the native transcription feature, and AI Select, the list goes on; you see, there’s a lot this phone can actually do effortlessly.

Yes, it is expensive, and it does come with its fair share of criticisms. For instance, the lack of a native app locker still feels like a glaring omission in 2026, and the S Pen doesn’t have Bluetooth connectivity. But coming back to the fundamentals, the sheer peace of mind the Galaxy S26 Ultra offers in terms of battery reliability and camera consistency is hard to find anywhere else.

If you’re coming from an S24 Ultra or older, you’re going to appreciate the attention to detail and the upgrades. The Galaxy S26 Ultra is a powerhouse that doesn't scream for attention but earns it every time you pick it up. It’s the king of the hill, not just because it’s a Samsung, but because it’s the most complete package you can buy today.

Also read: Samsung Galaxy S26 in Digit Test Labs: What’s actually new this year?

Every time I get an affordable or mid-range pair of earbuds, I am curious how they stand out. The titular Noise Master Buds 2, launched a few weeks ago in India, at an introductory price tag of Rs 7,999, featuring Sound by Bose tuning, LHDC high-res audio support, adaptive ANC rated up to 51dB, spatial audio with head tracking and a distinct design. Well, the predecessor, the Master Buds, also has many of these features and specs. However, some differences are very obvious right away, and during my review time, I wanted to see how well they come together in actual use. Let's see if they hold up to the ambitious Master tag.

A distinctive case and comfortable earbuds

Noise Master Buds 2 has a case that looks similar to the predecessor, but it is still distinct from other TWS earbud cases. Shape-wise, it is a half-rounded square with the flat top portion as the lid and the USB-C port on the rounded bottom. There is a Noise logo along with Sound by Bose branding on its head.

Our review unit's Carbon (black/dark grey) colour with the metal paint finish offers a sophisticated look. You can also pick them in Mercury (silver) and Aurum (golden) colours.

On the front, there is a circular metal disc with an LED strip positioned at 1 o'clock. That LED tells you the active, charging and pairing state. The disc isn't mechanical and doesn't offer any functional value. It is just there for a look, which is the signature of Noise's Master series.

The case is made out of plastic but feels decently solid. It can be slid into jeans or a jacket pocket, but there will be a slight bulge.

Opening the lid reveals the earbuds sitting neatly in their slots. The hinge feels sturdy, and the magnets hold the earbuds securely in place while charging. 

The earbuds themselves follow a familiar stem-style in-ear design. They are lightweight, weighing around 5.2 grams each, which makes them comfortable for extended listening sessions. Noise includes interchangeable silicone ear tips and ear wings in the box. After trying a couple of combinations, I settled on a fit that felt secure enough for use in the office, metro, and home. However, the ear wings tend to slip out of position over time. When that happens, the earbuds lose their secure fit and do not sit properly in the ears. It also makes placing them back into the case slightly inconvenient, as they do not align easily with the charging cavities. Because of this, the ear wings feel like a hassle at times.

Still and all, when they stayed put in my ears, I could continue wearing them for hours without noticeable fatigue. So, good points for that. And like the predecessor, these are also IPX5 water-resistant. So, they can withstand heavy rain, splashes, and sweat. Just don't submerge them in water.

Decent connectivity and controls with some quirks

Pairing the Noise Master Buds 2 is straightforward thanks to Google Fast Pair support. When you open the case near an Android phone, a prompt appears automatically to connect the earbuds. This makes the initial setup quick and convenient. By the way, I also didn't have any problem connecting it to my MacBook and iPhone.

Speaking of which, thanks to dual-device connectivity, I could easily switch between all these devices. But the audio handoff or routing doesn't always work as intended. Occasionally, audio would wrongly play from one of these devices' speakers instead of the earbuds.

The earbuds also paused audio or video on their own a few times, without any input from me. Not sure about the reason.

The Noise earbuds also support in-ear detection. This did work as expected, though. You have to enable this in the companion app.

Another feature that has to be manually enabled is Motion Control. For this, the earbuds use a built-in six-axis IMU sensor to detect head movements. It is meant to allow you to control playback or answer calls by nodding or shaking your head. But it didn't work for me, and I toggled it off.

So, I relied on touch controls instead. You can personalise them to a great extent. You see, I couldn't always register the triple-tap to change playback to the previous or next track. So, I set this function to a double-tap sequence. Likewise, you can set your preferred controls.

The Noise Audio app is central to managing many of these features. Through the app, you can toggle ANC modes, adjust the equaliser, enable spatial audio, configure touch gestures, and locate misplaced earbuds using the Find My Device feature.

The app interface looks modern and is fairly simple and easy to navigate. The built-in AI assistant worked well in my test. I only asked about the weather conditions and what to wear. It answered promptly and was actively responding to my follow-up queries. Moreover, you can anytime call the device assistant like Gemini and get responses through that. Sweet!

Also Read: Sennheiser HD 500 BAM microphone review ft. HD 560s headphone: Clear, convenient, and modular upgrade

Clear vocals, clean tuning

The Noise Master Buds 2 use a custom 10mm dynamic driver made from a PU and PEEK composite material. According to the company, this combination is designed to reduce distortion and improve efficiency. They support LHDC 5.0 Hi-Res audio and can provide 24-bit/96kHz streaming over Bluetooth.

Noise has also partnered with Bose for sound tuning. I used the earbuds in the Sound by Bose EQ profile only. I was listening mostly at 60-80% volume with ANC on. I used a pair of OnePlus earbuds in the sub-Rs 7,000 price range for comparable testing. The Noise earbuds aren't as loud as the OnePlus pair.

The bass is present with ample oomph and rumble. But, while listening to Ari Ari from Dhurandhar 2, I noticed the beats and drops in the track sounded tighter and fuller in the OnePlus pair. But as a standalone pair, Master Buds 2 can give you an enjoyable time in pop and electronic tracks.

The vocals are clear and forward. This could come in handy when listening to songs, podcasts, dialogue-heavy movies, etc. The instruments were also clear, although sometimes they felt thin. This is evident in the presentation of violin strings in Stumble Then Rise by Silver Mt Zion. In this track, the high notes are also very audible.

In similar tracks with complex instrument play, sounds start to feel compressed together. But considering the price they are coming for, that's not a biggie.

Last but not least, Noise has added another special feature for its Master series users within the Noise Audio app: Spatial audio with head tracking. They give you a feeling of audio anchored to the source device. It is fun, but I don't enjoy listening like that for long. But you may like it. I'd say it is worth trying for the curiosity alone.

Reasonable ANC and call quality

The Master Buds 2 offer adaptive active noise cancellation rated at up to 51dB. The adaptive mode works, but I chose to use the Max ANC setting because the adaptive mode kept changing the noise cancellation in a distracting way.

I wore it in the office, at home, while commuting in the metro, in auto rickshaws, and the ANC on the Buds 2 performs quite well for everyday environments. It does not completely eliminate all sound, especially sudden or sharp noises, but it significantly lowers the overall noise level. And that is what I want from an ANC earbud.

I can't share the same satisfaction with Transparency mode. It allows outside sound to pass, more than the Noise Cancellation Off mode, but the sound wasn't very natural. I used it to stay aware of my surroundings, on less busy roads, but didn't feel like using it for long.

As for calls, the experience was fine. Both parties could hear each other clearly, and the six-mic system with ENC algorithms does a good job of filtering out moderate background noise.

Battery life and charging

With ANC off, the earbuds lasted around 6.5 hours in our battery drain test. The music was continuously playing at 80% volume on my Galaxy S23 (source device). With the case, the brand claims around 30 hours of playtime. The mileage would vary if you use ANC.

Still at moderate volume, I figure you could comfortably get through most of a workday without worrying about battery life.

The earbuds also support fast charging. A full 0 to 100 top-up is rated to take around 1.5 hours. The company also says a quick 10-minute charge can provide up to six hours of playback with ANC off.

The charging case uses a USB Type-C port, in case you are wondering.

Should you buy Noise Master Buds 2?

The Noise Master Buds 2 try to do a lot, and to some extent, they succeed. After using them across work, commute, and casual listening, they come across as a fairly well-rounded pair, but not without a few rough edges.

They are comfortable to wear for long hours, the design stands out without being gaudy, the app gives enough controls and features without feeling complicated, and battery life is reliable. The sound is clean with clear vocals, instrument separation, decent bass, and high notes. It works for casual listening to music, podcasts, and movies in your everyday life. ANC is also effective enough for daily office noise and commuting.

But as I spent more time with them, a few issues started to show. The ear wings shift out of place, which affects both fit and ease of putting the buds back into the case. Dual-device connectivity is useful, but the audio handoff is not always consistent. Some features, like Motion Control, do not add much in real use. The sound, while clean, can feel thin and less energetic.

These are not major drawbacks, but they become more noticeable at the Rs 7,999 price. Also note that this is an introductory price, so the cost may go up later. So, the Master Buds 2 make sense if you like the design, want a comfortable pair with useful features, and are fine paying around this price.

Keep reading Digit.in for similar reviews.

Also Read: Realme Buds Air 8 review: Safe and sensible TWS under Rs 4,000